(3$&(3$& 9HUVLRQ9( 9 1XPHULFDO'LVWDQFH5HOD\ &RPPLVVLRQLQJ DQG0DLQWHQDQFH*XLGH 060& EPAC 3100 EPAC 3500 Numerical Distance Relay with Integrated Automatic and Control Equipment Commissioning and Maintenance Guide TRIP ALARM RELAY AVAILABLE SET TERMINAL 1 Help TERMINAL 2 03/99 MS/M 1.6882-C P-2 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE P-3 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 PREFACE Dear reader, We are continuously endeavouring to improve the quality of our brochures. This form has been designed to enable you to send in your remarks and comments. Please return the form, duly filled in, to the following address. Thank you in advance. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Address: ALSTOM P & C HV Product Line Marketing Department Avenue de Figuières F-34975 LATTES CEDEX Have you found any errors in the brochure ? If so, please indicate where they are. Did you find the brochure comprehensible and well set out ? Please indicate here any proposals for improvement. Have we supplied you with sufficient information to permit the understanding of the product presented here ? If not, what is missing and at what points should we supply additional indications ? Name: Position: Date: Utility or company: Address: Telephone: Post/Zip Code: City: Country: Concerning the item: P-4 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE P-5 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 INTRODUCTION The documentation covering the EPAC 3100/3500 Distance Protection is subdivided into 3 documents. Each document provides its recipient with the information needed for the performance of his or her tasks. The following table summarises the titles of the documents, their recipients and the supply date. Document Title Recipient Supply date Installer’s Guide Installer of the equipment Delivered with each equipment User's Guide Expert in-charge of the equipment On order Commissioning and Maintenance Guide Agent specialising in commissioning the equipment and in preventive maintenance On order P-6 EPAC 3100/3500 First issue: 11/97 MS/M 1.6882 Indice MS/M 1.6882-C REASON FOR UP-DATES COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Updating date Updating subject 11/97 EPAC 3100/3500 version 5 in "L" case A 05/98 EPAC 3100/3500 version 5-E B 09/98 Text corrections C 03/99 EPAC 3100/3500 version V6 EPAC 3100/3500 P-7 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 First issue: 11/97 STATE OF UP-DATES EPAC 3100/3500 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Index Updating date No. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 05/98 09/98 03/99 AMENDED PAGE INDEX PRELIMINARY PAGES A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A TEXT AND P-1 P-2 P-3 P-4 P-5 P-6 P-7 P-8 P-9 P-10 P-11 P-12 P-13 P-14 P-15 P-16 B C C B C C C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C DRAWING PAGES CHAP 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 A A A A A A A A A A A A B A A A A A B B B B B B B B B CHAP 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 B B B C C MS/M 1.6882 No. 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-23 2-24 2-25 2-26 2-27 2-28 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-40 2-41 2-42 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B C P-8 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C First issue: 11/97 STATE OF UP-DATES EPAC 3100/3500 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Index Updating date No. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 05/98 2-43 2-44 2-45 2-46 2-47 2-48 2-49 2-50 2-51 2-52 2-53 2-54 2-55 2-56 2-57 2-58 2-59 2-60 2-61 2-62 2-63 2-64 2-65 2-66 2-67 2-68 2-69 2-70 2-71 2-72 2-73 2-74 2-75 2-76 2-77 2-78 2-79 09/98 03/99 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B MS/M 1.6882 No. 2-80 2-81 2-82 2-83 2-84 2-85 2-86 2-87 2-88 2-89 2-90 2-91 2-92 2-93 2-94 2-95 2-96 2-97 2-98 2-99 2-100 2-101 2-102 2-103 2-104 2-105 2-106 2-107 2-108 2-109 2-110 2-111 2-112 2-113 2-114 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A CHAP 3 3-1 A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B P-9 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 First issue: 11/97 STATE OF UP-DATES EPAC 3100/3500 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Index Updating date No. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 05/98 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 09/98 03/99 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B CHAP 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B MS/M 1.6882 No. 4-24 4-25 4-26 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A B B CHAP 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-33 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B P-10 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C First issue: 11/97 STATE OF UP-DATES EPAC 3100/3500 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Index Updating date No. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 05/98 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-41 5-42 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-46 5-47 5-48 5-49 5-50 5-51 5-52 5-53 5-54 5-55 5-56 5-57 5-58 5-59 5-60 5-61 5-62 5-63 5-64 5-65 5-66 5-67 5-68 5-69 5-70 09/98 03/99 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B C C MS/M 1.6882 No. 5-71 5-72 5-73 5-74 5-75 5-76 5-77 5-78 5-79 5-80 5-81 5-82 5-83 5-84 5-85 5-86 5-87 5-88 5-89 5-90 5-91 5-92 5-93 5-94 5-95 5-96 5-97 5-98 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B CHAP 6 B B B B 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 A A A A A A A A B B B B P-11 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 First issue: 11/97 STATE OF UP-DATES EPAC 3100/3500 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Index Updating date No. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 05/98 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 09/98 03/99 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B C APPEND A A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-16 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B C C C C C C B MS/M 1.6882 No. A-17 A-18 A-19 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-27 A-28 A-29 A-30 A-31 A-32 A-33 A-34 A-35 A-36 A-37 A-38 A-39 A-40 A-41 A-42 A-43 A-44 A-45 A-46 A-47 A-48 A-49 A-50 A-51 A-52 A-53 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B C C P-12 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C First issue: 11/97 STATE OF UP-DATES EPAC 3100/3500 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Index No. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N Updating date 05/98 09/98 03/99 A-54 A-55 A-56 A-57 A-58 A-60 A-61 A-62 A-63 A-64 A-65 A-66 A-67 A-68 A-69 A-70 A-71 A-72 A-73 A-74 A-75 A-76 A-77 A-78 A-79 AMENDED PAGE INDEX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A APPEND B B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-11 C C C C C C C C C C C B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B No. B-12 B-13 B-14 B-15 B-16 MS/M 1.6882 AMENDED PAGE INDEX C C C C C P-13 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CONTENTS 1. 1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.3.1. 1.3.2. 1.3.3. 1.3.4. 1.3.5. 1.4. 1.4.1. 1.4.2. 1.5. INTRODUCTION ______________________________________________________________ 1-1 PRESENTATION OF THE GUIDE _________________________________________________ 1-3 SCOPE OF APPLICATION ______________________________________________________ 1-3 FUNCTIONS _________________________________________________________________ 1-4 Network Protection ___________________________________________________________ 1-5 Management of the Configuration Parameter Groups ______________________________ 1-5 Fault Analysis ________________________________________________________________ 1-5 User Interfaces _______________________________________________________________ 1-6 Communication with External Systems ___________________________________________ 1-7 EXTERNAL CONFIGURATION ___________________________________________________ 1-8 Front Panel __________________________________________________________________ 1-8 Rear Panel __________________________________________________________________ 1-9 INTERNAL CONFIGURATION __________________________________________________ 1-10 2. 2.1. 2.2. 2.2.1. 2.2.2. 2.3. 2.3.1. 2.3.2. 2.3.3. 2.3.4. 2.3.5. 2.3.6. 2.3.7. 2.3.8. 2.3.9. 2.3.10. 2.4. METHOD OF OPERATION ______________________________________________________ 2-1 EPAC GENERAL OPERATION ___________________________________________________ 2-4 ACQUIRING AND PRE-PROCESSING THE ELECTRIC VALUES _________________________ 2-4 Acquisition __________________________________________________________________ 2-4 Pre-processing _______________________________________________________________ 2-5 STANDARD DISTANCE PROTECTION _____________________________________________ 2-6 Detecting the Fault, Selecting the phase and Defining the Directional _________________ 2-6 Zone Definition _____________________________________________________________ 2-16 Algorithm chaining __________________________________________________________ 2-21 Tripping Logic _______________________________________________________________ 2-21 Tripping Logic with Teleprotection ______________________________________________ 2-22 Tripping logic in zone reach control mode _______________________________________ 2-30 Overcurrent Start-Up _________________________________________________________ 2-32 Functions Associated with Distance Protection ____________________________________ 2-36 Input-Output Logic Functions __________________________________________________ 2-49 Input-Output Logic Functions __________________________________________________ 2-50 DISTANCE PROTECTION FOR NETWORKS WITH INSULATED OR IMPEDANT NEUTRAL (RNI OPTION) _______________________________________________________________ 2-56 Fault Analysis by the RNI Module ______________________________________________ 2-57 Phase Selection by the RNI Module _____________________________________________ 2-58 Sensitive Directional Earth Fault Protection on Insulated or Impedant Neutral Networks 2-62 Associated Inputs/Outputs ____________________________________________________ 2-67 COMPLEMENTARY PROTECTION DEVICES _______________________________________ 2-68 DEF Protection Against High Resistance Earth Faults (Optional) _____________________ 2-68 Overload, Undervoltage, Overvoltage Protection Devices __________________________ 2-77 AUTO-RECLOSER FUNCTION AND SYNCHRO-CHECK FUNCTION ___________________ 2-81 Recloser____________________________________________________________________ 2-81 Synchro-check ______________________________________________________________ 2-86 Combined auto-recloser/synchro-check operation ________________________________ 2-88 Specific Auto Recloser Operations ______________________________________________ 2-89 Pole Discrepancy ____________________________________________________________ 2-92 Circuit breaker Opening Fault _________________________________________________ 2-92 Inputs/Outputs associated with the Recloser _____________________________________ 2-93 Inputs/Outputs associated with Synchro-check ___________________________________ 2-93 Logic Functions for Auto-Recloser and Synchro-Check Operation ____________________ 2-94 FAULT ANALYSIS ____________________________________________________________ 2-96 Fault Reports _______________________________________________________________ 2-96 2.4.1. 2.4.2. 2.4.3. 2.4.4. 2.5. 2.5.1. 2.5.2. 2.6. 2.6.1. 2.6.2. 2.6.3. 2.6.4. 2.6.5. 2.6.6. 2.6.7. 2.6.8. 2.6.9. 2.7. 2.7.1. P-14 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.7.2. 2.7.3. 2.7.4. 2.8. 2.9. 2.9.1. 2.9.2. 2.9.3. 2.9.4. 2.10. 2.11. 2.11.1. 2.11.2. 2.11.3. Disturbance recording Module (optional) ________________________________________ 2-97 Fault Locator (optional) _______________________________________________________ 2-99 Local Printing of Fault Reports ________________________________________________ 2-100 VIEWING POLLING DATA ____________________________________________________ 2-102 USER INTERFACES __________________________________________________________ 2-103 Monitoring Indicator Lights ___________________________________________________ 2-103 WinEPAC Software Installed on a Micro-Computer _______________________________ 2-105 Front Panel Display Unit _____________________________________________________ 2-107 Protection Access Software & Toolkit software (communication by COURIER) _________ 2-108 MANAGEMENT OF SETTING GROUPS _________________________________________ 2-109 COMMUNICATION WITH EXTERNAL SYSTEMS __________________________________ 2-110 Exchanging Fault Data ______________________________________________________ 2-110 Interface with a Control System _______________________________________________ 2-111 Synchronisation with an External Time Signal ___________________________________ 2-113 3. 3.1. 3.1.1. 3.1.2. 3.2. 3.2.1. 3.2.2. HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION ______________________________________ 3-1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION _____________________________________________________ 3-3 Data Flow ___________________________________________________________________ 3-3 Board Functions ______________________________________________________________ 3-5 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION _____________________________________________________ 3-11 Sequencing Software Tasks ___________________________________________________ 3-11 EPAC Self-Tests ______________________________________________________________ 3-11 4. TOOLS FOR COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ________________________________________________________________ 4-1 HARDWARE TOOLS ___________________________________________________________ 4-4 SOFTWARE TOOLS ___________________________________________________________ 4-5 WinEPAC Software ___________________________________________________________ 4-5 The EPAC Software on the Display _____________________________________________ 4-17 Accessing the EPAC from the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software (PAS & T) __ 4-23 4.1. 4.2. 4.2.1. 4.2.2. 4.2.3. 5. 5.1. 5.1.1. 5.1.2. 5.1.3. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.4.1. 5.4.2. COMMISSIONING ____________________________________________________________ 5-1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS ________________________________________________________ 5-4 Mechanical Checks ___________________________________________________________ 5-4 Checking the Nominal Values __________________________________________________ 5-5 Checking Connections _________________________________________________________ 5-6 ENERGIZATION _____________________________________________________________ 5-10 CHECKING THE STATUS OF THE EPAC 3100/3500 ________________________________ 5-10 EPAC CONFIGURATION ______________________________________________________ 5-11 Configuration Management ___________________________________________________ 5-11 Changing the Password ______________________________________________________ 5-12 Selecting a configuration (Setting Group) ________________________________________ 5-14 Transferring a configuration to the EPAC ________________________________________ 5-16 Changing configurations _____________________________________________________ 5-18 Saving and printing a configuration ____________________________________________ 5-20 Preparing a configuration ____________________________________________________ 5-21 Changing the communication parameters _______________________________________ 5-24 Changing the basic configuration parameters ____________________________________ 5-28 Configuring the Functions of the EPAC __________________________________________ 5-30 Changing the line parameters _________________________________________________ 5-32 Changing the teleaction parameters ____________________________________________ 5-35 Changing the Zone Setting Parameters _________________________________________ 5-38 Changing the teleaction parameters for a tee line ________________________________ 5-42 Changing the Weak Infeed Parameters _________________________________________ 5-45 P-15 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 5.5. 5.6. 5.6.1. 5.6.2. Changing the Miscellaneous Parameters ________________________________________ 5-47 Changing the fuse failure parameters __________________________________________ 5-49 Configuring the software functions _____________________________________________ 5-51 Changing the Power Swing Parameters _________________________________________ 5-53 Changing the High Resistance Earth Fault Parameters _____________________________ 5-56 Changing the Parameters of the Automatic Recloser Control _______________________ 5-59 Changing the Synchrocheck Parameters ________________________________________ 5-62 Changing the Parameters of isolated or compensated network (RNI) protection _______ 5-65 Changing the parameters of Sensitive Directional Earth Fault protection __________________________________________________________________ 5-67 Changing the MaxI, MaxU and MinU Protection Parameters _______________________ 5-70 Changing the disturbance recording parameters _________________________________ 5-73 Assigning the digital Inputs/Outputs ___________________________________________ 5-76 Checking Configuration Consistency ____________________________________________ 5-80 CHECKING THE RESULTS OF THE ANALOGUE VALUES ____________________________ 5-82 CHECKING THE PROTECTION AND AUTOMATIC CONTROL FUNCTIONS _____________ 5-84 Fault Analysis Tools __________________________________________________________ 5-84 Functional Tests _____________________________________________________________ 5-88 6. 6.1. 6.1.1. 6.1.2. 6.2. 6.2.1. 6.2.2. 6.2.3. 6.2.4. 6.2.5. 6.3. 6.3.1. 6.3.2. 6.3.3. 6.3.4. 6.3.5. 6.3.6. 6.3.7. 6.3.8. MAINTENANCE ______________________________________________________________ 6-1 ANALYSING THE RESULTS OF THE SELF-TESTS _____________________________________ 6-4 Maintenance Lights __________________________________________________________ 6-4 Maintenance Dialogue ________________________________________________________ 6-6 COMPLEMENTARY TESTS TO THE SELF-TEST ______________________________________ 6-14 Fast Check _________________________________________________________________ 6-14 Checking the Connections _____________________________________________________ 6-14 Tests for Checking the Active Operation of the Inputs and Outputs __________________ 6-15 Checking the Contacts of the Logic Inputs _______________________________________ 6-15 Checking the Tripping Contacts and the Signalling Contacts ________________________ 6-16 REPAIRING THE BOARDS _____________________________________________________ 6-18 Repairing the Converter Board ________________________________________________ 6-19 Repairing the TMS Board _____________________________________________________ 6-21 Repairing the QTF Board _____________________________________________________ 6-22 Repairing the main IO-1 or IO-3 Board _________________________________________ 6-24 Repairing the additional IO-1 or IO-3 or IO-2 Board ______________________________ 6-25 Repairing the AC Board ______________________________________________________ 6-26 Repairing one of the daughter boards of the AC Board ____________________________ 6-27 Repairing the IRIG-B board ___________________________________________________ 6-28 5.4.3. APPENDIX A ________________________________________________________________________ A-1 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS _________________________________________________________ A-3 MONITORING PARAMETERS OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTION ______________________________ A-4 COMMISSIONING REPORT ___________________________________________________________ A-10 TYPES OF BOARD FAULT _____________________________________________________________ A-28 ANALOGUE INPUT CONNECTIONS ____________________________________________________ A-31 INPUT/OUTPUT CONTACT CONNECTIONS ______________________________________________ A-33 CURVES ___________________________________________________________________________ A-40 OUT LINE __________________________________________________________________________ A-47 DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS____________________________________________________________ A-49 EPAC COURIER MESSAGES ___________________________________________________________ A-52 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS ________________________________________________________________ A-65 CONNECTIONS TO A PC OR A PRINTER ________________________________________________ A-73 EPAC FUNCTIONS / MODELS _________________________________________________________ A-76 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ALLOCATION _______________________________________________________ A-77 P-16 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C APPENDIX B - SOFTWARE VERSION V6 __________________________________________________ B-1 B1 NEW FUNCTIONS ____________________________________________________________ B-4 B2 EVOLUTIONS OF EXITING FUNCTIONS __________________________________________ B-7 B3 OTHER MODIFICATIONS ______________________________________________________ B-12 B4 WIN EPAC VERSION V6 ______________________________________________________ B-16 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 1-1 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CONTENTS PAGE 1.1. PRESENTATION OF THE GUIDE _________________________________________________ 1-3 1.2. SCOPE OF APPLICATION ______________________________________________________ 1-3 1.3. 1.3.1. 1.3.2. 1.3.3. 1.3.4. 1.3.5. FUNCTIONS _________________________________________________________________ Network Protection ___________________________________________________________ Management of the Configuration Parameter Groups ______________________________ Fault Analysis ________________________________________________________________ User Interfaces _______________________________________________________________ Communication with External Systems ___________________________________________ 1.4. 1.4.1. 1.4.2. EXTERNAL CONFIGURATION ___________________________________________________ 1-8 Front Panel __________________________________________________________________ 1-8 Rear Panel __________________________________________________________________ 1-9 1.5. INTERNAL CONFIGURATION __________________________________________________ 1-10 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-2 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE 1-3 MS/M 1.6882-C 1.1. EPAC 3100/3500 PRESENTATION OF THE GUIDE This guide gives a detailed description of the EPAC protection equipment designed by GEC ALSTHOM T&D P&C to provide protection for power networks.The bulk of the text relates to version V5-E. The evolution and modifications applicable to EPAC version V6 are covered in appendix B. Chapter 1 defines the scope of application and the functions of the EPAC protection unit. Chapter 2 describes the basic and optional functions ensured by the EPAC. The following modules are also described in chapter 2: - network protection module, - fault analysis module, - user interface module, - communication module. Chapter 3 describes the hardware and software architecture of the EPAC. Chapter 4 describes the user interfaces, particularly the WinEPAC software and the front display unit software. Chapter 5 describes the commissioning and setting of the EPAC. Chapter 6 describes the EPAC maintenance tools and procedures. Appendix A contains technical data, operating times, IDMT curves and other relevant information. Appendix B provides information on the evolutions added to EPAC version V6 as compared with version V5-E described in the other chapters of this guide. 1.2. SCOPE OF APPLICATION The EPAC is a numerical and full-scheme relay. It is designed to provide selective and rapid protection of the distribution, subtransmission and transmission networks. It processes any type of electric fault that could occur on the lines and the cables of such networks. Because of its modular design, it is particularly adapted to all the characteristics of the network to be protected. The EPAC can be used as a stand-alone distance protection or as part of a teleaction scheme. It incorporates two standard teleprotection modes: - directional protection mode, particularly suited to the protection of short distance lines. It defines the zone resistances for four forward and one reverse zone, - busbar isolation mode, particularly suited to protection against busbar faults. It allows the busbars requiring protection to be quickly and selectively isolated if a fault occurs. The EPAC may be used on insulated neutral or Petersen coil-earthed power networks. The EPAC is particularly suited to the transmission networks for the following reasons: - its operates at high speed, which is an essential requirement on a transmission network, - it is able to perform single-phase tripping in the event of a phase-to-earth fault. 1-4 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C The EPAC may also be integrated with power distribution networks for the following reasons: - it incorporates teleprotection functions adapted to branch lines, - it has a particularly good tolerance to high harmonic contents, which are frequent on this type of network. The EPAC can protect non-homogeneous lines (underground cable + overhead line). 1.3. FUNCTIONS Zero sequence compensation Bar voltages Fault locator Distance protection Currents Circuit breaker monitoring Distance protection for isolated or compensated network Auto Recloser Protection against resistant earth fault Synchrocheck MaxI, MaxU, MinU Protection Disturbance recorder Measurements Fault Reports Voltages User dialogue on PC User dialogue on display unit WinEPAC MMI EPAC display unit MMI Control System via KBUS or VDEW Time synchronisation Figure 1.3a: Functions of the EPAC Communication management Management of disturbance recording data (TPE, VDEW or COURIER format) 1-5 MS/M 1.6882-C 1.3.1. EPAC 3100/3500 Network Protection The main function of the EPAC equipment is to provide distance protection. This protection is set as directional or not, depending on the part of the network to be protected. The complementary protection modules may be added to this basic protection according to the characteristics of the network to which the EPAC is connected: 1.3.2. - a power swing processing module which allows the selective locking of the protection when a power oscillation or a synchronism loss occurs, - a phase-to-earth fault processing module which is used if the neutral is insulated or earthed via an impedance or a "Petersen coil", - an earth fault processing module particularly suited to high resistance faults, - a protection module against overloads, undervoltages and overvoltages, - a circuit-breaker automatic reclosing module. This module may be completed with a synchroniser check facility for delayed reclosing application, - a module for managing line and busbar fuse failures. Management of the Configuration Parameter Groups The EPAC contains in memory a specific configuration for parameterising its different functions. In order to improve the flexibility of use, a complementary element is available which, allows the integration of several parameter groups. It allows up to four setting groups to be stored in memory. At any one moment, only one of these groups is active. The activation of another setting group is controlled as follows: 1.3.3. - either from one of the user interfaces, - or from two wired inputs, - or from a central control computer via one of the VDEW or COURIER communication protocols. Fault Analysis The EPAC provides, in the standard configuration, the information allowing the analysis of a fault which has just been processed: - the nominal value of the currents, voltages and frequency of the fault detected by the EPAC, - a calculation of the distance to the fault is provided by the measurement algorithm, - faulty phase(s), phase(s) tripped, and the zone of the fault. This basic information can be supplemented by integrating the two following elements: - a disturbance recording element used for recording the evolution of the following values while a fault occurs: . the 8 analogue values measured continuously by the EPAC, . the logic values configured in order to be recorded (for instance, the type of tripping caused by the fault), 1-6 EPAC 3100/3500 - MS/M 1.6882-C a fault locator element (present in all the standard models of EPAC) which can determine accurately the distance to a fault. A printer can be connected to the EPAC to print fault reports automatically. 1.3.4. User Interfaces 1.3.4.1. Front Panel Indicator Lights The EPAC 3100/3500 incorporates on its front panel two groups of indicator lights which provide the following information: - the detection of a minor or major alarm, ( " ALARM " ) - the tripping of the associated circuit breaker, ( "TRIP " ) - the EPAC 3100/3500 operation. ( " RELAY AVAILABLE " ) 1.3.4.2. WinEPAC software The EPAC is provided, in the standard configuration, with a software called WinEPAC. This software is the main man-machine interface of the product and it is designed to operate on a personal computer fitted with MSWindows*. It is used for the following functions: - to configure the operation of the various elements which may be integrated into the EPAC, - to assign inputs/outputs of the various elements to the contacts on the input/output board(s), - to facilitate repairs by using the maintenance dialogue as a guide to direct trouble shooting, - to consult the fault characteristics recorded by the EPAC, - to configure some of the functions of the WinEPAC software, (presentation language, unit of the fault distance, communication port, etc.), - to consult certain information relative to the user’s EPAC (hardware and software functions installed on the EPAC, language used to display fault recording information and display unit messages, computer and the name by default, etc.), - to monitor and consult the status of digital and analogue values on EPAC terminals. * ! WinEPAC does not run in the Windows NT (32 bits) environment. 1.3.4.3. Protection Access Software & Toolkit Software (PAS&T) This software is supplied with the K-bus COURIER option. It runs under DOS on a micro-computer and communicates with the EPAC via a KITZ protocol converter. It requires no particular microcomputer configuration and is used: - to configure the operation of the various modules which may be integrated into the EPAC, - to assign inputs/outputs of the various modules to the contacts on the input/output board(s), - to consult the fault characteristics recorded by the EPAC, - to consult or modify certain information relative to the user’s EPAC (hardware and software functions installed), 1-7 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 - to upload fault recording events in COMTRADE format (if the option is available), - to monitor and consult the status of digital and anologue values at the EPAC terminals, - to log (on screen, file or printer) I/O changes and commands carried out from the EPAC. 1.3.4.4. Front Panel Display Unit There is a display unit on the EPAC 3100/3500 front panel. It provides exactly the same functions as are available with the WinEPAC software. The unit consists of: - a two line display, - six function keys. Online help is available to facilitate its use. 1.3.5. Communication with External Systems Communication with external systems is managed by the AC board. The board is able to manage several links and protocols through its daughter-boards (available as options): - KBUS: allows K-bus COURIER supervision from a master control centre, ( cf § 1.3.4.3 ) - VDEW: used for communication via its own protocol, CEI 870-5, between peripherals and the master control computer, - Current Loop: to utilise TPE 2000 type fault recording data, - Modem: to upload disturbance recorders events, ( compatible to all modems type HAYES) - IRIG-B: used for time synchronisation. The KBUS and VDEW boards are mutually exclusive, as are the Current Loop and Modem boards. Only K-bus COURIER- and TPE-format disturbance recording allow event data to be exploited locally via the EPAC front panel, using the WinTPE software. If either of these boards are integrated into the EPAC 3100/3500, communication with the following items can be managed: - a digital control system, - an external time synchronisation system, - a system designed for the direct management, locally or remotely, of fault recording data. 1-8 EPAC 3100/3500 1.4. MS/M 1.6882-C EXTERNAL CONFIGURATION The EPAC 3100/3500 protection unit is frame mounted or cabinet mounted. Its dimensions depend on the EPAC version. EPAC 3100 dimensions: (flush mounting) - Width 412.50 mm - Height 177 mm - Depth 304.30 mm EPAC 3500 dimensions: (rack mounting) - Width 483 mm - Height 177 mm - Depth 304.30 mm The unit weights less than 12 kg for both versions. 1.4.1. Front Panel It incorporates a serigraphied cover. The cover is latched by a tightening nut on the right part of the rack cover. EPAC 3100 Serial port for WinEPAC PC Serial port for: - WinV24 - or a local printer EPAC 3500 Serial port for WinEPAC PC Serial port for: - WinV24 - or a local printer Figure 1.4a: EPAC 3100 and 3500 Front Panels 1-9 MS/M 1.6882-C 1.4.2. EPAC 3100/3500 Front panel component Function Maintenance LEDs indicate equipment status. During normal operation, the LED "RELAY AVAILABLE" should flash and the LED "ALARM" should be off. Indication LED The LED "TRIP" lights up when the protection trips. TERMINAL 1 connector allows connection of a micro-computer to the EPAC in order to access the functions of the WinEPAC operator dialogue. Display unit allows access to the functions of the EPAC operator dialogue. TERMINAL 2 connector used for: - the disturbance recording in the local mode with WinTPE software, - printing automatically fault reports. Rear Panel The rack panel of all models incorporates: - a ground connection point, - an X6 connector for the power supply, - two connectors, X1 and X2, incorporating the following: . the tripping outputs, . the signalling contacts, . the digital inputs, - the X5 connector for connection of the analogue inputs, - two connectors, X3 and X4, for the additional inputs/outputs in option (including tripping contacts). Two ports are located on the rear of the EPAC for use with communication devices (VDEW, current loop to TPE restitution unit, time synchronisation, etc.) 1-10 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C X6 1 2 X1 X3 27 1 27 1 28 2 28 2 27 1 27 1 28 2 28 2 X5 27 28 27 1 X6 28 2 D24 X1 X3 X2 X4 X2 X4 X5 X30 D26 D25 X18 VDEW and current loop option X20 KBUS-COURIER and modem option X30 BNC connection for IRIG-B time synchronisation signal Figure 1.4b: EPAC rear panel If the daughter-boards of the AC board are the VDEW and current loop boards, the connectors have the following functions: - D24 VDEW receiver, - D25 VDEW transmitter, - X18 Current loop. If the daughter-boards of the AC board are the KBUS and MODEM boards, the connectors have the following functions: 1.5. - X20 MODEM link, - D26 KBUS link. INTERNAL CONFIGURATION The EPAC 3100/3500 is based on a modular architecture. The following items are included in this architecture: - basic boards, ensuring standard functions and a number of functions which do not need additional boards, - additional boards, if required, ensuring functions which cannot be performed by the standard architecture. 1-11 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Standard board: Function: QTF receives the analogue input transformers. TMS analogue-to-digital conversion of the inputs. This board also receives the processor which provides the basic functions of the EPAC and the other functions which do not need additional boards. IO-1 or IO-3 Actuates the following: - 3 tripping contacts, (6 tripping contacts for IO-3) - 1 closing contact, - 16 signalling contacts, (13 signaling contacts for IO-3) - 8 logic inputs, - 1 fault device contact. Power supply converter Equipment power supply 48, 60, 110, 125, 220 and 250 Vdc. Additional board: Function: IO-2 or IO-1 or IO-3 The additional IO-1 or IO-3 boards actuate the same type of contacts as the first IO-1 or IO-3 boards. The IO-2 board actuates the following: - 3 tripping contacts, - 1 closing contact, - 16 signalling contacts, - 1 fault device contact. AC and daughter-boards Management of the following: - a serial link with a micro-computer for the local processing of the TPE or COURIER fault recording, - 4 types of fault recording links including: optical (IEC 870-5VDEW), current loop (TPE Protocol), DB9 for Modem Link to the disturbance recorder, RS485-type (KBUS), - an interface board with: . an external synchronization signal (IRIGB board), . a control system network (KBUS or VDEW board). 1-12 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CHAPTER 2 METHOD OF OPERATION EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 2-1 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CONTENTS PAGE 2.1. EPAC GENERAL OPERATION ___________________________________________________ 2-4 2.2. 2.2.1. 2.2.2. ACQUIRING AND PRE-PROCESSING THE ELECTRIC VALUES _________________________ 2-4 Acquisition __________________________________________________________________ 2-4 Pre-processing _______________________________________________________________ 2-5 2.3. 2.3.1. 2.3.2. 2.3.3. 2.3.4. 2.3.5. 2.3.6. 2.3.7. 2.3.8. 2.3.9. 2.3.10. STANDARD DISTANCE PROTECTION _____________________________________________ 2-6 Detecting the Fault, Selecting the phase and Defining the Directional _________________ 2-6 Zone Definition _____________________________________________________________ 2-16 Algorithm chaining __________________________________________________________ 2-21 Tripping Logic _______________________________________________________________ 2-22 Tripping Logic with Teleprotection ______________________________________________ 2-22 Tripping logic in zone reach control mode _______________________________________ 2-30 Overcurrent Start-Up _________________________________________________________ 2-32 Functions Associated with Distance Protection ____________________________________ 2-36 Associated Inputs/Outputs ____________________________________________________ 2-49 Input-Output Logic Functions __________________________________________________ 2-50 2.4. 2.4.1. 2.4.2. 2.4.3. 2.4.4. DISTANCE PROTECTION FOR NETWORKS WITH INSULATED OR IMPEDANT NEUTRAL (RNI OPTION) _______________________________________________________________ 2-56 Fault Analysis by the RNI Module ______________________________________________ 2-57 Phase Selection by the RNI Module _____________________________________________ 2-58 Sensitive Directional Earth Fault Protection on Insulated or Impedant Neutral Networks 2-62 Associated Inputs/Outputs ____________________________________________________ 2-67 2.5. 2.5.1. 2.5.2. COMPLEMENTARY PROTECTION DEVICES _______________________________________ 2-68 DEF Protection Against High Resistance Earth Faults ______________________________ 2-68 Overload, Undervoltage, Overvoltage Protection Devices __________________________ 2-77 2.6. 2.6.1. 2.6.2. 2.6.3. 2.6.4. 2.6.5. 2.6.6. 2.6.7. 2.6.8. 2.6.9. AUTO-RECLOSER FUNCTION AND SYNCHRO-CHECK FUNCTION ___________________ 2-81 Recloser____________________________________________________________________ 2-81 Synchro-check ______________________________________________________________ 2-86 Combined auto-recloser/synchro-check operation ________________________________ 2-88 Specific Auto Recloser Operations ______________________________________________ 2-89 Pole Discrepancy ____________________________________________________________ 2-92 Circuit breaker Opening Fault _________________________________________________ 2-92 Inputs/Outputs associated with the Recloser _____________________________________ 2-93 Inputs/Outputs associated with Synchro-check ___________________________________ 2-93 Logic Functions for Auto-Recloser and Synchro-Check Operation ____________________ 2-94 2.7. 2.7.1. 2.7.2. 2.7.3. 2.7.4. FAULT ANALYSIS ____________________________________________________________ 2-96 Fault Reports _______________________________________________________________ 2-96 Disturbance recording element (optional) ________________________________________ 2-97 Fault Locator ________________________________________________________________ 2-99 Local Printing of Fault Reports ________________________________________________ 2-100 2-2 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.8. VIEWING POLLING DATA ____________________________________________________ 2-102 2.9. 2.9.1. 2.9.2. 2.9.3. 2.9.4. USER INTERFACES __________________________________________________________ 2-103 Monitoring Indicator Lights ___________________________________________________ 2-103 WinEPAC Software Installed on a Micro-Computer _______________________________ 2-105 Front Panel Display Unit _____________________________________________________ 2-107 Protection Access Software & Toolkit software (communication by COURIER) _________ 2-108 2.10. MANAGEMENT OF SETTING GROUPS _________________________________________ 2-109 2.11. 2.11.1. 2.11.2. 2.11.3. COMMUNICATION WITH EXTERNAL SYSTEMS __________________________________ 2-110 Exchanging Fault Data ______________________________________________________ 2-110 Interface with a Control System _______________________________________________ 2-111 Synchronisation with an External Time Signal ___________________________________ 2-113 2-3 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C This chapter describes the operation of all the elements which may be integrated into the EPAC 3100/3500: - the standard distance protection, - the distance protection for insulated or impedant neutral network (RNI option), - the complementary protection functions: . DEF protection against highly resistant earth faults, . protection against overloads, overvoltages and undervoltages, - the recloser and its associated check synchronising function, - the fault analysis tools: . the basic information provided by the EPAC, . the fault locator, . the disturbance recorder (optional), - the user dialogue interfaces: . the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software, . the WinEPAC software, . the display unit located on the front panel of the EPAC, - the communication interfaces with external systems: . interface with a control system, via KBUS-COURIER or VDEW, . synchronisation interface on an external time signal, . fault recording data exchange interface, - multiple setting groups. Inputs/outputs may be assigned to contacts on the EPAC input/output board(s) by operator dialogue. The optional functions incorporated in the EPAC depend on the model selected by the user. 2-4 EPAC 3100/3500 2.1. MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC GENERAL OPERATION In the electrical network, the EPAC is designed to protect the section to which it is connected. It detects and then analyses the faults and trips one or more phase(s) of the breaker, if required. Its first task is to acquire the voltages and currents provided through the transformers which supply the protection. These signals are pre-processed so that only the characteristic signals are retained and the interference is eliminated. The filtered signals are then analysed by the various protection elements to detect any fault indication. When a fault is detected, specific algorithms analyse it to determine its characteristics and command circuit breaker tripping, if required. 2.2. ACQUIRING AND PRE-PROCESSING THE ELECTRIC VALUES The EPAC is a numerical protection relay which may operate from a global model of the line. Therefore, the analogue values recorded are digitalised and the signals are filtered in order to suppress the noises and the transient values which are not modelled. < Analogue >< 24 samples/period >< 12 samples/period > x1 I B x 16 SAMPLING AND ANALOGUE-TODIGITAL CONVERSION 24 SAMPLES PER PERIOD U B LOW-PASS FILTER LOW-PASS FILTER SUB-SAMPLE 1/2 If FIR DERIVATOR SUB-SAMPLE 1/2 I'f ONE-SAMPLE DELAY SUB-SAMPLE 1/2 Uf ONE-SAMPLE DELAY FIR : finite impulse response filter Figure 2.2a: Signal Acquisition and Pre-Processing 2.2.1. Acquisition The EPAC is designed for the acquisition of the following data: - the three phase voltages and the three phase currents, - the zero-sequence current, - the busbar voltage, - the image voltage of the residual currents on the parallel lines, used by the fault locator function. These 9 analogue inputs are filtered through low-pass filters with a cut-off frequency of 166 Hz. These filters ensure an anti-return function (suppression of the high frequencies which cannot be sampled correctly). In order to improve the dynamic range, the current inputs are processed over two scales, one with a gain of x1 and the other with x16. 2-5 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 These inputs are multiplexed and sampled at a rate equal to 24 times the network frequency; this frequency is measured in the shaping function. The utility of this interlock will become obvious in the description of the algorithm of calculation of the superimposed values. The time lags between the sampling instants are compensated for by the software. The analogue-to-digital conversion is performed by a 12-bit converter, which provides the following: 2.2.2. - voltages expressed on 11 bits + 1 sign bit, - currents expressed on 15 bits + 1 sign bit. Pre-processing Pre-processing consists of shaping and filtering the recorded electric values. 2.2.2.1. Shaping the Signals Shaping consists of the following: - correcting the drift of filters and analogue amplifiers, - selecting the scale for each current input sample. The sample from the x1 channel is used only if the sample from scale x16 generates a saturation, - measuring the network frequency. This is measured on Va voltage channel by measuring the time between two zero transition. 2.2.2.2. Filtering the Signals Filtering is performed in order to: - suppress the noise frequencies, - calculate the current derivatives that are used by the algorithms. Signals are first filtered by filters operating at a rate of 24 samples per period and then by filters operating at 12 samples per period. The following filters operate at a rate of 24 samples per period: - a low-pass filter applied to all channels, - a high-pass filter applied to all channels in order to eliminate the DC components of the current, - a band-pass FIR derivator applied to all currents (phase to earth, phase to phase, residual). The lag of this filter is applied to the other channels. The following filters operate at a rate of 12 samples per period: - negative-sequence voltage and current filter, - fundamental and second harmonic filter applied to currents. 2-6 EPAC 3100/3500 2.3. MS/M 1.6882-C STANDARD DISTANCE PROTECTION Distance protection is the main function of the EPAC. This equipment item should detect and eliminate as rapidly and selectively as possible the faults occurring on the network. Two protection modes can be used, depending on the part of the substation to be protected: - directional distance protection mode for overhead lines, underground lines and transformers, - busbar isolation mode for busbar protection. When a fault is detected, the distance protection operates as follows: - it selects the faulty phase(s), - it determines the direction of the fault (for directional mode), - it initiates the tripping of the faulty phase(s), if necessary, in coordination or not with a protection at the other end of the line. The operation is based on the combined use of two types of algorithms: - "High-speed" algorithms using only the superimposed values that are characteristic of a fault, - "Conventional" algorithms using the values measured while the fault occurred, as used by the conventional distance relays. Both the above algorithms always run in parallel continuously. The "High-Speed" algorithms have priority over the "Conventional" algorithms due to their faster fault detection. However, "High-speed" algorithms are activated only for 40 ms since system superimposed (transcient) values are predominant only during first few cycles. 2.3.1. Detecting the Fault, Selecting the phase and Defining the Directional 2.3.1.1. "High-Speed" Algorithms These algorithms are used for the following functions: - detection of the fault by comparing the superimposed values to a threshold which is low enough to be crossed when a fault occurs, - establishing the direction of the fault. Only the fault can generate superimposed values, so it is possible to determine its direction by measuring the transit direction of the superimposed energy, - phase selection. As the superimposed values do not include the load currents, it is possible to make an efficient phase selection. 2-7 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Fault Modelling Let us consider a stable network status, i.e. a network in a status which can be assumed as a steady-state operating status. When a fault occurs, a new status is established. If there is no other modification, the differences between the two states (before and after the fault) are caused by the fault. If both states are included in the same linear domain, the superimposing principle may be used: the state after the fault is equivalent to the sum of the values of the state before the fault and the values characteristic of the fault. The fault acts as a source for the latter and the generators as passive impedances in this case. EPAC A IA F B UA Rdef Network with fault EPAC A IAav UAav F B UFav Network prior to fault EPAC A IA B - UFav UA Rdef Fault conditions UA = UA - UAav IA = IA - IAav Figure 2.3a: Electric Fault Values In order to use the modelling application, the following requirements are necessary: - the conditions before and after the fault conserve linearity characteristics: . no saturation or clipping of the measured values, . no saturation of current and voltage transformers, 2-8 EPAC 3100/3500 - MS/M 1.6882-C the only modifications that occur are caused by the fault: . no operation of the circuit breakers, - the conditions before the fault must be known accurately and must allow extrapolation, - the source characteristics should not change noticeably. This is true for times short enough in relation to the mechanical time constants of the generators. When these requirements are fulfilled, the superimposed values determine the characteristics of the fault and allow the filtering of the values before the fault, as for example the transient values. The network is then said to be "healthy" before the fault occurrence. Network Status Monitoring The network status is monitored continuously to determine whether the "High-Speed" algorithms may be actuated. So, for these algorithms to be used, the network must be "healthy", which is true if: - the line is not open, - all voltages are between 70 % and 130 % of the nominal value, - the residual voltage is less than 10 % of the nominal value, - the residual current is less than 10 % of the nominal value + 3.3 % of the maximum current flowing on a line, - there is no power swing on a network, - the impedance points are outside the characteristic, - frequency tracking has been established. For the network to be declared "healthy", these conditions must be verified over a period at least 160 ms. 2-9 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Detecting a Transition Detecting a transition, the EPAC compares sampled current and voltage values at the instant "t" with the values predicted from those stored in the memory one period and two periods previously. G(t)= current or voltage Gp(t) 2T T G(t - 2T) G(t - T) G(t) t-2T t-T t Time Figure 2.3b: Recorded Transition values Gp(t) = 2G(t-T) - G(t-2T) where Gp(t) is the predicted value. A transition is detected on one of the current or voltage input values if the absolute value of (G(t) - Gp(t)) exceeds a threshold of 0.2 In or, 0.1 Un/√3. ∆G(t) = G(t) - Gp(t) is the transition value of the reading G. In order to eliminate the transitions generated by possible operations or by high frequencies, the transition detected over a succession of 2 sampled values is confirmed by checking for at least one loop that: - ∆U > threshold U, where threshold U = 0.1 Un/√3 - ∆I > threshold I, where threshold I = 0.2 In. 2-10 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Defining the Directional The "delta" detection of fault direction is performed for all type of faults from the sign of the threephase power obtained from the superimposed values of current and voltage caracterising the fault. Forward fault I fault V Reverse fault fault I V Figure 2.3c: Defining the Directional using Superimposed Values To do this, the following sum is calculated ni S = ∑ (∆UA . ∆IA + ∆UB. ∆IB + ∆UC . ∆IC ) n0 where n0 is the instant at which the fault is detected, ni is the instant of the calculation and S is the transition power. If the fault is in the forward zone, then S < 0. If the fault is in the reverse zone, then S > 0. The directional criterion is valid if: S ≥ 5 . (0.1 Vn . 0.2 In . cos 85°) This sum is calculated on five successive samples. Phase Selection Phase selection is made on the basis of a comparison between the transition values for the derivatives of currents IA, IB and IC (a band-pass FIR derivator applied to all currents (phase to earth, phase to phase,residual)): ∆I’A ∆I’B ∆I’C ∆I’AB ∆I’BC ∆I’CA 2-11 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C The derivatives of the currents are used to eliminate the effects of the DC current component. Hence: SA = ∑ (∆I’A)2 SB = ∑ (∆I’B)2 SC = ∑ (∆I’C)2 SAB = ∑ (∆I’AB)2 SBC = ∑ (∆I’BC)2 SCA = ∑ (∆I’CA)2 The phase selection is valid if the sum (SAB + SBC + SCA ) is higher than a threshold. This sum is not valid if the positive sequence impendance on the source side is far higher than the zerosequence impedance. In this case, the conventional algorithms are used to select the phase. If the sum is valid, sums on one-phase and two-phase loops are classified. The classification of these sums determines the faulty phase(s). Example: Let us assume, for instance, that: SAB < SBC < SCA, SA < SB < SC. If SAB < < SBC, the fault has had little effect on the loop AB. If the fault is not detected as singlephase by the previous criterion, the fault conditions are multi-phase, in this case BC. If SAB ≈ SBC ≈ SCA and SA ≈ SB ≈ SC, the fault is three-phase (the fault occurs on the three phases). 2.3.1.2. "Conventional" Algorithms The "Conventionnal" algorithms are continuously activated in addition to the "High-speed" algorithms. The selection of either of one of the algorithms' results depends on the network's state when the fault occurs. If the network is said to be "Healthy" when the fault occurs, the relay will use the "High-speed" algorithms' results. If the network is faulty, the relay will use the "Conventionnal" algorithms' results. These algorithms do not use superimposed values, but the actual measured values of current and voltage under steady-state or fault conditions. The results obtained by the "Conventional" algorithms are used in the tripping logic when the delta algorithms are not in application. All 6 loops are running in parallel and fault determination algorithm runs parallely all the time. Start-Up Start-up is initialised when at least one of the 6 measuring loops converges within the characteristic. 2-12 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Phase Selection If the fault currents are high enough with respect to the maximum load currents, the current phase selection is used; if not, the impedance phase selection is required. Current Phase Selection Amplitudes I’A, I’B, I’C derived from the three phase currents IA, IB, IC are measured. These values are then compared to each other and to the two thresholds S1 and S2: where first threshold is S1 = 3 I’n second threshold is S2 = 5 I’n Example: If I’A < I’B < I’C: - If I’C > S2 and I’A > S1, the fault is three-phased, - If I’C > S2, I’B > S1, the fault is two-phased, on phases BC (if I’a < S1), - If I’C > S2 and I’B < S1, the fault is single-phased, on phase C, - If I’C < S2, the current phase selection cannot be used. Impedance phase selection should therefore be used. Impedance Phase Selection Impedance phase selection is obtained by checking the convergence of the various measuring loops within the start-up characteristic. - T = Presence of zero-sequence voltage or current, - ZA = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop A, - ZB = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop B, - ZC = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop C, - ZAB = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop AB, - ZBC = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop BC, - ZCA = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop CA, In addition, the following are also defined: - RA = ZA. ZBC with ZBC = convergence within the characteristic of the loop BC, - RB = ZB. ZCA with ZCA = convergence within the characteristic of the loop CA, - RC = ZC .ZAB with ZAB = convergence within the characteristic of the loop AB, - RAB = ZAB . ZC with ZC = convergence within the characteristic of the loop C, - RBC = ZBC . ZA with ZA = convergence within the characteristic of the loop A, - RCA = ZCA . ZB with ZB = convergence within the characteristic of the loop B. 2-13 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C The different phase selections are: - SA = T . RA . RB . RC single phase A to ground fault, - SB = T . RB . RA . RC single phase B to ground fault, - SC = T . RC . RB . RC single phase C to ground fault, - SAB = T . RAB . ZA . ZB double phase AB to ground fault, - SBC = T . RBC . ZB . ZC double phase BC to ground fault, - SCA = T . RCA . ZA . ZC double phase CA to ground fault, - SAB = T . RAB . RBC . RCA double phase AB fault, SBC = T . RBC . RAB . RCA double phase BC fault, - SCA = T . RCA . RAB . RBC double phase CA fault, - SABC = ZA . ZB . ZC . ZAB . ZBC . ZCA three phase fault. For a three phase fault, the fault resistance of one of the two-phase loops is less than half of the fault resistances of the other two-phase loops, it will be used for the directional and distance measuring function. If not, the loop AB will be used. Impedance phase selection is used only if current phase selection is unable to make a decision. Defining the Directional decision The fault direction is defined on the basis of the calculation of the phase shift between the stored voltage and the derivative of a current. The current and the voltage used are those of the measuring loop(s) defined by the phase selection. For the two-phase loops: the calculation of the phase shift between the stored voltage and the derivative of the current on the faulty two-phase. For the single-phase loops: calculation of the phase shift between the stored voltage and the current (I’x + K0I’r), where: - I’x = derivative of current on the faulted single-phase where x =A, B or C - I’r = residual current - K0 = earth coefficient where K0 = (Z0-Z1)/3Z1 The directional angle is fixed -30°, +150°. 2-14 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Reactance/Resistance measurement and distance calculation To measure the distance and apparent resistance of a fault, the following type of equation should be solved on the loop with a fault: Figure 2.3d: Distance and Resistance Measurement The following describes how to solve the above equation (determination of D and R). The line model used will be the 3 x 3 matrix of the line impedances (resistive and inductive) of the three phases, and mutual values between phases. Raa + Daa Rab + Dab Rac + Dac Rac + Dac Rbb + Dbb Rcc + Dbc Rac + Dac Rbc + Dbc Rcc + Dcc with: Raa = Rbb = Rcc Rab = Rbc = Rac. The line model is obtained from the positive and zero-sequence impedances. The use of two different zero-sequence impedances is permitted on the relay: - Z01: zero-sequence impedance used to calculate faults in zone 1, - Z02: zero-sequence impedance used to calculate faults in zones 2, 3, 4 and 5 (reverse zone). The model for the current circulating in the fault resistance is: - for two-phase loops: (IA - IB), (IB - IC) or (IC - IA), - for single-phase loops: Ir then IA, IB or IC. The Ir current is used for the first 40 milliseconds to model the fault current, thus eliminating the load current if the circuit breakers are not operated during the 40 ms. After the 40 ms, the load current is used. 2-15 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C The solutions "D" and "R" are obtained by solving the system of equations (one equation per step of the calculation) using the Gauss Seidel method. RN = ∑ (Un ⋅ Wn ) − Dn−1 ⋅ ∑ ( Vn ⋅ Wn ) ∑ (Wn )2 DN = ∑ (Un ⋅ Wn ) − Rn−1 ⋅ ∑ ( Vn ⋅ Wn ) ∑ ( Vn )2 Convergence Analysis This analysis is based on the calculation of distance and resistance. These results are taken on each of the single-phase and two-phase loops. They determine the convergence of these loops within a parallelogram-shaped start-up characteristic. L = line length in km or miles Distance D D4 = Z4/Zd x L D5 = Z5/Zd x L For multi phase fault : θd = argument of Zd (positive sequence impedance) For single phase fault : θd = argument of (2Zd + Z02)/3 for zones 2, 3, 4, 5 θd = argument of (2Zd + Z01)/3 for zone 1 D lim = D4 θd R - R lim lim Resistance R D5 Figure 2.3e: Start-up Characteristic Let Rlim and Dlim be the limits of the starting characteristic. The pair of solutions (DN, RN) is convergent in the characteristic if the following conditions are confirmed for two consecutive results (DN-1, RN-1) and (DN, RN): - RN-1 < Rlim and RN < Rlim and RN-1 - RN < 10% Rlim - DN-1 < Dlim and DN < Xlim and DN-1 - DN < 10% Xlim with Rlim being the resistance limit for the single and multi phase faults. The zone limits are l D lim l, +Rlim, -Rlim and are related to the directional decision. The slope of the characteristic is fixed for each loop by the characteristic of the line. To model the fault current in the following loops: - two-phase loops: the values (IA - IB), (IB - IC) or (IC - IA) are used, - single-phase loops: the results of these algorithms are mainly used as a back-up, thus the circuit breaker located at the other end is assumed to be open. To model the fault current, the values IA, IB and IC are used. 2-16 EPAC 3100/3500 2.3.2. MS/M 1.6882-C Zone Definition The definition of the zone consists in determining the distance-resistance interval where a fault, processed by the "High-Speed" or "Conventional" algorithms, is located. 2.3.2.1. Directional distance protection mode For short distance lines, it is necessary to have a resistance reach for each zone in order to reduce measurement errors of CVTs and VTs (R/X ratio ≤ 6). Three forward zones, one reverse zone and one settable zone (forward or reverse) have therefore been defined. These zones are limited as follows: - in impedance, by Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 and Z5, - in resistance, by R1M, R1B, R2, R3 and Rlim. Zone 1 covers 2 different resistive zones, one for phase-to-earth faults and the other for phaseto-phase faults. Zone 5 is a reverse zone. The time delay associated with this zone enables reverse current faults to be eliminated faster. Zone 3 can be set as a forward or reverse zone. If set to reverse it is associated with zone 5, thus providing two different zones and two different time delays for the management of reverse current faults. 2-17 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C X (loop) Example of phase-to-earth characteristic with zone 3 set forward X4 . (1+K02) Z4 Zone 4 (T4) X3 . (1+K02) Z3 Zone 3 (T3) X2 . (1+K02) Z2 Zone 2 Z1 (T2) X1X . (1+K01) Zone 1X (T1) X1 . (1+K01) Zone 1 (T1) R1M R2 R3 Zone 5 (T5) Z5 Example of phase-to-phase characteristic with zone 3 set reverse X4 . 2 Rlim R (loop) X5 . (1+K02) X (loop) Z4 Zone 4 (T4) X2 . 2 X1X . 2 X1 . 2 Z2 Zone 2 (T2) Z1 Zone 1X (T1) Zone 1 (T1) –R3 R1B Zone 3 (T3) Z3 Zone 5 (T5) Z5 R2 X3 . 2 X5 . 2 Figure 2.3f: Zone characteristics for a line Rlim R (loop) 2-18 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.3.2.2. Busbar isolation mode Busbar isolation mode is used to isolate busbars if there is a fault on them. This mode is nondirectional as the link must be broken quickly since the fault may arrive from a busbar situated in the forward or reverse direction of the protection device. To ensure selectivity and to trip on busbar faults only: - Zone 1 must be smaller than zone 1 of the shortest line leaving the substation, - the T1 time delay must be longer than the T1 time delays for the lines leaving the substation plus the time to open a circuit breaker. If the EPAC is used as a stand-by protection device: - Zone 2 covers the most distant adjacent substation, - Zones 3 and 4 usually have the same settings as zone 2. X/loop X4.(1+K02) X3.(1+K02) Z4 Zone 4 (T4) Z3 X2.(1+K02) Z2 X1.(1+K01) Z1 Zone 3 (T3) Zone 2 (T2) Zone 1 (T1) R1M R2 R3 Rlim R/loop -Z1 -Z2 -Z3 -Z4 Figure 2.3g: Zone characteristics for a busbar (phase-to-earth impedance loop) 2-19 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.3.2.3. Convergence in a zone For both modes, the resistance R1 for zone 1 can be set separately for phase-to-earth and phaseto-phase faults. The measurement of impedance for single phase faults is based on a Z01 parameter for a fault in zone 1 and on a Z02 parameter for a fault in another zone. Both parameters can be set by the user. Fault zone Fault type Fault impedance without fault resistance 1 Phase-to-earth (2Zd + Z01)/3 Phase-to-phase Zd (positive sequence impedance) Phase-to-earth (2Zd + Z02)/3 Phase-to-phase Zd (positive sequence impedance) 2, 3, 4, 5 The zones are defined for a convergence between the x and r limits related to each zone. So, the solution pair (xn,rn) is said to be convergent if: - rn-1 < Rlim and rn < Rlim and rn-1 - rn < 10% Rlim - xn-1 < Xlim and xn < Xlim and xn-1 - xn < k% Xlim where k = 5% if Xlim = X1 k=10% if Xlim = X2, X3, X4 or X5 The detection of a fault by the "High-Speed" algorithms resets the iterative calculation of the fault distance-resistance. The calculation using "Conventional" algorithms is based on the study of the convergence of measuring loops and, thus, does not need to be reset. Example Showing the Use of Z01 and Z02 Z3 Z2 Z1 EA (L1) 7 km (L2) 3 km EB ZSB ZSA Line Zdl Z0l Cable Zdc Z0c length to be entered: 10 km total positive sequence impedance to be protected Zd = Zdl + Zdc for Z1 = 0.8 Zd and for Z2 = 1.2 Zd Z01 = (Z0l/L1).(L1+L2) Z02 = Z0l+Z0c If you only have the impedance values measured before the transformers (in HV Ohms), the impedances in LV Ohms are calculated as follows: ZBT = (Current transformer ratio/voltage transformer ratio).Zmeasured. ∆ VB > 0,1 V n ∆ VA > 0,1 V n or ∆ VBC > 0,1 V n ∆IBC > 0,2 I n or ∆ VAB > 0,1 V n BC AB ∆IAB > 0,2 I n ∆ VCA > 0,1 V n or ∆ICA > 0,2 I n CA T . RC . RA . RB SAB < SBC < SCA SAB << SBC SA < SB < SC W = Ir W = Ir W = Ir W = Ir V = M 1 IB V = M 1 IA V = M 2 IB U = VB U = VA U = VB W = IB W = IA U = VA V = M 2 IB V = M 2 IA U = VB V = M 2 IA I'B + kOI'r I'A + kOI'r U = VA VB W = Ir V = M 2 IC U = VB W = Ir V = M 1 IC U = VB W = IC V = M 2 IC U = VC I'C + kOI'r VC W = IA - IB V = M .(IA - IB) U = VA - VB W = IA - IB V = M .(IA - IB) U = VA - VB W = IA - IB V = M .(IA - IB) U = VA - VB I'A - I'B VA - VB T . RAB . ZA . ZB or T . RAB . RBC . RCA SBC < SAC < SAB SBC SAC SC < SB < SA W = IB- IC V = M .(IB - IC) U = VB - VC W = IB - IC V = M .(IB - IC) U = VB - VC W = IB - IC V = M .(IB - IC) U = VB - VC I'B - I'C VB - VC T . RBC . ZB . ZC or T . RBC . RAB . RCA SAC < SAB < SBC SAC SAB SA < SB < SC W = IC - IA V = M .(IC - IA) U = VC - VA W = IC - IA V = M .(IC - IA) U = VC - VA W = IC - IA V = M .(IC - IA) U = VC - VA I'C - I'A VC - VA T . RCA . ZA . ZC or T . RCA . RAB . RBC SAB < SBC < SCA SAB SBC SB < SC < SA SBC SCA SB SC W = IA - IB V = M .(IA - IB) U = VA - VB W = IA - IB V = M .(IA - IB) U = VA - VB W = IA - IB V = M .(IA - IB) U = VA - VB I'A - I'B VA - VB ZBC . ZCA ZA . ZB . ZC . ZAB SAB SA ∆ VABC > 0,1 V n or ∆IABC > 0,2 I n ABC EPAC 3100/3500 Measurement algorithm for zones 2, 3, 4 and 5 Measurement algorithm for zone 1 Watching algorithm ∆ VC > 0,1 V n or (∆VA . ∆IA) + (∆VB . ∆IB) + ( ∆VC . ∆IC) T . RB . RC. RA SCA < SBC < SAB SCA << SBC SA < SC < SB VA n0 ni T . RA . RB . RC Conventional algorithm phase selection S= SBC < SCA < SAB SBC << SCA SC < SB < SA High speed algorithm directional determination Conventional algorithm directional determination CN ∆ IC > 0,2 I n FAULT Start-up is initialised when at least one of the 6 measuring loops converges within the caracteristic. or or BN ∆I B > 0,2 I n AN ∆IA > 0,2 I n High speed algorithm phase selection Conventional start-up High speed start-up Algorithms 2-20 MS/M 1.6882-C Quantities used by the different algorithms M: impedance for multi phase faults M1: impedance for single phase to ground fault in zone 1 computed with the zero-sequence impedance Z01 M2: impedance for single phase to ground fault in zones 2, 3, 4 or 5 computed with zero-sequence impedance Z02 2-21 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.3.3. Algorithm chaining STEP 0 Acquisition and filtering of samples Y Line open Switch-on-to-fault STEP 3 Impedance measurements on all 6 loops (ZAN, ZBN, ZCN, ZAB, ZBC, ZCA) N Y Network healthy N N Convergence in characteristic of all 6 loops STEP 2 Y Delta algorithms STEP 1 Y Phase selection Classic algorithms Detection of transition Impedance measurements Fault confirmation Phase selection Direction Direction Tripping logic Decision to trip using delta algorithms during 40 ms Decision to trip using classic algorithms The EPAC is supposed to be in the step 0. The product is protecting a sound network. When a fault occurs on a network, the starting of the relay can be done by a confirmed transition ("high speed algorithm") and a loop convergence inside the start-up characteristic (conventional algorithm) simultaneously. During "high speed" algorithms processing, the EPAC goes to step 1. The timers are activated. The directional element and the phase selection are determined by the "high speed algorithm". The fault distance and resistance are computed by the "measurement algorithm". During "conventional" algorithms processing (which runs parallely to high speed algorithms), the EPAC goes to step 2. Only the conventional algorithms are used for the directional and phase selection determinations. The fault distance and resistance are computed from the measurement algorithm for the faulty phase. If the circuit breaker recloses on to fault, the relay goes to step 3 and trips three-phase, otherwise it goes to step 0 (no fault detection). 2-22 EPAC 3100/3500 2.3.4. MS/M 1.6882-C Tripping Logic Three tripping modes can be selected: - single-phase tripping for single-phase faults in zone 1 and 2 and three-phase tripping in zones 3 and 4, - single-phase tripping in zone 1 only, - three-phase tripping whatever be the type of fault. There are 5 time delays associated with the 6 zones present. Zone 1 and extended zone 1 have the same time delay. The allocation of the steps to the zones may be modified by additional actions: - teleprotection, - zone reach control. The tripping contact can be sealed-in in the closed position for as long as the current is present in the phase in question. To do this, the current in the faulty phase is compared to a adjustable threshold (SEALIN). 2.3.5. Tripping Logic with Teleprotection Teleprotection is used to modify the protection characteristics from a remote end relay. The EPAC is provided with digital inputs/outputs allowing it to operate in teleprotection mode. The transmission conditions and the action performed when a teleprotection message is received may be adjustable in an independent way. The adjustable parameters are the following: - the type of teleprotection taken into account: . on the main line, . on the T-Line, if applicable, - use of two teleprotection signals, - conditions for transmitting the teleprotection signals, - weak source mode, also called Weak Infeed. Acknowledgement of Teleprotection Messages Teleaction modes are a combination of two types of characteristics: - protection reach: overreach or underreach, - type of signals to be exchanged: authorisation or acceleration signals, or blocking signals. Accelerated underreach protection (AUP or PUR) This scheme is generally used for medium length or long distance lines. If relay C detects a fault in zone 1 or zone 2 (according to the chosen configuration), it will trip upon expiry of T1 and send an acceleration command to relay D. 2-23 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C If relay D detects a fault in zone 1: - and receives an acceleration command from relay C, it will trip upon the expiry of T1, - and does not receive any acceleration command from relay C, it will trip upon the expiry of T2, since in that case the fault is beyond the protected line. . T1 = step 1 time delay, . T2 = step 2 time delay. Zone 2 C D Zone 1 Zone extension Zone 1 Zone 2 Acceleration Fault in zone 2 Fault in another zone Fault in zone 1 Valid transmission in zone 1 Fault in zone 1 or zone 2 Valid transmission in zone 2 Acceleration & Step 1 time delay Step 1 time delay & & Step 2 time delay Step 2 time delay & Associated step time delay Tripping Tripping Fault in zone 2 Associated step time delay & Fault in another zone & Acceleration Acceleration & & Figure 2.3h: Tripping in accelerated underreach mode If the relay is being unblocked during a power-swing condition, or if a fault is detected after a single-phase trip, the above scheme is replaced by the scheme shown in figure 2.3z. Fault in zone 1 Valid transmission in zone 1 Fault in zone 1 or zone 2 Valid transmission in zone 2 2-24 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Permissive Overreach Protection (POP) US: Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip protection (POTT) This scheme is generally used for medium length or long distance lines. It normally affects tripping in zone 1 with zone 2 set beyond the protected line. If relay C detects a fault in zone 1, it transmits an authorisation command to relay D. If relay D detects a fault in zone 1: - and receives an authorisation command from relay C, it will trip upon the expiry of T1, - and does not receive any authorisation command from relay C, it will trip upon the expiry of T2, since in that case the fault is beyond the protected line. . T1 = step 1 time delay, . T2 = step 2 time delay. C Zone 1 D Zone 1 Authorisation Fault in zone 1 Authorisation & Step 1 time delay Step 1 time delay & & Step 2 time delay Step 2 time delay & Tripping Fault in another zone Fault in zone 1 Valid transmission in zone 1 Fault in zone 1 or zone 2 Valid transmission in zone 2 Associated step time delay Tripping Associated step time delay & Authorisation Fault in zone 1 Fault in another zone & Fault in zone 1 & Valid transmission in zone 1 Fault in zone 1 or zone 2 Valid transmission in zone 2 Authorisation & Figure 2.3i: Permissive overreach mode If the relay is being unblocked during a power-swing condition, or if a fault is detected after a single-phase trip, the above scheme is replaced by the scheme shown in figure 2.3z. 2-25 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Blocking Overreach Protection (BOP) US: Blocking Directional Comparison Protection (BDCP) This scheme is normally used for short distance lines. It affects tripping in zone 1 with zone 2 set beyond the protected line. If relay C detects a fault in zone 5 (reverse), it sends a blocking command to relay D. If relay D detects a fault in zone 1: - and receives a blocking command from relay C, it will trip upon expiry of T2, since in that case the fault is beyond the protected line, - and does not receive any blocking signal from relay C, it will trip upon the expiry of (T1+Tt). . T1 = step 1 time delay, . T2 = step 2 time delay. . Tt = Transmission time delay A transmission time delay (Tt) is used to take into account the transmission time of the locking command between both protection devices. During this time delay, tripping is locked. Zone 5 C D Zone 1 Zone 5 Zone 1 Locking Fault in zone 1 & & Fault in zone 5 Step 1 and transmission time delay Step 1 and transmission time delay & Step 2 time delay Step 2 time delay & Zone associated step time delay Fault in another zone & Valid transmission in zone 5 Locking Locking Tripping Tripping Zone associated step time delay Locking Fault in zone 1 Fault in another zone & Figure 2.3j: Blocking overreach mode If the relay is being unblocked during a power-swing condition, or if a fault is detected after a single-phase trip, the above scheme is replaced by the scheme shown in figure 2.3y. Fault in Valid zone 5 transmission in zone 5 2-26 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Blocking Underreach Protection (BUP) This scheme is normally used for short distance lines on which it is possible to set a zone 1. It affects tripping in zone 2. If relay C detects a fault in zone 5, it sends a blocking command to relay D. If relay D detects a fault in zone 2: - and receives a blocking command from relay C, it will trip upon expiry of T2, since in that case the fault is beyond the protected line, - and does not receive a blocking signal from relay C, it will trip upon the expiry of (T1+Tt). . T1 = step 1 time delay, . T2 = step 2 time delay. . Tt = Transmission time delay A transmission time delay (Tt) is used to take into account the transmission time of the locking command between both protection devices. During this time delay, tripping is locked. Zone 2 C Zone 5 D Zone 1 Zone 1 Zone 5 Zone 2 Locking Fault in zone 2 Locking & Step 1 and transmission time delay Step 1 and transmission time delay & & Step 2 time delay Step 2 time delay & Tripping Zone associated step time delay Fault in another zone Fault in zone 5 & Valid transmission in zone 5 Locking Défaut en zone 2 Tripping Zone associated step time delay Locking Fault in another zone & Figure 2.3k: Blocking underreach mode If the relay is being unblocked during a power-swing condition, or if a fault is detected after a single-phase trip, the above scheme is replaced by the scheme shown in figure 2.3y. Fault in Valid zone 5 transmission in zone 5 2-27 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Permissive Underreach Protection (PUP) US: Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip protection (PUTT) This scheme is used when the selectivity conditions are unreliable. If relay C detects a fault in zone 1 (or zone 2 according the chosen setting), it sends an authorisation command to relay D. If relay D detects a forward fault: - and receives an authorisation command from relay C, it will trip upon expiry of T1, - and does not receive any authorisation command from relay C, it will trip upon the expiry of the time delay associated with the fault zone (T1 for zone 1, T2 for zone 2, T3 for zone 3, etc.). Zone 2 C D Zone 1 Zone 1 Zone 2 Authorisation Fault detected & Forward Authorisation Step 1 time delay Step 1 time delay Tripping Associated step time delay Fault in a zone Fault in zone 1 Valid transmission in zone 1 Fault in zone 1 or zone 2 Valid transmission in zone 2 & Fault detected Forward Tripping Associated step time delay & Fault in a zone & Authorisation Authorisation & & Figure 2.3l: Permissive underreach protection If the relay is being unblocked during a power-swing condition, or if a fault is detected after a single-phase trip, the above scheme is replaced by the scheme shown in figure 2.3z. Fault in zone 1 Valid transmission in zone 1 Fault in zone 1 or zone 2 Valid transmission in zone 2 2-28 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Failure or disturbance on the communication channel - Unblocking If there is a possibility that disturbances could occur on the communication channel due to a fault located on the line, two complementary signals can be used. The principle is that communication can be disturbed for a fault located on the line to protect but will not for an external fault. The EPAC provides two choices: - the unblocking mode, - the carrier loss mode. These transmission modes of the teleaction signals are not compatible with the Blocking underreach mode or blocking overreach mode. Unblocking Mode (FSK: Frequency Shifted Keying) The unblocking mode uses two teleaction channels: - one is used to transmit the permissive signal, - the other is used to transmit the guard signal. If the line to be protected does not contain a fault, a guard signal is transmitted. When the protection device detects a fault on the line to be protected, it stops transmitting the guard signal and sends a permissive signal. The protection device which receives this combination interprets it as a teleprotection signal (acceleration or permissive). If the EPAC does not receive a signal, it interprets this as the reception of a teleprotection signal (acceleration or permissive) for 10 to 160 milliseconds. This considers the possibility that a fault on the line may interrupt the communication. Likewise, if both teleprotection signals are set to 1, the EPAC interprets this as a transmission fault and ignores the teleprotection signal (permissive or acceleration). C D Fault detected at D Locking Signal sent from C & Unlocking & 10 ms 160 ms Figure 2.3m: Tripping Conditions in Unlocking Mode & Tripping 2-29 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Loss of Carrier Mode The principle of the loss of carrier mode is nearly the same as that of the FSK mode, but it requires only one teleprotection channel transmission. When the protection device detects a fault on the line to be protected, it transmits an acceleration or permissive signal that is intended to be understood by the protection located at the other end. If a communication loss occurs, the protection interprets the loss of carrier signal as a teleprotection signal (acceleration or permissive) for 10 to 160 milliseconds. Teleaction signals (permissive or acceleration) are always taken into account, even if the carrier is permanently absent. C D Fault detected at D Blocking or unblocking Signal sent from C & Carrier Tripping & 10 ms 160 ms Figure 2.3n: Tripping Conditions in Loss of Carrier Mode Conditions for Transmitting Teleprotection Signals The conditions for transmitting teleprotection signals may be set. The operator may select one of the following modes: - transmission in zone 1, - transmission in zones 1 and 2, - transmission in zone 5 (reverse). For the transmissions associated with forward zones 1 and 2, an input contact ("HF present/ unblock" = power line carrier) for the complementary signal is associated to allow operation in the unblocking mode. An additional forward directional transmission contact is provided by the EPAC. This message, which does not depend on a zone definition, may be transmitted faster than the conventional teleaction message. Operation on a Tee Line If there is a derivation on the line, the type of teleaction used on the tee line should be different to the teleaction used on the main line. Because the protection devices operating in teleprotection mode with the EPAC may have different characteristics on both lines, they may therefore need different teleaction outlines. The types of teleaction to be used on the main line and on the branch line can therefore be configured independently from one another. 2-30 EPAC 3100/3500 2.3.6. MS/M 1.6882-C Tripping logic in zone reach control mode The zone reach control function is used to modify step 1 tripping logic during a reclosure sequence. In fault detection mode, overreached zone 1 is associated with step 1. When zone reduction is activated, the zone associated with step 1 is reduced to zone 1. This enables faults to be eliminated rapidly without the need to use the teleaction channels. The technique, however, makes a greater use of the circuit breakers. A zone reduction command may come from: - the recloser incorporated in the EPAC, - an external recloser. In this case, the command corresponds to the zone reduction digital input. 2.3.6.1. Operating principle Zone 1 ext Zone 1 Relay A Relay B Relay C Figure 2.3o: The Extended Zone 1 principle When a fault appears forward of the relay C, the relay A and C protection devices trip their respective circuit breakers. Overreached zone 1 (Ext. zone 1) is reduced to zone 1 during the reclosure sequence. If the fault persists when the A and C circuit breakers are closed, the relay A sees the fault in its zone 2 and delays tripping by T2. The figure 2.3p describes the tripping logic concerning the zone reduction for faults in zones 1 and 2. The zone reach control function can be activated and deactivated by the user. 2-31 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Zone reduction & Autorecloser enabled Circuit breaker closing in progress 1 & & Overreach zone 1 fault Zone 1 time delay Tripping Zone 1 fault & Zone 1 time delay Start-up by "conventional" algorithms * Manual reclosing Memory voltage not valid I > I threshold Internal detection of circuit breaker closure 1 & 1 & logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic Figure 2.3p: Tripping logic with zone reduction Operations in zone reach control mode require a distance measurement on tripping, hence the calculation of the directional, phase selection and distance measurement. Directional As with conventional directionals, the directional is calculated from the stored pre-fault voltage values. The calculation varies depending on the type of fault, i.e., single-phase or multi-phase. Single-phase fault The reference or memory pre-fault voltage is stored in memory when the fault appears. When the fault is eliminated, a high-speed single-phase sequence is activated: - if a fault appears less than 60 milliseconds after the sequence starts, the stored voltage value remains valid and is used to calculate the directional, - if no fault appears during the 60 milliseconds after the sequence starts, the voltage of one of the healthy phases is stored as pre-fault voltage, - if a fault appears during the continuation of the sequence in progress or reclosure occurs, the stored voltage value is initialised and remains valid for 10 seconds. If the stored voltage value is invalid when one or more loops are convergent within the start-up characteristic, the directional is forced forward and the trip is instantaneous. If the current threshold is exceeded on reclosure, the protection device instantaneously trips three-phase. 2-32 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Two-phase or three-phase fault The reference or memory voltage is stored when the fault appears. When the fault is eliminated, the stored voltage value remains valid for 10 seconds. If reclosure occurs during these 10 seconds, the directional is calculated using the stored voltage value. If the stored voltage value is invalid when one or more loops are convergent within the start-up characteristic, the forward directional is forced and the trip is instantaneous when protection starts. If the current threshold is exceeded on reclosure, the protection device trips instantaneously three-phase. If the digital input "CB closed" is valid, the protection device trips immediately as soon as one or more loops converge within the start-up characteristic. Phase selection Phase selection is calculated using impedance phase selection. Distance measurement The distance measurement is carried out on the faulty phase by taking the zone 1 measurement values (Z1, Z01) as the measurement element for the zone 1 and overreached zone 1 faults. The computations for the other calculation zones are made using the fault detection values Z1 and Z02. 2.3.7. Overcurrent Start-Up This function is used to deal with faults detected outside the start-up characteristic. It activates a three-phase trip if the current threshold is exceeded for a settable length of time. It constitutes a backup protection against forward and/or reverse current faults. The function is associated with two settable current thresholds, a high threshold (I>) and a very high threshold (I>>). A direction can be associated with each of these thresholds so that only the threshold overreaches detected on one side or the other of the protection relay are taken into account. Each current threshold has a settable time delay associated with it. Overcurrent startup is determined by the direction, if any, assigned to each threshold. The function is only activated if there is no start-up by "conventional" algorithms or as a result of confirmed fuse failure. The overcurrent start-up function allows 1 or 2 current thresholds to be selected. It can be disabled. If the directions assigned to the I> and I>> thresholds are the same: - the I> (high) threshold must be lower than the I>> (very high) threshold, - the T> time delay associated with the I> (high) threshold must be longer than the T>> time delay associated with the I>> (very high) threshold. 2-33 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C If the directions assigned to the I> and I>> thresholds are different, these thresholds and the respective T> and T>> time delays can be selected independently. Time delays T> and T>> can be set independently of time delays T1, T2, T3, T4 and T5. A warning message reminds the user of the consistencies to be respected. 2.3.7.1. Operation According to Threshold Directionals The following paragraphs describe the role of the protection function according to the directions set for each current threshold. I>> Threshold Set to Forward - I> Threshold Set to Reverse t I>>, T>> I>, T> Z4, T4 Z5, T5 Z3, T3 Z2, T2 Z1, T1 Reverse Forward Distance Figure 2.3q: I>> Set to Forward - I> Set to Reverse In this case the I>> threshold operates as a forward backup protection. The trip is three-phase if the forward fault is still present on expiry of the T>> time delay associated with I>>. The I> threshold operates as a reverse current backup protection. The trip is three-phase if the forward fault is still present on expiry of the T> time delay associated with I>. I>> and I> Thresholds Set to Forward t I>, T> I>>, T>> Z5, T5 Z4, T4 Z3, T3 Z2, T2 Reverse Z1, T1 Forward Distance Figure 2.3r: I>> and I> Thresholds Set to Forward In this case both the I>> and I> thresholds operate as forward backup protections. The trip is three-phase if: - the duration of an I>> (very high) threshold overreach detected in a forward zone exceeds T>>, - the duration of an I> (high) threshold overreach detected in a forward zone exceeds T>. 2-34 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C I>> Threshold Set to Forward - I> Threshold with No Directional t I>, T> I>, T> I>>, T>> Z5, T5 Z4, T4 Z3, T3 Z2, T2 Z1, T1 Reverse Forward Distance Figure 2.3s: I>> Threshold Set to Forward - I> Threshold with No Directional In this case the I>> threshold operates as a forward backup protection. The I> threshold operates as a backup protection against both forward and reverse current faults. The trip is three-phase if: - the duration of an I>> threshold overreach detected in a forward zone exceeds T>>, - the duration of an I> threshold overreach detected in a forward or reverse zone exceeds T>. I>> and I> Thresholds with No Directional t I>, T> I>, T> I>>, T>> I>>, T>> Z4, T4 Z5, T5 Z3, T3 Z2, T2 Reverse Z1, T1 Forward Distance Figure 2.3t: I>> and I> Thresholds with No Directional In this case both the I>> and the I> thresholds operate as backup protections against both forward and reverse current faults. The trip is three-phase if: - the duration of an I>> threshold overreach exceeds T>>, - the duration of an I> threshold overreach exceeds T>. 2-35 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.3.7.2. Start-Up The current of each phase is compared with the selected current thresholds. If a threshold is exceeded: - if there is no directional associated with the threshold crossed, the fault direction is not calculated and the protection is started up, - if there is a directional associated with the threshold crossed, the fault direction is calculated and the protection is started up only if the direction corresponds to the one configured for the threshold. Protection start-up on current threshold overreach is only possible if none of the loops is within the characteristic for start-up by "conventional" algorithms. Protection start-up on current threshold overreach is disabled in the case of confirmed fuse failure. 2.3.7.3. Phase Selection If the protection is activated by the overcurrent start-up function, the appropriate phase fault signal is validated. 2.3.7.4. Operation with an Auto-Recloser If the EPAC is equipped with an auto-recloser function, the latter can be used for reclosing after three-phase tripping by the overcurrent start-up function. In this case the three-phase reclosing mode set for the main protection relay is used. The auto-recloser can be blocked by the T> or T>> time delays associated with overcurrent startup. If reclosing is requested after T> or T>>, a check the operator should check that reclosing is not blocked by the T2, T3, T4 or T5 time delays. 2-36 EPAC 3100/3500 2.3.8. MS/M 1.6882-C Functions Associated with Distance Protection 2.3.8.1. Associated Inputs/Outputs Input name Meaning Line fuse failure Line VT fuse has blown (1=MCB tripped; 0=no fuse faillure) Busbar fuse failure Busbar VT fuse has blown Manual reclosing Manual closing on "circuit breaker closing" external signal Carrier receive Reception of a teleaction signal Carrier receive for tee line Reception of a teleaction signal for a tee line Blocking protection Protection blocking on external command Three phase trip Three-phase tripping on external command HF present / Unblock Protection unblocking if "HF presence" is valid HF present Tee / Unblock Protection unblocking if "HF presence" is valid - for tee line Zone reduction Zone reach control with the auto recloser function and distance protection CB closed Indicates the position of the circuit breaker (1=closed; 0= opened) Output name Meaning Phase A tripping Phase A tripping by the distance protection unit Phase B tripping Phase B tripping by the distance protection unit Phase C tripping Phase C tripping by the distance protection unit Single pole trip Single phase tripping by the distance protection unit Three-phase trip Three-phase tripping by the distance protection unit Phase A selection Fault indication on phase A Phase B selection Fault indication on phase B Phase C selection Fault indication on phase C Forward directional Forward fault indication Reverse directional Reverse fault indication Zone 1 fault Fault detected in zone 1 Zone 2 fault Fault detected in zone 2 Zone 3 fault Fault detected in zone 3 Zone 4 fault Fault detected in zone 4 Zone 5 fault Fault detected in zone 5 (reverse zone) Starting Starting of the distance protection 2-37 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Output name Meaning Multi phase fault Multi-phase fault indication Single phase fault Single-phase fault indication Carrier send Transmission of a teleaction command Carrier send for tee line Transmission of a teleaction command for a tee line Protection blocking All protection fonctions are blocked Self test in progress Indicates a restart of the relay Urgent alarm Equipment fault which may affect a tripping decision Non urgent alarm Equipment fault which may not affect a tripping decision Fuse failure Confirmed fuse failure of a voltage transformer Fuse failure trip Tripping after "Fuse failure" Auto recloser blocking Auto recloser blocking by the distance protection Unblocking signal transmission Transmission of an unblocking command Unblocking signal transmission for tee line Transmission of an unblocking command for a tee line Power swing detection Power swing detected of the relay Weak-infeed trip Tripping on weak infeed detection 2.3.8.2. Weak Source Mode or "Weak Infeed" The source that supplies one of the ends of the line may be too weak for the protection device to be able to detect a fault. This has two disadvantages: - tripping is prevented, - the protection device at the other end does not receive the message that the fault is on the protected line. The EPAC’s "weak infeed" mode eliminates these disadvantages. It consists of two functions: - the ECHO function, which transmits an acceleration signal to the protection device on the strong source side, - the trip function, which single-phase or three-phase trips according to phase selection. Phase selection determines the trip type (single- or threephase) according to the number of phases with insufficient voltage. 2-38 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C receive * Carrier for Tee line Tee line enabled 1 L 60 ms 200 ms & message * Teleaction received on main L 60 ms 200 ms channel Voltage drop on at least 1 phase Use voltage drop decision? Yes = 1, No = 0 1 Starting * Fuse failure * Blocking protection Internal detection of fuse failure Weak Infeed blocked on power swing Power swing detection & & Reverse fault Validation & & > Time 1 logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic Figure 2.3u: Tripping logic in Weak Infeed mode It is possible to confirm the above conditions with an undervoltage criterion, the comparison threshold of which may be set. When the "weak infeed" mode is selected, the function is activated if: - the protection has not been started up, - there is no reverse directional information, - a teleaction message is received. If the above conditions are confirmed, when a teleaction message is received, the protection device returns a message allowing the protection device on the other end to cover the whole line (Echo Mode). The tripping by the EPAC may be authorised when the "weak infeed" mode is active. In this case, phase selection may be set on the basis of insufficient voltage so that a single-phase tripping may occur. This criterion then uses the "confirmation threshold" on the basis of insufficient voltage. The tripping in this mode may be confirmed by a minimum current threshold of 0.05 In. If all the currents are less than this threshold, no tripping is activated. This criterion prevents tripping during a cycle when a circuit breaker opens and allows three-phase tripping during a cycle. The user must set a blocking time in weak infeed mode. This time is initiated just after the starting element of the relay has dropped off. This timer avoids tripping again after a sequential tripping. 2-39 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.3.8.3. Power swing detection Power swings are caused by a lack of stability in the network with sudden load fluctuations. They result in desynchronisation of the two sources on either side of the protected line. The power swing detector is used to prevent accidental tripping when the measured impedance point moves into the start-up characteristic. The following diagram illustrates the characteristics of power swing. X Trajectory of impedance point for a desynchronisation Line angle ∆X Power swing band Forward start-up Trajectory of impedance point for a power swing ∆R Reverse start-up R ∆R=∆X Figure 2.3v: Power swing Power swing detection The power swing detection element is used to detect any power swing or loss of synchronisation near the loop convergence characteristic. This prevents the distance protection unit from tripping the associated circuit breaker accidentally. Power swing detection is based on the status of the line to be protected: Closed line Power swings are characterised by the simultaneous appearance of 3 single phase impedance points in the start-up zone. Their speed of entry is slower than that in the case of three-phase faults. A power swing is detected if: - at least 1 single-phase impedance is within the start-up zone after having crossed the power swing band in more than 5 ms, - the 3 impedance points have been in the power swing band for more than 5 ms. 2-40 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Line in one pole open condition In this case, the power swing only occurs on 2 phases. A power swing is detected if: - at least 1 single-phase impedance is within the start-up zone after having crossed the power swing band in more than 5 ms, - the 2 impedance points have been in the power swing band for more than 5 ms. During an open pole condition, the protection device monitors the power swing on two single-phase loops. No external information needs to be wired if the voltage transformers are on the line side. If the voltage transformers are on the busbar side, the "poles discrepancy" signal should be used. The "poles discrepancy" input represents a "one circuit breaker pole open" condition. Conditions for isolating lines If there is a power swing, it may be necessary to trip out and disconnect the two desynchronised sources. There are various blocking and unblocking options available that are used to avoid the tripping of all the protection devices between the two sources. The functions blocked due to the power swing can be configured. It may be: - the zones, - the teleprotection transmission, - the teleprotection reception, - the weak-infeed mode. The selective blocking of the zones allows the EPAC to separate the network near the electrical zero by tripping in zone 1 only. Therefore, in the example given in figure 2.3w, the D protection trips out. Electrical zero A B C D E F Figure 2.3w: Protection Selective Blocking Selective blocking is possible with three-phase or singlephase tripping. Unblocking one zone (if no fault is present) always results in three-phase tripping. Unblocking one zone is not possible if the tripping type is set to one-phase. 2-41 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C X X ∆X Power swing boundary ∆X Power swing boundary Z4 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z2 Z1 Z1 ∆R ∆R Z3 R Z5 Zone 3 reverse Limit of start-up characteristic R Z5 Limit of start-up characteristic Zone 3 forward ∆R = ∆X = Settable power swing boundary Ω/loop Figure 2.3x: Power swing characteristics When the line isolation function is used, only the apparent distance of the power swing should be taken into account and not its resistance. The resistance values of zones 1, 2 and 3 are therefore increased to that of the start-up characteristic. Tripping logic If an impedance point crosses the limit between the power swing band and the start-up characteristic, a adjustable time delay is initialised. If the impedance point moves out of the start-up characteristic again before the time delay expires, no trip is activated and the adjustable time delay is reinitialised. If the impedance point still remains within the start-up characteristic, a three-phase trip command is sent. Unblocking the Zones Blocked due to Power swing In order to protect the network against a fault that may occur during power swing, blocking signals can be inhibited when the determined current thresholds are exceeded. The adjustable unblocking criteria are: - a residual current threshold: Ir > 0.1 In + kr.Imax (allows earth fault detection during powerswing), 100 a negative-sequence current threshold: I2 > 0.1 In + ki.Imax (allows isolated fault detection during power-swing), 100 a phase current threshold: I1> (allows 3-phase fault detection during power-swing). where: - kr, ki: adjustable coefficients in %, - Imax: maximum current detected on one phase, - In: nominal current. When unblocking occurs during power swing, the independent zone 1 function may either be blocked or left unblocked. If zone 1 is selected independent, the teleprotection messages are taken into account in a specific way, as shown in Figures 2.3y and 2.3z. 2-41 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C X X ∆X Power swing boundary ∆X Power swing boundary Z4 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z2 Z1 Z1 ∆R ∆R Z3 R Z5 Zone 3 reverse Limit of start-up characteristic R Z5 Limit of start-up characteristic Zone 3 forward ∆R = ∆X = Settable power swing boundary Ω/loop Figure 2.3x: Power swing characteristics When the line isolation function is used, only the apparent distance of the power swing should be taken into account and not its resistance. The resistance values of zones 1, 2 and 3 are therefore increased to that of the start-up characteristic. Tripping logic If an impedance point crosses the limit between the power swing band and the start-up characteristic, a adjustable time delay is initialised. If the impedance point moves out of the start-up characteristic again before the time delay expires, no trip is activated and the adjustable time delay is reinitialised. If the impedance point still remains within the start-up characteristic, a three-phase trip command is sent. Unblocking the Zones Blocked due to Power swing In order to protect the network against a fault that may occur during power swing, blocking signals can be inhibited when the determined current thresholds are exceeded. The adjustable unblocking criteria are: - a residual current threshold: Ir > 0.1 In + kr.Imax (allows earth fault detection during powerswing), 100 a negative-sequence current threshold: I2 > 0.1 In + ki.Imax (allows isolated fault detection during power-swing), 100 a phase current threshold: I1> (allows 3-phase fault detection during power-swing). where: - kr, ki: adjustable coefficients in %, - Imax: maximum current detected on one phase, - In: nominal current. When unblocking occurs during power swing, the independent zone 1 function may either be blocked or left unblocked. If zone 1 is selected independent, the teleprotection messages are taken into account in a specific way, as shown in Figures 2.3y and 2.3z. 2-42 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.3.8.4. Fault Detection after Single-phase Tripping (one pole open condition) After a circuit breaker pole has opened, there is no current and voltage on the applicable phase, which allows the protection unit to detect a one-pole cycle if the voltage transformers are on the line side. The reception of "Poles discrepancy" input signal allows the protection unit to detect a one pole open condition blocking if the voltage transformers are on a busbar side. If another fault appears during a one-pole open cycle or just after the voltage has been restored on the applicable phase, the protection defines a direction and phase selection, then a tripping command is issued. If the protection is configured so as to operate in the teleprotection mode and if a fault occurs during a singlephase cycle, then the teleaction messages are processed in a specific way, as shown in figures 2.3y and 2.3z. Blocking Forward fault & Step 1time-delay & transmission time-delay & Step 2 time-delay Tripping 1 Step 5 time-delay Reverse fault Forward fault Blocking Figure 2.3y: Blocking teleaction during a single-phase cycle (or during unblocking while power swing is present) Authorisation Forward fault Reverse fault Forward fault & Step 1 time-delay & Step 2 time-delay Tripping 1 Step 5 time-delay Authorisation Figure 2.3z: Permissive or acceleration teleaction during a single-phase cycle (or during unblocking while power swing is present) 2-43 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.3.8.5. Fuse Failure Detection and emergency overcurrent protection 1) FF detection: The EPAC monitors the condition of the voltage transformer fuses. If one fuse is no longer serviceable, then the EPAC does the following: - inhibits any tripping by the protection function, - if the fuse failure indication is still present when the configurable time delay expires, a confirmed fuse failure alarm is issued. Line Fuse Failure The fuse failure information may be obtained from: - a fuse failure external signal coming from an MCB "Mini Circuit breaker", - the internal calculation of the line current and voltage characteristics equation, i.e. if: . the residual voltage Vr is above a predefined threshold of 0.75.Vn, . the zero- and negative-sequence currents I0 and I2 are below a detection threshold, . the line current is below a fixed Imax threshold of 2.5 In. The overall equation for detecting fuse failure is: Fuse failure = (FFext + Vr).I0.I2.Imax where: FFext = external fuse failure signal Imax = I<Imax If no external signal is received and the configurable time delay has not yet expired, three current thresholds (negative-sequence, zero-sequence and phase current) unblock the protection if a fault is present. The negative-sequence and zero-sequence current thresholds can be adjusted, the maximum current threshold is non-settable and corresponds to 2.5 In. Busbar Fuse Failure Notification of a busbar fuse failure can only come via an external signal. When the signal is validated, the reclosing cycles associated with the synchro-check function are disabled, i.e. the function stops issuing any reclosing authorisation signals. If the synchro-check function is in loopback mode and the circuit breaker associated with the protection relay is closed, a "voltage fault by synchro-check" output signal is given if the busbar voltage differs from the line voltage for more than 20 s. 2-44 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Indication of Confirmed Fuse Failure An alarm indicates that a fuse failure has been detected. The alarm is instantaneous if an external line or busbar fuse failure signal is received. There is a time delay if a line fuse failure is detected as a result an internal EPAC calculation. The delay can be set to between 1 s and 20 s. If this time delay exceeds the maximum length for a one pole open condition, the tripping logic associated with fuse failure during a one pole open condition need not be applied. The presence of a fuse failure indication validates the confirmed fuse failure signal. After fuse failure detection, the indication remains until the following conditions are met: - no line fuse failure is detected by internal or external means and no busbar fuse failure is detected, - the line is open or the network is considered to be healthy. Fault Detection during Confirmed Line Fuse Failure: emergency overcurrent protection When a fuse failure is confirmed, the following protection functions are blocked: - weak infeed, - distance protection, - overcurrent start-up, - DEF and associated back-up protection, - power-swing, - under- and over-voltage protection, - synchrocheck, - sensitive directional earth fault protection. 2) An additional protection function, based on current thresholds and associated time delays, is used to handle any faults occurring during a confirmed fuse failure. The thresholds and time delays are: - an Ifus> high current threshold and an Ifus>> very high current threshold for the phase current, associated with time delays Tfus> and Tfus>>, - an Ifr> current threshold for the residual current, associated with a Tfr> time delay. The "Blocking Protection" digital input blocks this protection function. This input is either external or is received via VDEW. Start-Up The protection function is activated when one of the following conditions is confirmed: - the maximum value of the derivative of one of the phase currents is greater than one of the phase current thresholds, - the maximum value of the residual current derivative is greater than the residual current threshold. A hysteresis of 5% deactivates the protection start-up. 2-45 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Tripping Logic If the duration of a threshold overreach is longer than the associated time delay, a command is issued for a three-phase trip. I phase Ifus> Trip Ifus>> No trip t Tfus> Tfus>> Figure 2.3aa: Tripping Logic for Phase Currents IR Trip Ifr> No trip t Tfr> Figure 2.3ab: Tripping Logic for Residual Current Phase Selection Phase selection occurs at protection start-up on overreach of the Ifus> or Ifus>> threshold. No phase selection occurs if the protection is activated on overreach of the Ifr> threshold alone. Operation with an Auto-Recloser The auto-recloser can be blocked after tripping on overreach of the Ifus>, Ifus>> or Ifr threshold during a confirmed fuse failure. If the auto-recloser is not blocked, the reclosing cycles used are those defined for backup protection trips. If the synchro-check function has been activated for three-phase high- and low-speed cycles, automatic reclosing is enabled if: - the authorisation conditions are met on the reference phase of the synchro-check function, - the external line or busbar fuse failure signal is invalid. 2-46 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 3) Fault Detection during Unconfirmed Line Fuse Failure A line fuse failure is considered to be unconfirmed if it has been detected internally and the signal time delay has not yet expired. If one of the following faults is detected in such a situation, the EPAC protection functions are unblocked and the protection will trip. Fault type Associated threshold Earth fault settable I0 zero-sequence current threshold. Double-phase fault settable Ii negative-sequence current threshold. Three-phase fault fixed Imax threshold. Reports associated with faults during unconfirmed line fuse failures indicate the selected phase, the zone and the direction of the fault but this information needs to be checked. Tripping occurs on a fault during an unconfirmed line fuse failure at the latest on expiry of the step 4 time delay. Instantaneous fuse failure Vn > 0.75 Vn & FFext 0 Confirmed fuse failure (TC) Tc S Open line I 0 < Sc I2 < Sc Imax < 2, 5 In Q 1 & R Healthy network 1 Distance protection blocked Sc = Settable current threshold (0.1 In to In) Tc = Settable confirmation time delay (1 s to 20 s) Figure 2.3ac: Fuse failure logic 2.3.8.6. Power Transformer Energizing (inrush current) This protection serves to avoid the inadvertent tripping of the circuit breaker when closing-on a transformer which makes major demands on the current (also known as "inrush current"). For this purpose, the fundamental and the harmonic 2 of currents IA, IB et IC are measured. If a current harmonic is found to be higher than 0.25 times the fundamental, the circuit breaker was closed while the power transformer was energizing. In this case, tripping by the EPAC relay is blocked. 2.3.8.7. Switch-On-To-Fault protection (SOTF) and Trip-On-Reclose (TOR) This protection is used to protect against the effects of reclosing on to fault. To this end, it must: - detect any transition that indicates circuit breaker closing, - detect any closing on to fault, - provoke three-phase tripping if a fault is detected after closing. 2-47 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Detection of a transition that indicates closing To keep track of the line condition, the current and voltage amplitudes are monitored separately phase per phase. If currents are lower than 0.2 In and voltages are lower than 0.7 Vn, the circuit breaker is considered to be open. Transition is detected when currents or voltages exceed either of these thresholds. Vn T (transition) 0.7 0.2 In Detection of Closing on a Fault A closing operation is called "closing on fault" if one of the two following conditions is confirmed: - one of the phase currents exceeds the configurable fault detection current threshold, - one loop is convergent inside the start-up characteristic. I > I threshold & * Closing or reclosing circuit breaker Line opened Transition detection 500ms & Closing 160ms 1 1 3-phase trip Convergence Start-up protection & & Harmonic 2 detection Figure 2.3ad: Protection against closing on fault During a closing operation, if the protection detects a current higher than the adjustable tripping current (I > I threshold), three-phase tripping is ordered without monitoring the Inrush Current. logic *: External input (TS) 2-48 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.3.8.8. Double circuit lines Double circuit lines must be taken into account in the operating principle of the protection scheme to avoid unwanted tripping of “sound” phases which could be the result of an excessively general phase selection. Phase selection for an inter-circuit fault During the two-phase selection, for instance on loop AB, the EPAC makes a directional measurement on the two adjacent loops (AN and BN). The directional is measured by the conventional method and by using superimposed quantities. For this purpose, the energy is summated phase by phase. Sa = Σ (∆Va.∆Ia) and Sb = Σ (∆Vb.∆Ib) If the two directionals are forward, the fault is a two-phase fault on the protected line. If only one of the directionals is forward, for instance Sa, the fault is a single-phase AN on the protected line. If the two directionals are reverse, the fault does not concern the protected line. Protection against Current Reversal guard When a fault occurs on a line adjacent to a double line, the fault current on the unaffected line may be reversed due to sequential opening of the circuit breakers located at both the ends of the line with the fault. This is shown in figure 2.3ac. Due to this current reversal, the protection directionals may be reversed non-simultaneously. So that for a short period, both directionals may be forward, which could lead to spurious tripping. The EPAC provides protection against the effects of this phenomenon in the following manner: for a adjustable time-delay after the directional changeover from reverse to forward, the acceleration and permissive messages are not taken into account. This provides protection against fault current reversal and ensures fast tripping in the event of faults occurring in zone 1, if the latter is independent. During this time delay, the EPAC does not send acceleration or permissive messages. 2-49 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C PA Fault I Fault I Reverse fault observed by PA protection relay PA Fault I Forward fault observed by PA protection relay Figure 2.3ae: Directional Reversal on an Unaffected Line 2.3.9. Input-Output Logic Functions Distance protection Power swing detection Power swing detected & Current > thresholds for fault detection during power swing Power swing Fuse failure Fault current detected Line fuse failure detected Fault current detected * * Busbar fuse failure Line fuse failure & 1 & Fuse failure confirmed logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic 2-50 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Auto-recloser blocking Step 2 time delay expired Step 2 auto-recl. block request & Step 3 time delay expired Step 3 auto-recl. block request & Step 4 time delay expired Step 4 auto-recl. block request & Step 5 time delay expired Step 5 auto-recl. block request & T> time delay expired I> auto-recl. block request & T>> time delay expired I>> auto-recl. block request & DEF backup protection emerg. overcurrent protection Recl. block request by backup prot. & 1 Auto-recloser blocking Umax protection trip Umin protection trip * Low pressure * Reclosing impossible Trip command maintained far too long One-phase trip (phase A) Phase A tripped One-phase trip (phase B) Phase B tripped One-phase trip (phase C) Phase C tripped logic *: External input (TS) 300ms : External input (TS) or internal logic 2-51 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Three-phase trip Phase A trip & Phase B trip Three-phase trip Phase C trip Distance Protection Start-up Convergence of one of the 6 loops Phase selection valid Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone 1 2 3 4 5 & fault fault fault fault fault 1 Start-up Forward directional Fault appears forward of the protection Reverse directional Reverse current fault appears Phase A selection Phase A faulty Phase B selection Phase B faulty Phase C selection Phase C faulty Single-phase fault Phase A fault Phase B fault Phase C fault & Phase B fault Phase A fault Phase C fault & Phase C fault Phase B fault Phase A fault & 1 Single-phase fault 2-52 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Multi-phase fault Phase A selected (Phase A fault) Phase B selected (Phase B fault) & Phase A selected (Phase A fault) Phase C selected (Phase C fault) & Phase C selected (Phase C fault) Phase B selected (Phase B fault) & 1 Multi-phase fault Zone 1 fault Fault appears in Zone 1 1 Fault appears in extended Zone 1 & Zone 1 fault Trip Zone 2 fault Fault appears in Zone 2 Trip & Zone 2 fault & Zone 3 fault & Zone 4 fault Zone 3 fault Fault appears in Zone 3 Trip Zone 4 fault Fault appears in Zone 4 Trip Zone 5 (reverse) fault Fault appears in Zone 5 Trip & Zone 5 fault 2-53 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Carrier send Teleaction command sent after an isolation fault Set for teleaction command transmission zone 1 Set for teleaction command transmission zones 1 and 2 1 & Fault in zone 1 Reversal directional guard time delay Teleaction command transmission zones 1 and 2 & 1 Fault in zone 2 Convergence of one of the 6 loops Fault in zone 5 Teleaction command sent 1 Teleaction command transmission zone 5 & Fault in reverse zone Teleaction command sent after a fault during a one pole open condition Set for teleaction command transmission zone 1 1 Set for teleaction command transmission zones 1 and 2 Reversal directional guard time delay Forward fault Convergence of one of the 6 loops & & 1 Convergence of one of the 6 loops Fault in zone 5 Teleaction command transmission zone 5 Fault in reverse zone 1 Teleaction command set & Transmission of unblocking signal No teleaction command sent Transmission of teleaction command for tee line Teleaction command sent for tee line after isolation fault or during one pole open condition 2-54 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Transmission of unblocking signal for tee line No teleaction command sent for tee line Earth fault Zero-sequence current detected Weak-infeed Teleaction command sent signal received * TeleactionProtection start-up & Fault detected in reverse zone Teleaction command sent Unblocking signal sent signal received * TeleactionProtection start-up & Unblocking signal sent Fault detected in reverse zone Teleaction command sent for tee line Teleaction signal *received for tee line Protection start-up & Fault detected in reverse zone Teleaction command sent for tee line Unblocking signal sent for tee line Teleaction signal *received for tee line Protection start-up Fault detected in reverse zone & Unblocking signal sent for tee line logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic 2-55 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Phase A selection Voltage drop detected on phase A Phase B selection Voltage drop detected on phase B Phase C selection Voltage drop detected on phase C Single-phase fault Phase A fault Phase B fault Phase C fault & Phase B fault Phase A fault Phase C fault & Phase C fault Phase B fault Phase A fault & 1 Single-phase fault Multi-phase fault Phase A selected (Phase A fault) Phase B selected (Phase B fault) & Phase A selected (Phase A fault) Phase C selected (Phase C fault) & Phase C selected (Phase C fault) Phase B selected (Phase B fault) & Weak infeed trip Tripping by weak infeed function 1 Multi-phase fault 2-56 EPAC 3100/3500 2.4. MS/M 1.6882-C DISTANCE PROTECTION FOR NETWORKS WITH INSULATED OR IMPEDANT NEUTRAL (RNI OPTION) The RNI module allows the characteristics of the phase-to-earth faults to be considered when the neutral is insulated or grounded by an impedance or a Petersen coil. As a matter of fact, such faults cannot always be correctly processed by standard distance protections. The RNI module makes a difference between single phase-to-earth faults and double phase-to-earth faults which have different effect on the electrical network. The directional of a single-phase fault on this type of network is determined by the Sensitive Directional Earth Fault function which complements the RNI function (described in paragraph 2.4.3). Tripping on a fault by the RNI option is always three-phase. Single Phase-to-Earth Fault As shown in figure 2.4a, the typical voltage triangle is not immediately affected by a single phase-to-earth fault; therefore the associated circuit breaker does not need to be opened quickly. In this case, the RNI module proceeds as follows: - It indicates that the single fault has occurred, - If the fault remains after a 0 to 360 second configurable time delay, the circuit breaker is tripped in three phases. VA = 0 Earth VA U CA Earth U AB U CA -Vo U BA VB VC U BC UBC Before a fault After a fault Figure 2.4a: Single Phase-to-Earth Fault - Impedant Neutral Double Phase-to-Earth Fault The double phase-to-earth faults are created by a single phase-to-earth fault which generates another phase-to-earth fault by the "Cross country" phenomenon. It is important to protect against such faults because they change the voltage triangle and affect the electrical network balance. In such cases, the RNI module is in charge of opening one of the two lines affected by the fault according to their convergence in the zone characteristic and to the type and direction of the fault. 2-57 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.4.1. Fault Analysis by the RNI Module When a fault is detected, the residual current and voltage are compared to thresholds. Fault processing therefore depends on threshold overreaches. The residual voltage threshold, Vr, is constant and configurable from 0.1 Vn to Vn. The residual current threshold, Ir, varies according to the value of the highest phase current in compliance with the curve shown in figure 2.4b. Residual current α Ir threshold a Highest phase current Where : α = 12° 0.2In < Ir threshold < 5In a = In Figure 2.4b: Residual Current Threshold 2.4.1.1. If the residual voltage is not higher than the Vr threshold An isolated fault is (two-phase without earth) present. In this case, the "fast" algorithm attempts to select a phase and to define a directional. 2.4.1.2. If the residual voltage is higher than the Vr threshold and if the zero-sequence current is higher than the Ir threshold A double fault ("cross-country") is present. In this case: - the RNI module selects the faulty phase, - the fault direction is defined by the "Conventional" algorithms. 2.4.1.3. If the residual voltage is higher than the Vr threshold and if the zero-sequence current is lower than the Ir threshold An earth fault is present. Phase selection is carried out by the detection of insufficient current on one of the phases. The protection device only trips if the fault is still present after a adjustable time delay for singlephase fault trips. 2-58 EPAC 3100/3500 2.4.2. MS/M 1.6882-C Phase Selection by the RNI Module The RNI module selects a phase according to the following criteria: - the fault analysis, - the measurement loop convergence in the start-up characteristic, - the single-phase and two-phase apparent resistances, - the phase directionals. If the fault is single-phase, the directional is provided by the zero sequence power function described in section 2.4.3. 2.4.2.1. Loop selection criterion The following tables show the phase selection possibilities for the three types of faults that can be detected by the RNI module. The loop variables have been introduced for convenience: X, Y and Z : can be any one of the three single-phase loops, XY, XZ and YZ : can be any one of the three two-phase loops, Rx, Ry and Rz : can be any one of the single-phase apparent resistances, Rxy, Rxz and Ryz : can be any one of the two-phase apparent resistances, Directional (X) : can be the directional of a single-phase, Directional (XY) : can be the directional of a two-phase loop. In some cases, these tables refer to the table 2.4f. Table 2.4f corresponds to a phase selection where the convergent loops have opposite directionals and therefore indicate that the faults are present in the forward or backward zone of the circuit breaker. When this type of fault occurs, the EPAC must be able, in some cases, to isolate only one of the faults. The choice of the phase(s) to be selected depends on a configurable priority criterion which defines the priority between the different phases. When a single-phase fault is present, the phase selection is determined by the voltage missing on one phase. The relay does not trip, except if the fault duration is longer than the adjustable "tripping time delay" (from 1 s to 360 s). 2-59 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C If the residual voltage is not higher than the Vr threshold Convergent loops Resistance conditions Fault type / Phase selection Three two-phase and Three single-phase or Rxy < Rxyz Ryz < Rxyz Rxz < Rxyz Three-phase fault (refer to table) at least two two-phase XY and YZ 2Rxy < Ryz AND 2Rxy < Rxz Two-phase XY fault (refer to table) Rz > 2Rx Rz > 2Ry Two-phase XY fault otherwise Three-phase fault only one two-phase XY - Two-phase XY fault One single-phase X - no selection Table 2.4c: RNI Phase Selection if V < Vr If the residual voltage is higher than the Vr threshold and the residual current is higher than the Ir threshold Convergent loops Directional or resistance conditions Fault type / Phase selection No two-phase dir (X) = dir (Y) = dir (Z) No selection and three single-phase XYZ different directionals Three single-phase faults (refer to table) No two-phase and one single-phase X Single-phase X fault One or more two-phase including XY and two single-phase X and Y dir (X) = dir (Y) = dir (XY) Two-phase XY fault (refer to table) No, one or several two-phase + two single-phase X,Y dir (X) ≠ dir (Y) Two-phase XY fault (refer table) One or more two-phase 2Rxy < Rxz dir (X) ≠ dir (Y) Two single-phase faults (refer table) including XY 2Rxy < Ryz dir (X) =dir (Y) = dir (XY) One single-phase fault and one two-phase fault (refer table) One or more two-phase Rz > 2Rx dir (X) ≠ dir (Y) including XY Rz > 2Ry dir (X) =dir (Y) = dir (XY) Two-phase XY fault (refer table) Two single-phase faults (refer table) Table 2.4d: RNI Phase Selection if V > Vr and I > Ir 2-60 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C If the residual voltage is higher than the Vr threshold and the residual current is lower than the Ir threshold Convergent loops Voltage conditions Resistance conditions No two-phase and only 1 single-phase X No two-phase No single-phase Fault type Phase selection single-phase X fault Vx < V threshold Vy > V threshold Vz > V threshold single-phase X fault Two-phase XY and only X and Y two-phase X fault XY, YZ, XZ Rxy < Rxyz Ryz < Rxyz Rxz < Rxyz three-phase fault Two-phase XY 2Rxy < Rxz 2Rxy < Ryz two-phase XY fault Two-phase XY Rz > 2Ry Rz > 2Rx two-phase XY fault Otherwise three-phase fault Table 2.4e: RNI Phase Selection if V > Vr and I < Ir Criterion Priority A(C) acyclic A before C before B C(A) acyclic C before A before B A(B) acyclic A before B before C B(A) acyclic B before A before C B(C) acyclic B before C before A A(C) cyclic A before C before B before A C(A) cyclic C before A before B before C 2-61 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Priority criterion Convergent loops Selected phase(s) C(A) acyclic AN, BN BN, CN CN, AN AN, BN, CN AB, BC, CA AN CN CN CN CA A(C) acyclic AN, BN BN, CN CN, AN AN, BN, CN AB, BC, CA AN CN AN AN CA B(A) acyclic AN, BN BN, CN CN, AN AN, BN, CN AB, BC, CA BN BN AN BN AB A(B) acyclic AN, BN BN, CN CN, AN AN, BN, CN AB, BC, CA AN BN AN AN AB C(B) acyclic AN, BN BN, CN CN, AN AN, BN, CN AB, BC, CA BN CN CN CN BC B(C) acyclic AN, BN BN, CN CN, AN AN, BN, CN AB, BC, CA BN BN CN BN BC C(A) cyclic AN, BN BN, CN CN, AN AN, BN, CN AB, BC, CA AN BN CN CN CA A(C) cyclic AN, BN BN, CN CN, AN AN, BN, CN AB, BC, CA BN VN AN AN CA Table 2.4f: Phase Selection Criteria 2-62 EPAC 3100/3500 2.4.3. MS/M 1.6882-C Sensitive Directional Earth Fault Protection on Insulated or Impedant Neutral Networks This function complements the RNI function and handles single-phase faults on insulated or impedant neutral networks. It combines three different functions: - detection of the zero-sequence directional, to determine the direction of a single-phase fault, - management of transient single-phase auto-start faults which can be considered as true faults, - management of fault detection and forward or reverse directional detection signals and their associated time delays. 2.4.3.1. Detection of a Sensitive Directional Earth Fault This function enables the zero-sequence directional of a single-phase fault to be determined on the basis of: - the measured zero-sequence current, - the zero-sequence voltage calculated by adding together the three phase voltages (the phase voltages halves in fact, to prevent saturation). Current direction is based on the calculated residual active and apparent power and the comparison of these values with settable thresholds. A correction is made for the lag between zero-sequence current and zero-sequence voltage before these power values are calculated. Correction for Lag between Zero-Sequence Current and Zero-Sequence Voltage The function determining the zero-sequence directional corrects simultaneously the phase angles that can be introduced by three elements in the measurement system. These angles are: - the phase angle that can be created by the CT core measuring the zero-sequence current, between the current of the primary winding and that of the secondary winding, - the phase angle of the tripping characteristic between the residual voltage and the residual current, - the phase angle between the residual voltage and the residual current due to the analogdigital converter. Primary CT Core Angle The fact that the primary CT core angle is taken into account in power calculations means that the EPAC can be used with almost all types of CT cores. The primary CT core angle is determined by comparing the zero-sequence current with: - an I2 current threshold for the secondary winding, on the basis of which the φ2 angle can be regarded as constant, - an I1 current threshold for the secondary winding, which gives a maximum φ1 primary CT core angle. 2-63 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C If the measured current is above the I2 threshold, the angle is regarded as being constant and equal to φ2. If it is between I1 and I2, the CT core angle is regarded as being linear, between φ1 and φ2. φ Phase angle = φ1 (φ1 - φ2). I (φ2.I1 - φ1.I2) + (I1 - I2) (I1 - I2) Phase angle = φ2 φ2 I1 I I2 Figure 2.4g: Characteristic for the Zero-Sequence Directional Angle of the Tripping Characteristic Setting this angle enables the neutral earthing characteristic to be taken into account on RNI networks. The angle can be set between -180° and +180°. For instance, the angle for insulated or impedant neutral networks is 90° while that for networks with a Petersen coil it is 0°. Ir φ Vr Figure 2.4h: Angle of the Tripping Characteristic Directional Detection Logic The logic for directional detection is based on the calculated residual active power (Pr) and residual apparent power (Sr) and comparison of these values with settable thresholds. Residual active power Pr = Ureff.Ireff.cos (φ) Residual apparent power Sr = Ureff.Ireff The Pr/Ir ratio indicates the direction of transit of the fault current and hence the fault current direction. Faults are considered to be forward if the residual active power Pr is negative, as the movement of the residual current is from the fault towards the protection. The power values are calculated after correction for lags. They are calculated only if the absolute zero-sequence voltage and zero-sequence current values are above certain settable thresholds: Zero-sequence voltage |Vr| > V threshold Zero-sequence current |Ir| > I threshold 2-64 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Characteristic for the Zero-Sequence Directional The residual active and apparent power thresholds define the characteristic for the zerosequence directional. The characteristic defines the power limits and the direction of any zerosequence fault. Residual active power threshold: SW = K.I threshold l.V threshold Apparent power threshold: S threshold = |Pr| / cos(87°) The direction of a single-phase fault is forward if: Pr < - SW and Sr <= S threshold The direction of a single-phase fault is reverse if: Pr > SW and Sr <= S threshold Pr > SW Reverse directional Pr 87° SW IrS --SW Pr < --SW Forward directional Figure 2.4i: Characteristic for the Zero-Sequence Directional The residual active power threshold has a hysteresis of 5 %. The apparent power threshold has a hysteresis of + 0.5°. Inhibition of directional detection during a fault condition Detection is inhibited for 400 ms if, during the 100 ms preceding the detection of a directional, a directional in the opposite direction was detected. A power detection threshold of 0.1 SW is used to detect directional reversal. 2-65 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Examples Pr SW --SW t 100 ms Instantaneous forward directional t 400 ms Instantaneous reverse directional t Directional with time delay FORWARD t Figure 2.4j: Inhibition after Detection of a Forward Directional Pr SW t --0,1 SW --SW 100 ms Instantaneous reverse directional 400 ms t Directional with time delay t Figure 2.4k: Inhibition after Overreach of a Low Detection Threshold 2.4.3.2. Single-Phase Auto-Start Faults This function enables single-phase auto-start (intermittent) faults to be treated like permanent faults. An auto-start fault is one that disappears and reappears periodically. A time delay determines the maximum length of time between two auto-start faults for them to be considered to constitute a single permanent fault. 2-66 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C On disappearance of a single-phase fault: - an auto-start time delay (Trall) is activated, - the data concerning the directional, the phase selection and the presence of a single-phase fault are stored in memory. If a single-phase fault reappears in the same direction before expiry of the Trall time delay, the data stored in memory are kept. -Pr>SW Instantaneous forward <Trall <Trall <Trall <Trall Figure 2.4l: Management of Auto-Start Faults 2.4.3.3. Signals with Time Delays This function enables time delays to be associated with the following digital outputs: - delayed forwards earth fault, - delayed backwards earth fault. A Ttempo time delay is activated on appearance of a permanent fault (or an auto-start fault considered as a permanent fault as a result of its reoccurrence before expiry of the Trall time delay). If the fault is still present on expiry of the time delay, the "permanent earth fault" DI is validated. The "delayed forward (or backwards) earth fault " output is likewise only asserted if the directional is present for longer than the Trall time delay. The "phase (A,B or C) selection" output is maintained for as long as the single-phase fault is present. 2-67 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C t<Time delay Single-phase fault Time delay T>Trall Earth fault with time delay Phase selection t<Time delay Time delay Instantaneous forward Directional with time delay Forward Figure 2.4m: Signals with time delays 2.4.4. Associated Inputs/Outputs Output name Meaning Single phase fault Single-phase fault Earth fault Permanent earth fault Phase selection (A, B or C) Faulty phase selected Delayed forwards earth fault Indication of fault downstream of the protection device, with associated time delay Delayed backwards earth fault Indication of fault upstream of the protection device, with associated time delay Forward directional Fault downstream of the protection device (instantaneous directional) Reverse directional Fault upstream of the protection device (instantaneous directional) 2-68 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.5. COMPLEMENTARY PROTECTION DEVICES 2.5.1. DEF Protection Against High Resistance Earth Faults Protection against high resistance earth faults, also called DEF, is used to protect the electrical network against very resistive faults. In fact, a very resistive fault is usually not correctly detected by distance protection. Protection against high resistance earth faults uses the following: - in main operating mode, a directional comparison protection, - in backup operating mode, an inverse time overcurrent protection or an inverse time zerosequence power protection. The protection to be selected in backup mode is configurable. These protection devices use the same results to detect the fault and to define the directional. On the other hand, only directional comparison protection allows single-phase tripping and therefore uses the results of the phase selection. The main operating difference between these protection devices is their tripping logic. The use of directional comparison protection without independent signalling channel implies that the function having priority is the distance protection. In this case, if an impedance loop converges inside the start-up characteristic, the directional comparison function will be blocked. The use of directional comparison protection with independent signalling channel implies that the both functions (directional comparison and distance protections) work in parallel. In this case, if an impedance loop converges inside the start-up characteristic, the directional comparison function will not be blocked and the faster of the two functions will perform the trip. 2.5.1.1. High Resistance Earth Fault Detection A very resistive fault is detected in the following conditions: - residual voltage and current thresholds are exceeded, - a fault is suspected; 30 ms later, this is confirmed by the exceeding of residual voltage and current threshold levels. . ∆ I ≥ 0.05 In . ∆ U ≥ 0.1 Un/√3 2.5.1.2. Directional determination The fault direction is determined by measuring the phase-shift between the residual voltage and the residual current derivative (a band-pass FIR derivator applied to all currents (phase to earth, phase to phase, residual). The fault is said to be forward if the phase-shift is between -14˚ and +166˚. 2-69 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.5.1.3. Phase selection The phase is selected in the same way as for distance protection except that the current threshold is reduced. If the phase has not been selected within 20 ms, the three phases are selected automatically. 2.5.1.4. Tripping Logic Directional Comparison Protection Directional comparison protection operates in conjunction with two remote end protections. The teleaction message transmission channels may be the same as those used by the distance protection or may be independent. Figures 2.5a to 2.5d show the tripping logic diagrams according to the teleaction channel in use. Transmission time delay is valid only if a blocking scheme is used. * * Tee line application Forward led Vrd reversal guard enc-i Carrier sent & sel_mono dec_mono * Reception carrier lev Tfon ms & cvmr zone * 150 ms cycle TS-cycle Tee line application * Reception carrier Tee line Carrier sent Tee line & & Single-phase tripping & Three-phase tripping & sel-bi dec_tri no-sel See legend, page 2-73 logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic Figure 2.5a: Directional comparison protection permissive scheme with the same channel 2-70 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Tee line application Forward led Vrd reversal guard enc-i & Trans piq (ms) & Trans (ms) sel_mono dec_mono lev & Three-phase tripping sel-bi dec_tri 150 ms cycle * TS-cycle lev & no-sel cvmr zone Reverse Single-phase tripping & * Reception carrier Tfon ns & Tee line application carrier * Reception tee line Carrier sent for blocking scheme & Vrd Tee line application & Carrier sent for blocking scheme and tee line application See legend, page 2-73 logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic Figure 2.5b: Directional comparison protection blocking scheme with the same channel 2-71 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Tee line application Forward led Vrd reversal guard enc-i Carrier sent by DEF & sel_mono dec_mono *Reception carrier DEF lev * Tfon ms & 150 ms cycle TS-cycle Tee line application * Carrier sent for tee line by DEF & Reception carrier tee line DEF & Single-phase tripping & Three-phase tripping & sel-bi dec_tri no-sel See legend, page 2-73 logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic Figure 2.5c: Directional comparison protection permissive scheme with independent channels 2-72 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Tee line application Forward led Vrd reversal guard enc-i & Tfon ms Trans piq (ms) Trans (ms) sel_mono dec_mono & & Single-phase tripping & Three-phase tripping & carrier * Reception DEF lev & sel-bi dec_tri no-sel * 150 ms cycle TS-cycle Tee line application carrier * Reception tee line DEF Reverse lev Carrier sent for blocking scheme & Vrd Tee line application & Carrier sent for blocking scheme and tee line application See legend, page 2-73 logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic Figure 2.5d: Directional comparison protection blocking scheme with independent channels 2-73 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Keys for DEF protection figures lev Threshold of residual current for reverse fault (0.6 led) Tfon Time delay must be higher than the single-phase cycle in progress time (adjustable) Cvmr Internal starting of the distance protection Zone_l Zone measurement carried out by the distance protection enc_i Trip by overcurrent due to a reclose on to fault Cycle Single-phase detection cycle in progress TS cycle Single phase input cycle in progress forward Forward directional with zero-sequence component led Threshold of residual current for forward fault Vrd Threshold of residual voltage Reversal guard Reversal guard time Reverse Reverse directional with zero-sequence component Trans Transmission time delay for blocking scheme Transpiq. Transmission time delay for tee line and blocking scheme Tee line application Tee line application selected (adjustable) sel_mono Single-phase selection sel_bi Poly-phase selection dec_mono Single-phase tripping by DEF (adjustable) dec_tri Three-phase tripping by DEF (adjustable) no_sel Phase selection not valid or three-phase tripping authorisation (adjustable) recep. carrier Carrier received for the principal line protected (same channel as distance protection) recep. carrier tee line Carrier received for the tee line protected (same channel as distance protection) recep. carrier DEF Carrier received for the main line protected (different channel of the distance protection) recep. carrier tee line DEF Carrier received for the tee line protected (different channelof the distance protection) Tfon —> 0 : Time delay before any Iev signal is taken into account 0 —> 150 : Time delay activated when cycle and TS-cycle signals disappear If the operator selects directional comparison transmission on the same channel as is used to transmit teleaction distance protection messages, the DEF will have the same tripping logic as the main protection (authorisation or blocking). The check is carried out in the MMI’s. Teleaction distance protection transmission has priority over that of the DEF directional, which is why the function is disabled if distance protection is started internally (Cvmr, zone or enc_i). 2-74 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Directional Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection This protection trips the associated circuit breaker if a very resistive fault remains after a certain time delay. The value of this time delay varies in relation with the value of the fault current. The selectable inverse time curves comply with the IEC and ANSI standards and are given in the appendix. The fault is said to be forward if the phase-shift is between -14˚ and +166˚. This protection trips every time three poles and blocks the autorecloser. The adjustable time delay Tfon from 0.1 s to 10 s must be higher than the time of single-phase cycle in progress. Single-phase cycle in progress Ir > Ithreshold Settable time delay Tfon & Ir > Ithreshold Forward fault & Ir Inverse time time-delay Figure 2.5e: Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Three poles tripping Ir 2-75 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Inverse Time Directional Zero-sequence Power Protection The tripping logic of this backup protection relay is very similar to that of the inverse time overcurrent protection except that tripping occurs only when forward faults are detected. The value of the time delay varies in relation to the residual voltage and current values according to the following equation: Tripping time = 0.2 K. (So/Sr) where So = 10 VA Sr = Ur . Ir K = configurable coefficient This protection trips three poles every time and blocks the autorecloser. The adjustable time delay Tfon from 0.1 s to 10 s must be higher than the time of single-phase cycle in progress. Single-phase cycle in progress Ir > Ithreshold Adjustable time delay Tfon & Forward fault Ir > Ithreshold & Three poles tripping Po Po Inverse time time-delay Figure 2.5f: Inverse Time Zero-sequence Power Protection 2-76 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.5.1.5. Associated Inputs/Outputs Input name Meaning 1 phase cycle auto-reclose Input to indicate a single-phase cycle in progress from an external autorecloser Signal receive D.E.F Reception of a "forward directional" or blocking signal Signal receive D.E.F Tee line Reception of a "forward directional" or blocking signal for Tee line Output name Meaning Directional comparison signal Transmission of a "forward directional" or "reverse directional" signal Directional comparison signal for Tee line Transmission of a "forward directional" or "reverse directional" signal for Tee line D.E.F trip Tripping by high resistant earth fault protection 2.5.1.6. Logic Functions for DEF Protection Transmission of directional comparison signal DEF protection set for authorisation logic & Forward fault detected by zero-sequence directional Directional comparison signal sent 1 DEF protection set for blocking logic & Reverse fault detected by zero-sequence directional Transmission of directional comparison signal for tee line As above, see tee line condition added Transmission of teleaction command Authorisation logic Forward fault & 1 Blocking logic Reverse fault Independant channels on Tee line & & Teleaction command sent 2-77 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Transmission of teleaction command for tee line As above, with tee line condition added Tripping by high resistance earth fault protection Tripping by directional comparison protection Tripping by zero-sequence current backup protection or Tripping by zero-sequence power backup protection 1 DEF trip =1 DEF by backup protection (Po or In) 2.5.2. Overload, Undervoltage, Overvoltage Protection Devices 2.5.2.1. Overload Protection This protection is additional to the distance protection. It compares the current value on the three phases to predefined thresholds. If a threshold is exceeded at least on one phase: - an alarm is issued, - a definite or an inverse time time-delay is initialised. If the overload remains when this time delay has elapsed, the overload protection trips three poles and blocks the autorecloser. The overload protection is blocked when the distance protection starts, i.e. when a fault detection loop converges inside the start-up characteristic. I I1 0.9 I1 t < time delay -> no tripping -> alarm t > time delay -> tripping -> alarm -> LED in the front panel is illuminated. Figure 2.5g: Overload Protection The LED Max I in front panel of the product is illuminated when the relay trips by overload function. It is put off when other function trips. The protection is inhibited when the current drops below 0.9 I1. 2-78 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Inverse Time Delay This overload protection is referred to as an inverse curve type protection. It is associated to an ANSI or IEC inverse time curve. Three-phase tripping occurs when a threshold is exceeded for more than the corresponding time delay on the selected and parametered inverse time curve. Definite Time Delay Three adjustable overload thresholds (I1, I2 and I3) are associated with three adjustable time delays. If at least one of the currents measured is higher than one of the thresholds for the associated time delay, a three-phase trip command is sent. Time delay Value Threshold Value T1 1 to 100 minutes I1 0.5 In to 2 In T2 1 to 100 minutes I2 In to 3 In T3 1 to 100 seconds I3 1,3 In to 3 In The overload protection is not blocked if a fuse failure is detected. 2.5.2.2. Undervoltage Protection This protection issues an alarm signal and initiates a time delay when a minimum voltage level is reached. If at least one of the 3 phase voltages remains below the minimum voltage threshold once the time delay has elapsed: - an alarm is issued, - a definite time delay is initiated. If the voltage always remains below the minimum voltage threshold once the time delay has elapsed, the circuit breaker is tripped. Tripping time delay Threshold from 0 to 20 s in 0.1s steps from 0,1 VN to 0,6 VN in 0,1 VN steps The undervoltage protection is locked when the distance protection starts, i.e. when a fault detection loop converges inside the start-up characteristic. This protection is only activated if the circuit breaker is closed. The information is given by the "CB closed " digital input, which is set to 1 if the circuit breaker is closed. The undervoltage protection is blocked when the voltage exceeds 1.1 times the minimum voltage value. The undervoltage protection is blocked when a fuse failure is detected. The LED MinU in the front panel of the product is illuminated when the undervoltage function is tripping. It is put off when other protection trips. 2-79 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C U 1.1 Uthreshold Uthreshold t t < time delay -> no tripping -> alarm t > time delay -> tripping -> alarm -> LED in the front panel of the product is illuminated Figure 2.5h: Undervoltage Protection 2.5.2.3. Overvoltage Protection This protection issues an alarm signal when at least one of the 3 phase voltages remains upper the maximum voltage threshold during a predefined time delay. A trip associated with this protection can be set: - with trip: the Max U alarm is issued about 90 ms after detection of a maximum voltage. The three-phase trip is issued at the end of the time delay, - without trip: the Max U alarm is issued at the end of the time delay. Tripping time delay Threshold from 0 to 20 s in 0.1s steps from 1.1 to 1.4 Vn in 0.1 Vn steps This protection is blocked when the distance protection starts (1 fault detection loop converges inside the start-up characteristic). U Uthreshold t t < time delay -> no alarm t > time delay -> alarm -> the LED in the front panel is illuminated Figure 2.5i: Overvoltage Protection If the protection is set to "no trip", the front panel LED Max U is illuminated when at least one voltage exceeds the adjustable threshold during a time higher than the adjustable time. If the protection is set to "trip", the front panel LED Max U is illuminated when the circuit breaker is tripped. It is put off when tripping is issued by an other function. 2-80 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.5.2.4. Associated Inputs/Outputs Input Meaning CB closed Indicates the position of three poles of the circuit breaker Output Meaning MinU alarm Signal indicating undervoltage tripping MaxU alarm Signal indicating line voltage overvoltage MaxI alarm Signal indicating overload tripping 2.5.2.5. Logic Functions MaxU Alarm At least one of the three voltages > maximum threshold MaxU signal time delay expired Max U trip request At least one of the three voltages > maximum threshold Max U trip request & 1 MaxU alarm (or trip if requested) & MaxI Alarm Current above the maximum current threshold detected MinU Alarm At least one of the three voltages < minimum threshold MinU signal time delay expired & MinU trip 2-81 ERRATUM MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 2.6. AUTO-RECLOSER FUNCTION AND SYNCHRO-CHECK FUNCTION 2.6.1. Recloser 2.6.1.1 Introduction The auto-recloser function on some models allows an isolated line to be put back into service after a fault, without manually operating the open circuit breaker. In fact, a fault on this type of link is generally transient. It may be corrected by temporarily opening the line circuit breaker once or several times. The circuit breaker opening time must allow the electric arc generated by the fault to be deionized. If the synchronism between the line voltage and the busbar voltage requires to be checked during a three-pole low-speed reclosing, a voltage monitoring module (synchro-check) may be added to the EPAC. 2.6.1.2. Reclosing cycles Each reclosing cycle is an attempt to put a line back into service. There are two types of reclosing cycle: - High-speed cycle: This cycle is activated at the first trip following a fault. It may be single-phase or three-phase, depending on the phase(s) tripped and the protection device handling the fault (back-up protection trip is always three-phase). - Low-speed cycle: This cycle followsthe high-speed cycle. Depending on the parameter setting, it may be repeated up to three times in succession. The low-speed cycle is always three-phase. Trip Tcyc Tencl Tbloc Tcyc = Cycle time delay Tbloc = Reclaim time Tencl = Reclosing time Figure 2.6a: Examples of reclosing cycles 2-82 ERRATUM MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 As can be seen in Figure 2.6a, a reclosing cycle is essentially characterised by three time delays: - Dead time: initialised when a trip occurs. This is the minimum length of time for isolating the line before a closing order can be sent to the circuit breaker. It is always shorter for the highspeed cycle (1st dead time: THSAR) than for the low-speed cycles (further dead times: TDAR). - Reclosing time delay: initialised at the end of the dead time and corresponds to the minimum time for closing the circuit breaker (Trecl.). - Circuit breaker reclaim time: also initialised at the end of the dead time. This is the minimum time for blocking the circuit breaker. If a fault appears during this time delay and the circuit breaker has been reclosed, the circuit breaker is tripped and: . if the current cycle is not the last one, the following cycle is initialised, . if the current cycle is the last one, the trip is definitive (lock-out). Several situations are possible when a fault appears: - if the fault occurs outside the reclosing cycle, a high-speed cycle is activated if the setting permits, - if the fault occurs during a reclaim time, a low-speed cycle is activated if the setting permits. If not, the order for the definitive three-phase trip is sent. During a single-pole cycle, the auto-recloser takes no notice of synchro-check authorisation. During a three-pole cycle, the setting determines whether the auto-recloser takes any notice of synchro-check authorisation. 2.6.1.3 Reclosing modes The reclosing mode used is selected on the basis of: - the number of faulty phases, - the type of protection detecting the fault. Characteristics of reclosing modes Three reclosing modes can be set. Reclosing after single-pole tripping This mode applies to single-phase faults detected by the standard distance protection (unless the latter is set to "three pole trip for all zones" mode), the directional comparison protection (if one pole tripping is authorised) or by an external protection device. Depending on the setting, the mode may: - be inhibited, - consist of a high-speed cycle (single-phase), - consist of a high-speed cycle (single-phase) followed by one to three low-speed cycles (threephase). 2-83 ERRATUM MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Reclosing after three pole tripping This mode applies to multi-phase faults detected by the standard distance protection, the directional comparison protection or by an external protection device. Depending on the setting, the mode may: - be inhibited, - consist of a high-speed cycle (three-phase), - consist of a high-speed cycle (three-phase) followed by one to three low-speed cycles (threephase). Reclosing after three pole tripping by backup protection relay This mode applies to multi- or single-phase faults detected by DEF backup protection (inverse time overcurrent protection and inverse time directional zero-sequence power protection), by the overcurrent protection or by an external protection device. Depending on the setting, the mode may: - be inhibited, - consist of a high-speed cycle (three-phase), - consist of a high-speed cycle (three-phase) followed by one to three low-speed cycles (threephase). Each of these three reclosing modes can be set independently of the other two. The reclosing signal can come from: - the distance protection or the DEF protection, which distinguish between single-phase and three-phase faults, - the zero-sequence backup protection, which alwayscauses a three pole trip. Operation in parallel of the main protection relay and the backup protection Backup protection complements the main protection relay. It may be: - internal, from the EPAC unit, - external, provided by another type of protection. There are several ways in which the auto-recloser can operate in conjunction with a backup protection relay: - in conjunction with an external protection relay. It is then necessary to wire the trip commands from the external protection relay to the phase A, B and C tripping inputs of the auto-recloser element. In this case, the auto-recloser start-up is controlled either by internal protection relay commands or by digital trip inputs, - in conjunction with the auto-recloser of a redundant EPAC protection. In this case, if the redundant auto-recloser has already been started up, the internal start-up of the EPAC autorecloser can be blocked by reception of an order on the "Reclosing impossible" input. In order to prevent the cycle overlap, one of the protection relays must have a longer dead time setting than the other. 2-84 ERRATUM MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 2.6.1.4. Auto-recloser operation according to setting The following paragraphs describe three typical examples of auto-recloser operation. Setting: one high-speed cycle only Figure 2.6b: 1 high-speed cycle authorised Part 1 of diagram: 1. A fault occurs in the network. The protection trips ("Trip 1") and the circuit breaker opening begins. 2. When the circuit breaker is open, the tripping order is de-energised. Then the highspeed dead time is started ("THSAR"). 3. At the end of high-speed auto-reclose cycle, the reclosing order is initiated during the time Trecl. and the reclaim time is also activated during Trt. 4. End of circuit breaker reclosing. 5. End of reclaim time. No fault has occured during this time delay, the auto-reclose cycle is successful. Part 2 of diagram: 1. A fault occurs in the network. The protection trips ("Trip 1") and the circuit breaker opening begins. 2. When the circuit breaker is open, the tripping order is de-energised. Then the highspeed dead time is started "THSAR". 3. At the end of high-speed AR-cycle, the reclosing order is initiated during the time Trecl. and the reclaim time is also activated during Trt. 4. End of circuit breaker reclosing. 5. A fault occurs during the reclaim time. The setting does not include a delayed autoeclose cycle,the protection tip three pole definitively and the auto-reclose cycle is unsuccessful (terminated). 2-85 ERRATUM MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Setting: one high-speed cycle and two delayed AR-cycles Figure 2.6c:1 high-speed cycle + 2 low-speed cycles authorised 1. A high-speed auto-reclose cycle runs after an initial fault. 2. A fault is still present after the reclosing of the circuit breaker. The protection trips again (Trip 2). A first DAR cycle is activated during low speed dead time TDAR. 3. The fault is detected before expiry of the last permitted cycle's dead time. 4. A fault occurs during the reclaim time. The setting does not include a delayed autoeclose cycle,the protection tip three pole definitively and the auto-reclose cycle is unsuccessful (terminated). Setting: parallel operation of distance and backup protections Figure 2.6d: Parallel operation of main and backup relays 2-86 EPAC 3100/3500 ERRATUM MS/M 1.6882-C The auto-recloser is set as follows: - on one-phase trip: single-phase/three-phase, - on three-phase trip: three-phase, - on backup trip: three-phase/three-phase. 1. A high-speed auto-reclose cycle runs after an initial trip ordered by the backup protection. 2. A DAR cycle runs after a second trip ordered by the backup protection. 3. A three-phase fault is detected by the distance protection during the reclaim time associated with the backup protection. A high-speed AR-cycle is activated. The delayed autoreclose cycle activated by the backup protection continues, in parallel. Several hypotheses are then possible: 2.6.2. - A second fault is detected by the distance protection. It occurs before the end of the time delay associated with the main protection, and the trip is definitive. - A third fault is detected by the backup protection. It occurs before the end of the lowspeed reclaim time associated with the backup protection, and the trip is definitive. - No fault occurs. The settings of the two auto-reclosers are reinitialised. Synchro-check 2.6.2.1. Introduction The role of the synchro-check is to transmit a reclosing authorisation signal, if appropriate, after a three-phase trip. This authorisation is based on an analysis of line and busbar voltage. The synchro-check module is not used for single-phase high-speed cycles but may be used for threephase high-speed cycles. The synchro-check function verifies compatibility between the operating mode set (return, inversed return or loopback check) and certain conditions on the lines and busbars. The EPAC synchro-check function is independent of the auto-recloser. The reclosing authorisation signal can therefore be used with an auto-recloser external to the product. Synchro-check can be: - inhibited, - operational only on low-speed three-phase cycles, - operational on all three-phase cycles. 2-87 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.6.2.2. Operating modes There are four synchro-check operating modes: Return mode This mode is used if the EPAC is located on a direct outgoing line. The synchro-check’s function in return mode is to detect the absence of line voltage and the presence of any busbar voltage. If the return condition has been verified for 100 ms, reclosing authorisation is confirmed. If the return condition is not satisfied at any moment during this time delay, the delay is reinitialised. No line voltage Busbar voltage present & Time delay & Reclosing authorisation Figure 2.6e: Return mode logic Inversed return mode This mode is used if the EPAC is located on an outgoing line with line voltage return. The synchro-check’s function in inversed return mode is to detect the presence of any line voltage and the absence of busbar voltage. If the inversed return condition has been verified for 100 ms, reclosing authorisation is confirmed. If the inversed return condition is not satisfied at any moment during this time delay, the delay is reinitialised. No busbar voltage Line voltage present & Time delay & Figure 2.6f: Inversed return mode logic Reclosing authorisation 2-88 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Live bus and live line This mode is used if the busbars and the line are supplied simultaneously when the circuit breaker is open. The synchro-check’s function in loopback mode is to detect whether: - line and busbar voltages are present, - the difference between the line and busbar frequencies is below a configurable threshold, - the vectorial difference between the line and busbar voltages is below a configurable threshold, - the phase difference between the line and busbar voltages is below a configurable threshold. These conditions must have been verified for a adjustable time delay before reclosing can be authorised. If the loopback condition is no longer satisfied, the delay is reinitialised. Busbar voltage present Line voltage present DeltaF < threshold & Time delay & Reclosing authorisation Deltaϕ < threshold DeltaV < threshold Figure 2.6g: Loopback function logic All This mode combines the three preceding modes. Reclosing authorisation is activated if the return, inversed return or loopback conditions have been verified. 2.6.3. Combined auto-recloser/synchro-check operation The synchro-check module and the auto-recloser run in parallel. The synchro-check module verifies that the network characteristics are compatible with reclosing. If the conditions have been verified, the reclosing authorisation is confirmed and the circuit breaker is closed. A confirmed line or busbar fuse failure inhibits reclosing authorisation. If the "1 phase cycle auto-reclose" input is set to 1, the "reclosing authorisation by synchro-check" output is automatically validated. 2-89 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.6.4. Specific Auto Recloser Operations 2.6.4.1. Busbar Fuse Failure The input "Busbar Fuse Failure" invalidates the information of autocloser authorisation resulting from the check synchronising function. This will not permit the cycles of delayed autocloser to take place in case the check synchronising function is chosen as an option. 2.6.4.2. Fault detection after manual reclosing If a fault appears and an external "manual reclosing" digital input signal is set to 1: - the auto-recloser is inhibited, - a 500 ms time delay is initialised by the main protection relays, - a reclaim time is initialised by the auto-recloser. If a fault occurs during the first 500 ms after manual reclosing, there is an instantaneous and definitive three-phase trip. * DI "CB closed" Monostable 500ms Zone 2 fault Instantaneous Three-phase tripping AR Blocking (reclaim time) Always trip 3-phase Figure 2.6h: Manual reclosing with fault during the first 500 ms 2-90 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C If a fault occurs after the first 500 ms and before the end of the reclaim time, there is a definitive three-phase trip at the end of the time delay for the step concerned. DI "CB closed" 500ms Monostable Zone 2 fault Three-phase tripping after T2 AR Blocking (reclaim time) Always trip 3-phase Figure 2.6i: Manual reclosing with fault during reclaim time 2.6.4.3. Always trip 3-phase The contact for the "Always trip 3-phase" functionis active after the drop-off of the order to trip (internal or external) and is maintained until the end of the time delay of blocking. This contact is activated only if the cycle of autoreclosing is activated by the distance protection or by the DEF. 2.6.4.4. Cycle in Progress The contacts for Cycle in Progress are active after the dropoff of the orders to trip and are maintained until the pick-up of the trip reclose commands. 2.6.4.5. Fault Detection During a Single-Pole Cycle If a fault occurs during a high-speed single-pole cycle while the phase circuit breaker is open: - the three phases are tripped (at T1 or T2), - if the high-speed synchro-check cycle option on three-phase fault has been selected, a threepole high-speed cycle is initialised. 2-91 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.6.4.6. Auto-recloser blocked Two external digital inputs can block the autorecloser: - "auto-recloser low pressure", indicating too great a drop in circuit breaker pressure, - "reclosing impossible", inhibiting the recloser from an external protection device. Reclosing is forbidden if a block appears during the reclosing cycle. 2.6.4.7. Auto-recloser Enabled or Disabled The auto-recloser can be enabled or disabled from the user interfaces or by the digital inputs: - Auto-recloser enabled, - Auto-recloser disabled. The digital signal must be present for at least 10 ms in order to consider these conditions. The "Auto-recloser enabled" and "Auto-recloser disabled" digital outputs indicate auto-recloser status. 2.6.4.8. Voltage Failure If the busbar voltage and the line voltage are different for more than 20 seconds, the check synchronising function locks out. It will therefore be no longer possible to reclose 3-pole. 2.6.4.9. Position of the circuit breaker closed The input "CB closed" must indicate the three-pole status of the circuit breaker. When the three poles of the circuit breaker are closed, the state of this input is 1 logic. The three-pole cycle in progress will not be validated if during the reclosing order this input is still 1 logic. If the "CB closed" input is not assigned to any optos (not used), then the distance protection assumes that the circuit breaker is operating according to the command given to it. 2.6.4.10. Digital counters for Single or Three-phase autoreclosing cycles EPAC has two counters saved in the EEPROM to consider the number of single or three-phase cycles carried out by the product. These counters can be reset by the operator dialogue. 2-92 EPAC 3100/3500 2.6.4.11. MS/M 1.6882-C Tripping logic set by external signal These digital inputs are used to operate the EPAC internal auto-recloser from an external protection device. The associated reclosing cycles are: 2.6.5. A trip B trip C trip Backup trip Reclosing cycle 0 0 0 0 None 0 0 1 0 High-speed single-phase cycle 0 1 0 0 High-speed single-phase cycle 1 0 0 0 High-speed single-phase cycle 1 1 1 0 High- or low-speed three-phase distance or DEF protection cycle 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 1 Three-phase zero-sequence backup protection cycle Poles Discrepancy If the "Poles Discrepancy" input is selected and if this input has a low level status during a singlephase cycle: - the single-phase cycle is disabled, - a three-phase cycle is started. The "Poles Discrepancy" input represents a "one circuit breaker pole open" condition. If the "poles discrepancy" input is not assigned to any optos (not used), then the distance protection assumes that the circuit breaker is operating according to the command given to it (trip or close). 2.6.6. Circuit breaker Opening Fault If a tripping order lasts for more than 300 ms, the reclosing cycle is not performed. 2-93 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.6.7. Inputs/Outputs associated with the Recloser Input Name Meaning Phase A Tripping Phase A tripped by an external protection device Phase B Tripping Phase B tripped by an external protection device Phase C Tripping Phase C tripped by an external protection device Backup protection tripping Tripped by an external backup protection device Auto-recloser low pressure Circuit breaker pressure drop Manual reclosing Order for manual reclosing Reclosing impossible Recloser blocking Auto-recloser enabled Auto Recloser external "in service" command Auto-recloser disabled Auto Recloser external "out of service" command Poles discrepancy The three circuit breaker poles have different statuses 1 phase cycle auto-reclose Single-phase cycle in progress in an external recloser Output name Meaning 1 Pole reclosing cycle in progress First single-phase reclosing cycle in progress 2.6.8. 3 Pole AR cycle in progress First three-phase quick reclosing cycle in progress Always trip 3-phase Ordinary three-phase tripping command to the protection device Auto-recloser Blocking Indicates the blocking of the auto-recloser Backup auto-recloser blocking Time delay for blocking the backup protection device in progress Reclosing signal Circuit breaker reclosing command Auto-recloser on Indicates that the auto-recloser is enabled Auto-recloser off Indicates that the auto-recloser is disabled Reclaim time in progress Indicates that the reclaim time is in progress Inputs/Outputs associated with Synchro-check Input Name Meaning Busbar Fuse Failure The busbar VT fuse blown (failed) 1 Phase cycle auto-reclose Single-phase cycle in progress in an external auto-recloser Output name Meaning Auto-reclose enable by synchrocheck The procedure selected for synchro-check is valid Voltage fault by synchro-check A voltage fault was detected by the synchro-check function 2-94 EPAC 3100/3500 2.6.9. MS/M 1.6882-C Logic Functions for Auto-Recloser and Synchro-Check Operation Circuit breaker reclosing signal Circuit breaker close command One-pole reclosing cycle in progress Cycle time delay for one-pole reclosing in progress Three-pole reclosing cycle in progress Time delay for three-pole reclosing in progress Auto-recloser blocking Time delay for recloser blocking cycle in progress (after trip by dist. prot., DEF or Weak Infeed) Low-speed auto-recloser blocking Time delay for recloser blocking cycle in progress (after trip by backup protection) Three-phase trip Always trip three-phase command to auto-recloser Auto-recloser enabled * "Auto-recloser Enabled" DI Command Auto-recloser Enabled from WinEPAC 1 Auto-recloser enabled Auto-recloser Enabled from COURIER Auto-recloser Enabled from VDEW Auto-recloser disabled * "Auto-recloser Disabled" DI Command Auto-recloser Disabled from WinEPAC 1 Auto-recloser disabled Auto-recloser Disabled from COURIER Auto-recloser Disabled from VDEW logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic 2-95 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Auto-reclose enabled by synchro-check function Three-pole reclosing by synchro-check function authorised Voltage fault by synchro-check Busbar voltage present Line voltage present * Three-pole circuit breaker closed 1 & 20s Voltage fault by synchro-check logic *: External input (TS) : External input (TS) or internal logic 2-96 EPAC 3100/3500 2.7. MS/M 1.6882-C FAULT ANALYSIS The standard EPAC is used to analyse the detected faults from a general point of view. This analysis can be consulted from the various user interfaces. It provides the following indications: - the main characteristics of the electrical values measured during the fault, - the measured fault distance, resulting from the distance-resistance calculation that was used to determine the convergence of the loop with the fault. This analysis can be made more accurate by integrating the module: a fault locator, which gives an accurate indication of the fault distance, whatever the network topology. Fault reports can be printed out automatically on a printer connected to the front panel of the EPAC 3100/3500 if the latter includes a local printer option. 2.7.1. Fault Reports Once an electrical fault has been processed by one of the protection functions, the EPAC records its main characteristics in a fault report, i.e.: - feeder and substation's name, - date and time of fault, - the fault voltages, - the fault currents, - the network frequency before the fault, - phase(s) affected by the fault, - phase(s) tripped, - the type of protection device initiating the trip, - if tripped by distance protection: . the zone where the fault is located, . the distance of fault, expressed in kilometres, miles, Ohms/LV, Ohms/HV and line percentage, . the resistance of fault expressed in Ohms/LV and Ohms/HV. The reports of the last ten faults can be consulted via operator dialogue. They are also transmitted across the communication network if the communication option has been integrated into the EPAC. The fault reports are saved in memory. Courier database events are saved in EEPROM if the configuration is changed. Fault reports recorded by the protection function can be deleted via: - the WinEPAC software, - the EPAC front panel display unit, - the COURIER master station. The user password must be entered before sending a "delete fault reports" command. 2-97 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.7.2. Disturbance recording element (optional) This function, available on some models, records electrical values and is based on the same principle as the acquisition unit in the TPE 2000 disturbance recorder, designed by ALSTOM T&D P&C. It allows the fault recording data to be acquired and stored for a total duration of up to five seconds per record. Recordings include: - the 8 analogue values that are continuously acquired by the EPAC (IA, IB, IC, Ir, UA, UB, UC, Ur), - the status of 0 to 32 digital inputs/outputs. 2.7.2.1. Cyclical Storage of the Fault Recording Data Analogue and digital values are continuously stored in a buffer memory. The buffer memory duration, called "pre-time", can be configured from 0.1 to 0.5 s. The fault data measured during this pre-time is thus always available in the fault recording module. 2.7.2.2. Starting-up the Disturbance Recording The disturbance recording element is started up: - when a digital input/output changes status. The choice of status change to be taken into account (high-to-low or low-to-high transition) is adjustable, - exceeding the maximum or minimum authorised frequency range threshold, - exceeding the maximum or minimum authorised voltage or current range threshold. A digital input called "Disturbance recorder starting" is integrated into the EPAC. This input can be used for external start-up of the disturbance recording function. It can be configured in the same way as any other digital input. 2.7.2.3. Recording the Data Once the disturbance recording element has been started-up: - the analogue values and logic signals stored in the pre-time memory are transferred to the memory, - the evolution of these values and signals is then recorded during the so-called post-time, which can be configured from 0.1 to 4.5 sec. The maximum duration of a recording can thus be configured from 0.2 to 5 sec (0.5 sec before start-up and 4.5 sec following start-up). The disturbance recording element can record an average of 40 events. When the faultdedicated memory is full, restarting the fault recording function will erase the oldest event. 2-98 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 0.1 to 0.5 second 0.1 to 4.5 second Pre-fault time Post-time Figure 2.7a: Example of fault recording Reactivating the fault recording function when fault data is being recorded will reset the post-time from this second start-up. 2.7.2.4. Restituting the Data The EPAC disturbance recording element is integrated into the TPE 2000 architecture in the same way as a UA-type acquisition unit. Therefore, the EPAC can be connected to the following: - a UR 2000 or UR 2000-2 type concentrator via a current loop link, to access the data using the TPE 2000, - a PC via an RS232 serial link, to access the data locally using the WinV24 disturbance recording software, - a PC by modem link to access the data from the WinMODEM software. Only COURIER- and TPE-format disturbance recording allow event data to be accessed locally from the EPAC front panel, using WinTPE. The data is exploited by the WinANALYSE application. The WinV24, WinMODEM and WinANALYSE applications are part of the WinTPE software package. Moreover, the fault recording data can be exchanged via an IEC 870-5 VDEW protocol control system connected to the EPAC. There are differences between TPE disturbance recording and disturbance recording with VDEW and COURIER. For instance, the pre- and post-times cannot be configured when using the VDEW disturbance recording but can be with WinTPE. PAS&T's K-Graph software is not compatible with the EPAC's disturbance recording format. 2-99 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.7.2.5. Associated Inputs/Outputs Input Meaning Disturbance recorder starting 2.7.3. Disturbance recorder started by an external input Fault Locator The fault locator is used to indicate in the fault report the distance from a fault to the line ends, with an accuracy of approximately 3%. This accuracy can be particularly important to determine the network location where the repair work must be carried out when a fault occurs. The fault locator measures the distance by applying the same distance calculation principle as that used for the measurement-distance algorithm. However, the former measurement is more accurate since it is based on a greater number of samples and it uses the fault currents as models: - - - for a single-phase fault AN : ∆IA - I0 BN : ∆IB - I0 CN : ∆IC - I0 AB : ∆IA - ∆IB BC : ∆IB - ∆IC CA : ∆IC - ∆IA for a two-phase fault for a three-phase fault ABC : ∆IA - ∆IB The calculation is based on the following equation: U = xV + rI, where x = distance of fault. 2.7.3.1. Selecting the fault location data Selection of the analogue data that must be used depends on: - how the fault is processed by the algorithms, - the line model. 2.7.3.2. Processing the fault with the algorithms The calculation of the distance will utilise the rapid algorithm if: - a fault is detected by the rapid criteria, - the tripping occurred before the elapse of timer T2, - the distance to the fault is less than 105% of the line. In this case, the distance of fault indicated in the fault report will be displayed as follows: distance to the fault = 24.48 km (L) and its accuracy will be 2-3%. If these conditions are not true, the distance of fault indicated in the fault report will be the value calculated by the distance protection, which is slightly less accurate. The display will then be as follows: distance to the fault = 31.02 km and its accuracy will be 5%. 2-100 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.7.3.3. Selecting the line model The fault locator can differentiate between two types of line: - single lines, - lines with a mutual coupling on a parallel network. This parameter must be taken into account by the fault locator because, if the lines belong to a parallel network with a mutual coupling, then it is necessary to integrate the value of the residual coupling current into the distance measurement equation. The residual current is determined on the basis of the coupling residual voltage as measured by a zero-sequence compensation unit. The relationship between the coupling residual current and the coupling residual voltage is as follows: Vc = K.Ir’ where: - Vc = voltage supplied by the zero-sequence compensation unit (external BCH case), - K = Zm/Z1 = constant, - Ir’ = derivative of the residual current for the mutual coupling. External BCH case Zero-sequence Compensation Unit Vc=Ku(ΣI'r) FAULT LOCATOR EPAC I'r2 I'r1 Figure 2.7b: Mutual Coupling Acquisition 2.7.4. Local Printing of Fault Reports With some models, fault reports can be printed out automatically on a printer connected to the RS232 socket on the EPAC 3100/3500 front panel. Either two and three fault reports per page can be printed out on the local printer. The information printed out is the same as that supplied via one of the EPAC user interfaces. The exact number of reports printed on each page and the print format depend on the type of printer selected and the printer driver. 2-101 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 The local printer should be connected to the serial port of the AC board on the EPAC 3100/ 3500 front panel. Use of the local printer excludes use of the link between the EPAC 3100/3500 and WinV24, which also uses the AC board serial port. Local printing can be initiated and the printer driver selected from any of the EPAC 3100/ 3500’s setting interfaces: - the EPAC 3100/3500 front panel display unit, - the WinEPAC software, - the PA&T software via the KBUS-COURIER link. The EPAC uses the DTR signal of the printer’s serial link to access whether a local printer is present. This allows the EPAC to differentiate between a local printer link and one with a WinV24 system. The consequence of using the DTR signal is that no alarm is sent if the local printer is not operating properly (paper jam, printer buffer full, etc.). 2.8. VIEWING POLLING DATA This function is used to view the constantly changing values of measurements taken and signals sent and received by the EPAC. In polling mode, the significant values are sent to the WinEPAC software at regular intervals via a PC connected to the EPAC front panel. Polling can be inhibited 2-102 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C to obtain a snapshot of the values at any given moment. This function can only be used after the polling data viewing screen has been accessed. The function is used to view the instant value of: - the analogue values for the permanently operating electrical network, - the current direction, - the digital inputs/outputs connected to the EPAC input/output boards. The analogue values that can be viewed are: - voltage for each phase, - current for each phase, - active and reactive power, - frequency. Figure 2.8a: WinEPAC polling of the data displayed ! 2.9. The reactive power direction is not significant. USER INTERFACES The EPAC 3100/3500 standard user interface is comprised of: - monitoring indicator lights, - the WinEPAC software installed on a micro-computer, - an EPAC front panel display unit ( depending on the model), 2-103 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C - the protection Access Software & Toolkit (PAS & T) software installed on a micro-computer from the master control computer for COURIER communication, - WinTPE for the TPE disturbance recording function. The different user interfaces are presented in the following paragraphs. A full description of the WinEPAC software and the display unit can be found in Chapter 4 of the Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. 2.9.1. Monitoring Indicator Lights There are three LEDs on the EPAC 3100/3500 front panel. They indicate: - minor and major alarms, - the tripping of the associated circuit breaker, - the EPAC 3100/3500 status. Tripping indication TRIP Alarm indication ALARM Correct operation indication RELAY AVAILABLE Figure 2.9a: EPAC 3100/3500 Front Panel Lights Alarm Indication The LED "ALARM" illuminates when a minor or major failure has been detected by the autocontrol of the product. Correct Operation Indication The LED "RELAY AVAILABLE" blinks when the EPAC is functioning and no major failure has been detected. Distance Protection Status Indication The LED "TRIP" lights up when the EPAC trips. It is possible to switch off this LED from the user interfaces (front display unit, WinEPAC or PAS&T). 2-104 EPAC 3100/3500 2.9.2. MS/M 1.6882-C WinEPAC Software Installed on a Micro-Computer This software is used to: - manage the various data supplied by the EPAC, - view the status of the electrical network (voltage, current, power, frequency, power flow direction), - view fault records stored by the EPAC, - carry out a self test of the protection via a maintenance dialogue, - send commands to the EPAC (autorecloser status, configuration groups switchover, tripping 2-105 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C counters reset). 2.9.2.1. Required Environment The WinEPAC software is supplied on floppy disk and can be installed on a PC/AT type microcomputer with a Windows 3.11 environment. The micro-computer is connected directly to the EPAC 3100/3500 front panel, at the RS232 serial link connector, for local exploitation or to the communication network that is itself connected to the communication board, for remote exploitation. 2.9.2.2. Screen Description The configuration and display parameters are contained in screens that can be accessed via tabs or buttons. Each screen proposes options that make data search more accurate. Figure 2.9b represents the software main menu. Figure 2.9b: WinEPAC Software Main Menu There are two types of screen: - intermediate screens, used to select complementary options in addition to the one already selected, - parameter display or configuration screens for the selected option. Parameter Screens These screens allow the parameters to be displayed or modified. Figure 2.9c represents the parameter screen corresponding to the line parameter configuration. 2-106 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Figure 2.9c: Example of a Parameter-setting Screen Online help is available for most of the fields. The WinEPAC software is described in Chapter 4.2.1 of the Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. WinEPAC has been developed for Windows 3.11. It also runs with Windows 95, but some minor inconveniences may occur. It does not run with Windows NT. 2.9.3. Front Panel Display Unit 2-107 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2 lines of 16 characters Enter key Figure 2.9d: Front Panel Display Unit The display unit is comprised of: SET Help - a screen consisting of 2 lines with 16 characters each, - 4 arrow keys, - a Set key, - a Help key. Arrow keys Help key The dialogue that can be accessed from the display unit provides access to the same functions as those available from the WinEPAC software installed on a PC. The two main differences between the two software programmes are: - the names assigned to the functions and parameters: since the front panel display unit cannot accept more than 16 characters, a function or parameter name has less characters on the display unit than it has with the WinEPAC software, - function access and parameter modification, which are via the 4 arrow keys and the Set key. The front panel display unit software is described in the Chapter 4.2.2 of the Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. A help function is permanently available. It provides information about the applicable option, the displayed parameter, etc. To activate the Help function, press the Help key. 2.9.4. Protection Access Software & Toolkit software (communication by COURIER) This software is designed to adapt to all types of relay using the COURIER protocol. The data required for its operation are supplied to it by the relays. It is used to view the status of the relay it is connected to, via a KITZ hub in order to modify its parameters and to exchange electrical network characteristics data. 2-108 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C The Protection Access Software & Toolkit software functions are categorised according to two distinct types of task: Background tasks These tasks involve functions that are continuously updated or checked by the software. They include: - polling for data (voltage, intensity, frequency, input/output status), - relay recognition, - fault detection, - disturbance recording events. Current tasks These tasks involve functions that are deliberately activated by the operator, such as relay parameter modification. The Protection Access Software & Toolkit software is described in Chapter 4.2.3 of the Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. The K-Graph application of the PAS&T software does not read EPAC disturbance records. 2.10. MANAGEMENT OF SETTING GROUPS The EPAC memory can store four groups of configuration parameters that are numbered from 1 to 4. Each parameter group corresponds to a specific EPAC configuration. Only one group is active at a given time. 2-109 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C A new group of parameters can be activated by one of the two procedures below: - via an activation command sent from one of the user interfaces or from one of the communication interfaces, - via a command received from two external digital inputs, with the status of digital inputs corresponding to the number of the parameter group to be activated, expressed in binary code: If the status of the digital input "bit 1" is: and the status of the digital input "bit 0" is: then the activated group of parameters is: 0 0 1 0 1 2 1 0 3 1 1 4 Switching from one group of parameters over to another by a digital input is achieved by the detection of a transition in the digital inputs (transition confirmed in 2 sec.). The bit 0 switching and bit 1 switching digital outputs indicate the active configuration. Bit 1 switching Bit 0 switching Group of active parameters 0 0 1 0 1 2 1 0 3 1 1 4 The switch-over from one group of parameters to another can be identified by reading a transition in the digital outputs. The relay only considers input status if no switching configuration arrives from another interface (WinEPAC, front panel display, communication). A switching configuration command from one of these interfaces takes priority over the status of the switching inputs. 2.11. COMMUNICATION WITH EXTERNAL SYSTEMS An optional AC board can be integrated into the EPAC in order to manage communication with one or more external systems. Different systems can therefore be connected, for example: - a data exchange system for the fault data recorded by the EPAC (modem board with the 2-110 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C WinMODEM software or current loop board ), - a supervision system via VDEW or KBUS-COURIER, - a time synchronisation system. 2.11.1. Exchanging Fault Data The EPAC disturbance recording function is integrated into the architecture of the TPE 2000 fault recorder designed by ALSTOM T&D P&C. As a result, the disturbance data recorded by the EPAC can be directly exchanged with: - the WinANALYSE software installed on a micro-computer, - by modem via the WinMODEM software, - the UR 2000 restitution unit of the TPE 2000 disturbance recorder via a current loop. In this case the EPAC is considered to be a UA. The micro-computer with the WinTPE software is connected in the following way: - either directly to the serial link connector of the EPAC AC board, when the fault data is accessed locally while using the disturbative recorder TPE in EPAC, - or to the TPE 2000, when the fault data is accessed remotely. EPAC UA EPAC UA EPAC Current loop Modem STN, X25 or RS 232 RS232 for local use UR Modem STN, X25 or RS 232 WinTPE Master Control Computer Figure 2.11a: Exchange of TPE disturbance recording data If the VDEW format disturbance recorder is used, fault data cannot be exploited locally with the Win TPE software. 2-111 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2.11.2. Interface with a Control System The EPAC can be adapted to the communication protocols used by most control systems but it is specifically suited to the VDEW and KBUS COURIER protocols. The latter have been adapted from the IEC 870-5 standard to correspond to the specificities of digital protection units used in the domain of electrical networks. They allow a dialogue to be set up between the EPAC and a control station which centralises the data from several protection units and then sends commands to these protection units. The VDEW and COURIER protocol architecture is based on the EPA (Enhanced Performance Architecture) OSI model. This module divides communication services into three layers: - Layer 1 (physical), - Layer 2 (data link), - Layer 7 (application). These networks can exchange fault data recorded on the EPAC, as well as control and command signals. KBUS interface and COURIER protocol characteristics The KBUS interface and the COURIER protocol are designed by the GEC ALSTHOM T&D P&C. They serve as the link between a PC-type master control computer and protection or slave devices like the EPAC, for instance, together with the dialogue on this link. Control, monitoring and configuration operations can be performed on the EPAC from a remote control centre. Dialogue is carried out via one of the PC’s serial ports. KBUS networks are multiple cluster networks. Control centres can control up to 8 clusters of 32 (or fewer) slave relays. The total length of each cluster is limited to 1000 m. COURIER language is designed to be used on all types of PC, without any special characteristics. It uses a structure based on data clusters that have a particular format, with the clusters containing all the information necessary for their use. EPAC or other relays 1 r ste K-BUS clu 32 RS 485 64 kbits K-BUS Master Control Computer KITZ RS232 CEI870 9600 or 19200 bauds Other K-BUS clusters Figure 2.11b: KBUS cluster topology 2-112 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C The network allows the polling of information such as: - instantaneous values for digital and analogue data, - alarm appearances, - memorisation of events (trips), - changes in input/output status. It is also used, on user request: - to modify protection parameter settings, - to log variations in digital inputs/outputs, - to consult and if necessary modify the hardware and software options installed on the EPAC, - to download fault recording events, - to pass orders (changes of date, etc.). VDEW characteristics The VDEW protocol defines exchanges between the protection relays and a master control computer. Data is exchanged via a serial link. The master control computer can communicate with: - one protection device at a time and receive data in return, - the whole network, but without receiving any reply. EPAC or other relays 1 n Optical fibre link RS232 CEI870-5-2 Master Control Computer Figure 2.11c: VDEW topology 2-113 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C The master control computer can scan each protection device: - by polling at regular intervals on the priority data link parameter settings layer, - on user request, by an overall check on the application layer. The master control computer can then issue the following general orders: - Enable / disable auto-recloser, - Operate / block teleaction, - Operate / block protection device, - Request information, - Log messages, - Switch configuration. 2.11.3. Synchronisation with an External Time Signal Fault and maintenance data are dated according to a dating device that is regularly updated by an internal clock which can by synchronised by an external clock (depending on models and connected systems). The dated events are: - the disturbance data, - the data stored when an electrical fault occurs, - the data stored when the EPAC fails to operate correctly. If no external signal is provided for synchronisation, the dating device is based on a configurable time reference (unit: 1 ms). It is subject to: - the internal clock drifts, - the dating device drifts during the power-off periods, - the inaccuracy of the configuration operation. If an external signal is provided, the EPAC synchronizes its internal clock with it and thus allows integration into a global substation control system. An optional interface between the AC board and the IRIGB board can be incorporated into the EPAC. In this case, the IRIGB receiver uses signals from aerial time receivers. Synchronism is: - relative if the external signal comes from: . a data concentrator (UR 2000) of the TPE 2000 (disturbance recorder), . a VDEW protocol network, - absolute if the external signal is of the hertzian type (radio or satellite signal) with IRIG.B. If the AC communication board is used, the dater of EPAC is not "saved" in the case of power supply loss. 2-114 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CHAPTER 3 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 3-1 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CONTENT PAGE 3.1. 3.1.1. 3.1.2. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION _____________________________________________________ 3-3 Data Flow ___________________________________________________________________ 3-3 Board Functions ______________________________________________________________ 3-5 3.2. 3.2.1. 3.2.2. SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION _____________________________________________________ 3-11 Sequencing Software Tasks ___________________________________________________ 3-11 EPAC Self-Tests ______________________________________________________________ 3-11 3-2 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 3-3 MS/M 1.6882-B 3.1. EPAC 3100/3500 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION The EPAC is built around a basic module assembly. Add-on boards for different functions are available according to the model concerned This base is comprised of an insulated and stabilised power supply and the following items: - a QTF input transformer board, - a CPU-TMS processing board, - an IO-1 or IO-3 tripping and inputs/outputs board. Optionally, the following boards may be added without requiring wiring changes: an AFF management board for the front display unit, - an AC management board for the front panel display unit, the disturbance recorder TPE and miscellaneous communication modes, - an IO-2 tripping and outputs board or a second IO-1 or IO-3 tripping and inputs/outputs board. Data Flow WinEPAC MMI MMI RS232 Front panel LCD display unit U I Filters Filters Multiplexer 3.1.1. - H/S and ADC RS232 Local communication Inputs Communication logic protection algorithmic filters External link EPAC ARCHITECTURE WinTPE Disturbance recording software Figure 3.1a: Data Flow - Current loop - IEC 870-5 VDEW standard Output 3-4 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B The EPAC acquires analogue values from the measurement dividers. The QTF transformer board has the following functions: 1. To adapt these values for use and to isolate them with respect to the disturbances. 2. To filter the signals in order to eliminate high frequencies that cannot be sampled correctly. Anti-return filters are used for this task. These values are then transmitted to the CPU-TMS board which has the following functions: 1. To multiplex and then to sample the filtered analogue values. 2. To make sure that a 12-bit, analogue-to-digital converter converts the information at the rate of 24-samples per period. The number of operations that are carried out in analogue format should be reduced to a minimum because the accuracy of these operations is linked to the accuracy of the components. 3. To filter the digitised samples so that any components likely to have an adverse affect on accuracy are eliminated. 4. To formulate, using algorithms, the values required by the EPAC for decision-making. EPAC’s logic functions use these values as well as logic messages from the IO board to formulate orders and signals. Tripping orders and signals transmitted by the CPU-TMS board are sent to the IO board(s) equipped with contacts. With the operator dialogue, the operator can configure the way the logic inputs and outputs of the different modules are assigned to the board contacts. 3-5 MS/M 1.6882-B 3.1.2. EPAC 3100/3500 Board Functions Voltages Currents EPAC Analog channel acquisition QTF Board UC TMS Board Filtering and pre-processing the analog signals Light indicators management IO-1 or IO-3 Board Interface with the I/O boards Protection and fault analysis functions IO-1 or IO-3 or IO-2 Board Communication interface User interface management AC Board RS232 VDEW KBUS Current loop Modem IRIGB Board TRIP ALARM RELAY AVAILABLE SET TERMINAL 1 Help TERMINAL 2 Front panel display unit Front panel lights Control system via VDEW UR2000 disturbance restitution unit Control via KBUS-COURIER WinEPAC MMI Local WINV24 or printer Time synchronisation WinMODEM disturbance record uploading : Local RS232 WinTPE: WinV24 WinMODEM : Modem connected to EPAC WinANALYSE: Analysis of disturbance recorder Figure 3.1b: Architecture of the EPAC 3-6 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B 3.1.2.1. QTF Transformer Board This board is in double "Europe" standard format and is used to bring the analogue values provided by the transformers down to a value that is compatible with the EPAC electronics. It includes: - 3 phase current transformers with two primary windings, one for the 5A rating, the other for the 1A rating (T1, T2, T3), - for networks with a directly earthed neutral: 1 residual current transformer with two primary windings, one for the 5A rating, the other for the 1A rating (T4); a dedicated CT core for the Directional Earth Fault (isolated or impedant network), - 3 phase voltage transformers (T5, T6, T7), - 1 busbar voltage transformer (T8), - 1 image voltage transformer for the zero sequence current compensation of the parallel line (T9), - 1 overvoltage protection device, - 1 analogue anti-overlap filter per input. 3.1.2.2. CPU-TMS Processing Board This board is in double "Europe" standard format and it performs the main equipment functions, i.e.: - analogue-to-digital conversion of the signals from the QTF board, - protection management depending on the signal status, - communication with the link and peripheral boards. Analogue to Digital Conversion (ADC) The current inputs are scanned twice so that the two ranges (gains), x1 and x16, are obtained in order to increase the dynamic range. Both ranges are created by a programmable amplifier that switches alternatively between the x1 and x16 product. The analogue-to-digital converter is energised by a DC-DC converter in order to eliminate power supply noise. The channels are sampled at a rate of 24 samples per period, then they are converted by a 12bit ADC. The following information is obtained: - currents coded on 15 bits + sign, - voltages coded on 11 bits + sign. The board also comprises three reference voltages used to check the system gains. Processing The board has a 320-C25 TMS signal processor used for processing operations. The processor can operate with a 50 MHz clock. It controls the sampling frequency, making it 24 times the network fundamental frequency. To do this, it measures this frequency with a zero transition method. 3-7 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 The TMS formats the signals by filtering them and then calculates the protection values. The TMS acquires logic input values and combines them with the results of the protection calculations for decision-making operations. These decisions are materialised by the control of the tripping relays and signalling contacts. The TMS also manages the front panel LEDs and the serial link on the CPU-TMS board. The CPU-TMS board also has different memories: - RAM working memory, PROM program storage, back-up memory for the EEPROM characteristic values and parameters. It also has the following: - a watchdog, a serial communication interface, counters. Interfaces The board is equipped with lights that indicate the operating status. The board also has an RS232 serial link on its front panel, that can be accessed via the front panel. It is used to dialogue with a PC. The CPU-TMS board is connected to the following: - the QTF analogue value acquisition board, the IO-1 board. It can be connected to the following boards: - the AFF management board of the front panel display unit (optional), the AC management board of the front panel display unit of the disturbance recorder TPE and various communication modes (optional), an additional IO-1 board, an IO-2 board or an IO-3 board (optional). 3.1.2.3. IO-1 and IO-3 Boards This boards are in double European standard format and have TS logic inputs, TC signalling contacts and DEC (trip) command relays. The logic inputs and the signalling contacts may be configured on commissioning, providing the user with the choice of the appropriate wiring diagram. The design of the IO boards is such that the tripping orders and signals can be self-checked. 3-8 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Logic Inputs (TS) The IO boards have eight logic inputs that are isolated and filtered by optocouplers. These inputs are designed to withstand the substation’s environmental conditions. Signalling Contacts (TC) The input/output boards are equipped with sixteen signalling contacts (13 for IO-3). Access to these contacts in reading and writing mode is via a resistive filter and a buffer that are used to display the status of the relay for the self-test. Contact Fault Equipment (TC) The IO-1 or IO-3 board has a contact fault equipment (closed in rest). This contact enacted by the software or the drop-off of the watchdog indicates whether the equipment is faulty or not. Tripping and Closing Commands These boards have three tripping (6 tripping contacts for IO-3) and one closing contacts. These contacts are designed to be directly connected to the circuit-breaker coils. They are accessed in reading and writing mode via a resistive filter and a buffer that are used to display the status of the relay for the self-test. Signals Associated with the Functions of the EPAC The logic inputs/outputs associated to the EPAC functions can be allocated to the physical contacts of the input/output boards by operator dialogue. This means that the signals and contacts to be used can be selected and logic combinations can easily be made with the signals. For example, if several output signals are allocated to one contact, the contact status is a logic "OR" between these signals (see Appendix). 3.1.2.4. Front Panel Display Unit The front panel has a backlit display unit of 2 lines having 16 characters. There are also six scrolling keys and an interface board. The four arrow keys are used to scroll through the menus and to access all the programming functions of the EPAC. The front panel dialogue is used to: - set the protection parameters, - to view the status of digital inputs and outputs and the value of analogue inputs, - examine the last fault record, - analyse the protection failures, - acknowledge the alarm(s) and then re-start the protection function. If the self-test detects a fault, the EPAC changes over to maintenance dialogue mode, and the results of the self-test are displayed on the front panel. If the MES menu is not active, the display goes off when it is not used for a few minutes. To turn it back on, click on one of its buttons. 3-9 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 3.1.2.5. Optional additional board The following boards are complements to the main IO-1 or IO-3 boards. They are used as interfaces with the digital outputs and provides additional tripping, closing and equipment fault contacts. There are 3 different possible boards for the additional board location: IO-1 (additional) It is composed by: - 3 tripping relays, - 1 CB closed, - 16 signalling contacts, - 8 opto inputs, - 1 equipment fault contact (contact closed in rest). IO-3 (additional) It is composed by: - 6 tripping relays, - 1 CB closed, - 13 signalling contacts, (n° 14, 15, 16 can not be assigned ) - 8 opto inputs, - 1 equipment fault contact (contact closed in rest). IO-2 It is composed by: - 3 tripping relays, - 1 CB closed, - 16 signalling contacts, - 1 equipment fault contact (contact closed in rest). 3.1.2.6. AC Board This board has the following standard functions: - management of the front panel display unit, - management of a serial link for local restitution of fault recording data on the WinTPE software or for automatic printout of fault reports. Two "daughter boards" can be connected to the AC board. These boards can be chosen from among the following four boards: - loop current interface board, - modem interface board, - 870-5 VDEW interface board, - KBUS interface board. ! The KBUS and VDEW boards are mutually exclusive, as are the Current Loop and Modem boards. 3-10 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B 3.1.2.7. AC board "daughter-boards" (optional) MODEM board This board is used to exchange fault recording data between the EPAC and a micro-computer equipped with the WinMODEM software. MODEM board characteristics are: - 8 bits, - no parity, - one stop bit, - baud rate: 300 to 19200, configurable from one of the user interfaces. Current loop board This board is an interface between a UR-type restitution unit and the EPAC, which is then regarded as a UA-type acquisition unit. It is used to restitute the fault recording events in TPE 2000 format. VDEW board This board enables the EPAC to communicate with a centralised master control computer, via the VDEW protocol. KBUS board This board is an interface between the UART1 channel of the AC board and the KBUS network. 3.1.2.8. IRIGB board IRIGB board time is transmitted to the AC board every 30 seconds. The difference between IRIGB board time and AC board time is calculated as an absolute value: - differences of over 1 second are corrected instantly, - differences of between 5 ms and 1 secs are corrected gradually. The internal time of the AC board is advanced or retarded every 10 ms, with the correction being completed before the next query to the IRIGB board. 3-11 MS/M 1.6882-B 3.2. SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION 3.2.1. Sequencing Software Tasks EPAC 3100/3500 The CPU-TMS board software of the EPAC, i.e., the protection functions, is sequencer-based. This sequencer summons the tasks according to their order of priority. It is activated by conversion end-interrupts at each sampling step, i.e. 24 times per period. If a non-priority task has not been completed while a priority task is activated, the non-priority tasks resumes processing at the point where it was interrupted when the sequencer returns control to it. This structure allows non-priority functions to be performed when the processor is not busy with the priority tasks. For example, fault-finding is a priority task whereas maintenance dialogue management is a non-priority task. 3.2.2. EPAC Self-Tests The EPAC self-testing function has the following objectives: - to prevent the protection equipment from performing any inadvertent operations, - to detect faults before the faulty functions are requested, and thus to repair the fault before the equipment malfunctions, - to facilitate repairs. The equipment designers have taken care not to reduce the reliability of the EPAC by limiting the number of additional components. If the complete self-test function is chosen on power-on condition, the following two types of check are possible: - a continuous self-test that avoids any inadvertent operation, - a self-test, processed by low-priority tasks, i.e., with a periodicity of a few seconds and with the main aim of checking that the functions are available. If a fault is detected: - if the fault is not redhibitory, the protection function continues operating and a "non-urgent alarm" signal is issued, - if the fault is redhibitory, the protection function stops. The protection then, executes a complete autocontrol of initialisation. If the fault is confirmed, the alarm signal is positioned and the functions of EPAC are no more assured. If the autocontrol of initialisation does not confirm the anomaly, EPAC restarts normally. Two redhibitory (major) faults in less than 24 hours provoke the stopping of the product and the alarms are positioned. In the case of stopping of EPAC, the alarms "Major fault" and "Equipment fault" are emitted. 3-12 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B 3.2.2.1. Continuous Self-Test This self-test has the same priority as the protection tasks. It includes: - a self-test by hardware interrupts: . PFIN (loss of auxiliary supply), . watchdog, . calculation time exceeded, - a plausibility check of the current channels. It compares the sum of the phase voltages and currents to the value of the channel of acquisition of the residual current, - an acquisition sequencing check. It checks that the analogue channel acquisitions are correctly sequenced by analysing their addresses, - a verification of the messages exchanged between the boards containing processors, by using check sums, - verification of the FIFO for access to the analogue-to-digital conversion values, - verification of the messages exchanged by the RS232 link of the CPU-TMS board, - verification of the tripping and signalling commands by re-reading the order and checking the continuity of the command circuit. This check should be carried out before giving an order to a relay or contact. 3.2.2.2. Self-Test as a Background Task This self-test is a continuous self-test that uses calculation power reserves not used for priority tasks. The duration of the complete self-test cycle is too short to affect the reliability or the performance of the EPAC. The main actions are the following: - bus self-test by: . checking the "address" bus by accessing the specific addresses and memories, . checking the "data" bus by writing on the memory zones, . checking the "command" bus at the different elements, - watchdog self-test by checking that it sends an interrupt after its time-delay, - memory self-test: . calculating the "CHECK-SUMS" of the memories and comparing them with those in the memory, . checking the memory in all of the addressing zone by writing then reading the values 5555H and AAAAH before re-writing the initial value, . checking the EEPROM stored memories by calculating the CHECK-SUMS and comparing them with those stored, - checking the drift of the analogue amplifiers, - verifying the gain of the analogue-to-digital conversion by checking the results of the reference voltage conversions, 3-13 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 - checking the power supply specific to the analogue-to-digital conversion function, - checking the counters by comparing them, - checking the interrupt management. The self-test never requires the functions of the EPAC to be shut-down, nor does it have an adverse effect on them. 3-14 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CHAPTER 4 TOOLS FOR COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 4-1 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CONTENTS PAGE 4.1. HARDWARE TOOLS ___________________________________________________________ 4-4 4.2. 4.2.1. 4.2.2. 4.2.3. SOFTWARE TOOLS ___________________________________________________________ 4-5 WinEPAC Software ___________________________________________________________ 4-5 The EPAC Software on the Display _____________________________________________ 4-17 Accessing the EPAC from the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software (PAS & T) __ 4-23 4-2 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 4-3 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 This chapter describes the hardware and software tools required to carry out commissioning and maintenance operations on the EPAC 3100/3500. The first part lists the tools necessary to carry out the commissioning and maintenance operations on the EPAC 3100/3500. These tools must be used to test the equipment correctly. The second part describes the software designed by GEC ALSTHOM P&C to help you configure the EPAC, analyze the electrical faults on the network and the EPAC internal faults (hardware and software self-monitoring functions). These functions can be accessed from: - the WinEPAC software on a micro-computer in local operation, - the front panel display unit, - the Protection Access Software and Toolkit (PAS & T) software on a micro-computer via a KBUS network if this type of communication is installed on the EPAC. 4-4 EPAC 3100/3500 4.1. MS/M 1.6882-B HARDWARE TOOLS To carry out the commissioning and maintenance operations on the EPAC 3100/3500, the following tools and equipment must be available: - a screwdriver set, - a pipe wrench set, - a multimeter, - an injection box: . GEC ALSTHOM model DLF 210, . OMICRON model CMC 56 or 156, . ABB model XS92 A, - a PC-type micro-computer operating under MS WINDOWS 3.11 or 95, - a printer connected to the parallel port of the PC. If a test equipment generating transient current values of over 0.2 In is used when a fault condition is generated, an error can occur in the directional calculation with the highspeed algorithms. This is because the test boxes sometimes do not reflect the real fault appearance conditions during the fault condition. To prevent this from interfering with verification of the start-up zones, you are advised to inhibit the high-speed algorithms by setting T1 to 50 ms when setting zones (high-speed algorithms cannot be used at over 40 ms). The situation arises with digital injection boxes. For further details, see the documentation for these injection boxes. 4-5 MS/M 1.6882-B 4.2. EPAC 3100/3500 SOFTWARE TOOLS This sub-division describes the basic principles for using the interactive software designed by GEC ALSTHOM P&C to manage the functions of the EPAC. 4.2.1. WinEPAC Software The EPAC is supplied with two disks containing the WinEPAC software used to manage the EPAC functions from a PC-type micro-computer. These functions are organized in five dialogues: - the "Settings" dialogue lets you configure the protection functions as well as the automatic control functions integrated into the EPAC, - the "Maintenance" dialogue lets you display the current and past status of the EPAC, thus making maintenance operations easier, - the "Orders" dialogue lets you manage: . the EPAC date and time, . the EPAC password, . the status of the auto-recloser and the associated counters, . configuration switch-over (4 setting groups), - the "Measurements" dialogue lets you display: . the analogue values measured on the three phases, . the input/output values for the IO-1 or IO-3 board and for a second additional board, if appropriate, - the "Events" dialogue lets you display reports on faults that have occurred on the line. A software configuration dialogue lets you adjust the WinEPAC software settings. Figure 4.2a shows the tree breakdown of the main EPAC management and setting options available with the WinEPAC software. The first level of the tree breakdown shows the main menu options. 4-6 EPAC 3100/3500 Level 1 MS/M 1.6882-B Level 2 Create Settings Modify Orders System Data Identification Communication Options Preferences Hardware Hardware options Main Main functions Options Optional functions Disturbance Disturbance record settings Outputs Output settings Inputs Input settings Acknowledge Acknowledge alarms Records View fault records Reset self-tests Delete maintenance records Date Set date and hour Password Setting Change password Auto-Recloser View auto-recloser status Counters Reset counters Change Switch configurations View instantaneous network values Measurements Events Description Download Upload Maintenance Level 3 Reset LEDs Extinguish LEDs Delete Records Delete disturbance records Read disturbance records From relay Figure 4.2a: Tree Breakdown of the WinEPAC Functions 4-7 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 4.2.1.1. Installing the Software on a Hard Disk Before the WinEPAC software can be run, it must be installed on the hard disk of your microcomputer. To install the WinEPAC software on the PC’s hard disk: 1. Start Windows. 2. Insert Disk 1 of WinEPAC in drive A:>. 3. Select Run in the File menu (of Windows 3.11) or the Start menu (of Windows 95). 4. Type A:SETUP.EXE in the "Command line" field. 5. Click on OK. Installation begins. 6. Follow the instructions appearing on the screen. 7. A "WinEPAC" program group is created once installation has been completed. It contains the EPAC icon used to start the WinEPAC application. Figure 4.2b: Icon created on the installation of WinEPAC 4-8 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B 4.2.1.2. Starting the software To start the software 1. Click on the icon to start the software. The software is loaded into memory. After a few moments, the first screen is displayed. Figure 4.2c: WinEPAC First Screen To quit WinEPAC and return to Windows 1. Press <Esc> until the EPAC software is deactivated, or select Quit in the File menu, or press Alt + F4. 4-9 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 4.2.1.3. Using the Keyboard Alphanumeric Keys These keys are used to enter or change settings in entry fields. All keys of the numeric keypad as well as upper and lower case characters can be used. The software reduces the possibility of error by inhibiting the entry of: - a wrong character (e.g. a letter instead of a number), - a numerical value outside the permitted limits. Control Keys These keys are used to move the cursor from one entry field to another or to change the value of an entry field. Control key Function ← Moves the cursor to the left in a data entry field. → Moves the cursor to the right in a data entry field. TAB Moves highlighting to the next field or button. Shift+TAB Moves highlighting to the previous field or button. <Suppr> Deletes the character to the right of the cursor when entering data. <Insert> Activates/deactivates the insertion mode when entering data. <Del> Deletes the character below the cursor when entering data. <Backspace> Deletes the character to the left of the cursor when entering data. <Return> Validates data, a menu option or deactivates an error message. <Esc> Goes back to the previous screen. The contents of an entry field are highlighted when the field is active. The value can then be changed. 4-10 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B 4.2.1.4. Using the Mouse The following table explains the basic terms associated with the use of the mouse. Action Meaning Point Place the pointer on an element. Click Point to an element, then press and release the left mouse button. Double click Point to an element, then press the left mouse button twice quickly and release it. The mouse pointer changes its form according to the item it is positioned on. The following table indicates the two forms of pointer used by the WinEPAC software. If the pointer is in the form of a capital I Location Possible actions The pointer is in an entry field Enter text or reposition the insertion point. If the pointer is in the form of an arrow Location Possible actions The pointer is in a selection field or non-entry area Choose options, validate messages. Entering text 1. Position the mouse pointer over the entry field required. 2. Click on the left mouse button. The field is highlighted. 3. Enter the text. Selecting an option 1. Position the mouse pointer over the appropriate button or tab. 2. Click on the left mouse button. The selected option is activated. 4-11 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 4.2.1.5. Description of a Typical Screen Each WinEPAC screen consists of several different elements: Figure 4.2d: Typical Screen Title Bar This bar consists of the Minimise, Maximise and Restore icons and the title of the current screen. The Minimise icon lets you reduce the active window to an icon, the Maximise icon enlarges the window to its maximum size, and the Restore icon returns it to its original size. Menu Bar This bar consists of one or more menus. Each menu lets you access the commands required to activate particular functions such as exiting from a screen or saving a configuration. Tool Bar This bar consists of icons assigned to predefined functions. Click on the icon to activate its associated function. 4-12 EPAC 3100/3500 Icon MS/M 1.6882-B Associated function Displays a help window. Tests consistency (also available by pressing F2). Goes back to the previous screen. Opens a file from a disk drive. Saves a file to a disk. Prints out data. Working Area This is the interactive area of the screen. It can include: - one or more tabs related to the function selected, - fields that may be: . changeable settings (e.g. setting to select nominal frequency), . fixed data (e.g. analogue value measured by the EPAC ). Depending on the settings and software options selected, some data cannot be accessed. These data appear greyed on the screen. All other settings can be accessed using the mouse and the keyboard’s control keys. Button Area Each button in this bar is associated with a function. Click on the button to access the function. Message Line This contains a message about the highlighted field. For adjustable settings, the message indicates the maximum and minimum values, step and unit to be entered. 4.2.1.6. Using the Software This paragraph contains the basic instructions for using the WinEPAC software. It describes how to use the most common commands: - moving from one screen to another, - changing settings, - checking consistency, - obtaining contextual help, - configuring the software. 4-13 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 Moving from one screen to another Each software screen has a button associated with it. To move from one screen to another, click on the appropriate button for the screen you wish to reach. To return to the previous screen, press <ESC> or select the icon on the right of the tool bar. Main Screen WinEPAC Software Configuration EPAC Main Management Screen Settings Orders Main Setting Screen Events Main Event Screen Main Order Screen Maintenance Main Maintenance Screen Measurements Main Measurement Screen Figure 4.2e: Organisation of the Main Screens 4-14 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Changing a setting The software has different types of field for entering and changing the settings. The way of changing a setting varies according to the type of field concerned. Simple Entry Field Settings are entered via the keyboard. To change a setting in a simple entry field: 1. Select the entry field. The field is highlighted. 2. Enter the setting. 3. Press <Enter> to validate the new setting. Entry or Selection Field Settings can be entered as described above. They can also be changed using the mouse. To change a setting in an entry or selection field using the mouse: 1. Click on the arrows next to the entry field. The setting is then incremented or decremented by a predefined step. The size of the step is usually indicated in the message line. 2. Press <Enter> to validate the new setting. Simple Selection Field Settings cannot be entered directly. They have to be selected from a list of permitted settings. To change a setting in a simple selection field: 1. Click on the arrow to the right of the selection field. The permitted settings appear below the selection field. 2. Click on the new setting, which is validated automatically. Check Box A check box is used to validate or inhibit the associated function. The function is validated if the box is checked. If not, it is inhibited. 4-15 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 To change the status of a function: 1. Click on the box. The status of the function is reversed. Radio buttons Radio buttons are used to validate one of the several available functions. To select a function: 1. Click on the button corresponding to the function you wish to validate. The function previously selected is invalidated and the function you have checked is validated. Checking coherency Each time you change a setting, you should carry out a coherency check to ensure that the change is compatible with the other settings. The coherency function can be accessed from all parameter setting screens. To check coherency: icon or press F2. 1. Click on the tool bar 2. The coherency window appears, indicating any corrections that need to be made to settings. 3. Press <ESC> to close the coherency window. Displaying a help screen A help screen is available from most entry screen fields. The online help provided gives details about the function of the current setting. 1. Select the entry field for the setting. The field is highlighted. 2. Click on the icon. The help window is displayed in the working area. The message line indicates the name of the field the help item refers to. 3. Press <Esc> to exit from the help screen. 4-16 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Configuring the WinEPAC software 1. Access the WinEPAC first screen. 2. Click on the icon or select the Preferences option in the Options menu. The software preferences screen is displayed. 3. Click on the Language button. The list of available working languages is displayed. 4. Select the language you wish to use. 5. Click on the Serial Port button. The port selection screen is displayed. 6 Select serial port COM1 or COM2 used to connect the PC to the EPAC. 7. Once the software configuration settings are correct, press <ESC> to exit from the screen. The software’s first screen is redisplayed. The WinEPAC display language is independent of the working language adopted for the protection unit. The latter uses the "EPAC language" configuration setting defined in Configuration\ System Data\Preferences. 4-17 MS/M 1.6882-B 4.2.2. EPAC 3100/3500 The EPAC Software on the Display If the EPAC 3100/3500 is fitted with a display, most configuration and monitoring functions available from the PC can be accessed from the front panel of the EPAC 3100/3500. However, the name of the functions, the way the software is used and the user interfaces are different. Figure 4.2f shows the tree breakdown of the main functions available from the display. Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 PARA PROT LIGN SURV TELE PIQU WEAK POMP FFUS DIVE DEFD DEFI ARC SYNC PET RELU RELI COMM IMP Line setting parameters Zone setting parameters Teleprotection parameters Tee line parameters Weak infeed parameters Power swing parameters Fuse failure parameters Miscellaneous parameters DEF parameters Back-up protection parameters Auto-recloser parameters Synchro-check parameters ICN parameters Max U and Min U parameters Max I parameters Communication parameters Local printer parameters I-O OUT1 OUT2 INP1 INP2 Board Board Board Board Resetting LEDs LEDS CONF VALI DFIN LIST EFF 1 2 1 2 outputs outputs inputs inputs Transmission of the current configuration NUM POST DEP OPTC OPT1 IRIG LIC1 LIC2 LANG DIST DECL Configuration number Substation name Feeder name AC board present Additional I/O board present IRIB-B board present First licence number Second licence number Language used Distance unit Distance of fault unit Change of the configuration number ACTI EVEN Description EV1 to EV10 Fault reports 1 to 10 Deleting records 4-18 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 ETAT CMD MAIN DATE ARC Change Auto-recloser CPTS Reset the counters DATE HEUR Setting of the date DF1 to DF10 Failure structures 1 to 10 ACQU LIST PASS Deleting maintenance records SAIS Current password MODI New password Selection of the configuration to modify LLIS EFF LANG Setting of the hour Acknowledge alarms EFF CHXCONF PERT Description Instantaneous network characteristics Auto-recloser status MES ARC Level 4 PER1 to PE10 Disturbance records 1 to 10 Delete disturbance records Display unit temporary language Figure 4.2f: Tree Breakdown of the Functions on the Display 4-19 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 4.2.2.1. Display Overview 2 lines of 16 characters Set key SET Help Arrow keys Help key Figure 4.2g: Display Front Panel Alphanumeric Display The display consists of 2 lines of 16 characters. The first line contains information about the current environment, e.g. the name of the functions selected to access the current screen. The second line displays the name of options or parameters that can be selected. When entering data, the character being changed is underlined. When not entering data, the parameter or the option that can be directly selected flashes. The following characters can be displayed: - upper or lower case, alphabetical characters without accents, - numeric characters, - control characters. Control character Meaning —> other options are available to the right. <— other options are available to the left. / divider between options used to access the current display. 4-20 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Keyboard Keys 6 keys can be found below the display. They are used to carry out all the available selection and configuration operations. Key Function When entering data: moves the cursor onto the next character; when not entering data: activates the next option or parameter on the second line of the display. When entering data: moves the cursor back to the previous character; when not entering data: activates the previous option or parameter on the second line of the display. When entering data: selects the previous character or number; when not entering data: moves backwards. When entering data: displays the next character or number; when not entering data: selects the option or parameter that flashes on the second line. SET Help When only the main screen is displayed: activates the user dialogue; when the user dialogue is already active: confirms a changed parameter. Displays a help line that gives details about the menu option or parameter that is flashing on the second line. 4.2.2.2. Using the Software This paragraph contains the basic instructions for using the EPAC software program from the display. This software program can run in two modes: EPAC 3100/3500 status display mode The result of the most recent self-test or tripping operation carried out by the EPAC is displayed by default. A few minutes after the latest screen has been displayed, the display switches off automatically. During the state when the EPAC is supplied with power or after quitting the user dialogue mode, the software version of the product is displayed together with the self-test result. User dialogue mode This mode lets you use the display to configure and monitor the functions carried out by the EPAC. It is similar to the dialogue available from the EPAC software on PC. 4-21 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 Activating the user dialogue 1. key. The first three menu options available are displayed on the second line Press the before the —> character which indicates that other options are available to the right. The first option flashes. SET EPAC 3000 LEDS CONF EVEN > SET Help Figure 4.2h: Main menu on the display Selecting a menu option 1. Move the flashing area onto the option to be selected using the arrow keys. 2. Press the key. The first option or the first available parameter from the selected option flashes. Selecting a parameter 1. Move the flashing area onto the parameter to be changed using the arrow keys. 2. Press the key. The parameter name, its setting and type of unit are displayed on the second line. Changing a parameter setting 1. Select the parameter to be changed. 2. Press the 3. Choose the correct character using the 4. Press the 5. Proceed as indicated in steps 2, 3 and 4 for all the characters to be changed. 6. Press the SET key. The first character that can be changed is underlined. and keys. key. The next character is now underlined. SET key to confirm the new parameter setting. 4-22 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Validating a configuration 1. key several times to return to level 1. The CONF EVEN MES options should Press the be displayed in the second line. 2. Select the CONF option, then press the 3. Select the PARA option, then press the 4. Select VALI. 5. Validate the configuration number by pressing the 6. Enter the password if requested. key. key. SET key. The default password is USER. Displaying a help line 1. Press the key. A help line is displayed on the second line. This help gives details about the parameter being changed. 2. Press the Help Help key again to exit the help function. Selecting the dialogue language 1. Choose the LANG option. The available dialogue languages are displayed on the second line. 2. Choose the required dialogue language. 3 Enter the password in option PASS. The PARA/LANG option corresponds to the EPAC’s working language. It is only taken into account when the active configuration is uploaded. The display unit viewing language can be taken into account immediately, however, by entering the EPAC/Langage setting. This setting is taken into account until reception of the next status report from the protection unit. 4-23 MS/M 1.6882-B 4.2.3. EPAC 3100/3500 Accessing the EPAC from the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software (PAS & T) The Protection Access Software & Toolkit software has been designed by GEC ALSTHOM T&D P&C to manage K relay parameters. The EPAC can include an optional COURIER communication management function that can be accessed with this software. The commands available from this external program are described in separate documentation entitled "User Manual-Protection Access Software & Toolkit". The following figure shows the software’s main window. ALSTOM Access T&D Protection Control Records & Control Units Protection Options Access Software & Toolkit Quit V2.00 Help About Program ALSTOM Protection <C> Copyright T&D Protection Access Software Version 2.00 03/02/94 GEC ALSTHOM & Control & Toolkit T&D Protection & Control OK Num. Units = 5[ 5] √ TAEOD DR ES EP PP ONLINE 1 BACKGROUND Figure 4.2i: Main Window of "Protection Access Software & Toolkit" Selecting the EPAC to be set If the EPAC has no address The EPAC’s address can either be selected automatically by COURIER or be selected by the user. In automatic addressing mode, COURIER assigns the EPAC the first address available. a) Automatic addressing by COURIER a1. Select the "Turn Auto Addr On" command in the Units menu. The command changes to "Turn Auto Addr Off", indicating that it is active. a2. Select the "New Address" command in the same menu. The "Enter Serial No." dialogue box appears. a3. Enter the EPAC serial number, then press <Enter>. The "Enter Old Relay Address" dialogue box appears. a4. Press <Enter> to validate the "255" address that appears by default (standard configuration). The "Enter New Relay Address" dialogue box appears. a5. Validate the "0" default address that appears. COURIER assigns the EPAC an available address. a6. Press <Enter> to validate the new EPAC address. 4-24 EPAC 3100/3500 b) MS/M 1.6882-B Manual addressing by the user b1. Select the "New Address" command in the Units menu. The "Enter Serial No." dialogue box appears. b2. Enter the EPAC serial number, then press <Enter>. The "Enter Old Relay Address" dialogue box appears. b3. Press <Enter> to validate the "255" default address that appears (standard configuration). The "Enter New Relay Address" dialogue box appears. b4. Enter the required address. COURIER assigns the EPAC an available address. b5. Press <Enter> to validate the new EPAC address. If the protection unit already exists and has an address 1. Select the Access menu. The list of available relays is displayed. 2. Highlight the EPAC you wish to reach, then press <Enter>. Once the link with the protection unit is established, the list of available setting groups is displayed. Each item in the list gives access to a list of settings that can be viewed and changed. Changing a setting 1. Select the relay whose setting you wish to change (cf. last procedure). 2. To retrieve the EPAC configuration, select the option SET Active Setg: Retrieve=[0] from the SETTING COMMANDS column. 3. Activate the "Reset Cell Locn" command. 4. Select the setting to be changed using the ↑ and ↓ keys, then press <Enter>. A command menu appears: CELL MENU Change setting S Add Poll Item A Delete Poll Item D Reset Cell Locn R View Strings V Cancel ESC Figure 4.2j: Command Menu 4-25 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 Function Description Change setting Changes a setting. Add Poll Item Adds the setting to the list of settings whose instantaneous values you want displayed. Delete Poll Item Deletes the setting from the list of settings whose instantaneous values you want displayed. Reset Cell Location Validates the selected command if it ends in [0]. View strings Displays correspondences between settings and functions. Cancel Exits. 5. Select the Change Setting option. 6. Change the setting. 7. Validate with Ctrl-F10. 8. To upload the configuration: 8a. Select the SYS Password option in the SYSTEM DATA column, then enter the EPAC password. 8b. Select the SET Current Setg: Save=[0] option in the SETTING COMMANDS column. 8c. Validate the Reset Cell Location command. The following table describes the main features of the software menus. For further details on software use, see the documentation "User Manual - Protection Access Software & Toolkit". Menu Description Access Displays the list of protection relays recognised by the software and establishes a link with one of them. Polling To view dynamic changes in certain settings. Control To switch over the relay configuration. Records To save the relay’s settings and fault disturbance data. Units To manage the list of addresses of relays that can be set from the software. Options To change and save the following options to disk: Quit - parameters for communicating with relays, - display parameters, - activation of the background task used to download fault disturbance data, - change to debugging mode in case of problems, to view all messages concerned with communications. To exit from the software. 4-26 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CHAPTER 5 COMMISSIONING EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 5-1 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CONTENTS PAGE 5.1. 5.1.1. 5.1.2. 5.1.3. PRELIMINARY CHECKS ________________________________________________________ Mechanical Checks ___________________________________________________________ Checking the Nominal Values __________________________________________________ Checking Connections _________________________________________________________ 5.2. ENERGIZATION _____________________________________________________________ 5-10 5.3. CHECKING THE STATUS OF THE EPAC 3100/3500 ________________________________ 5-10 5.4. 5.4.1. EPAC CONFIGURATION ______________________________________________________ 5-11 Configuration Management ___________________________________________________ 5-11 Changing the Password ______________________________________________________ 5-12 Selecting a configuration (Setting Group) ________________________________________ 5-14 Transferring a configuration to the EPAC ________________________________________ 5-16 Changing configurations _____________________________________________________ 5-18 Saving and printing a configuration ____________________________________________ 5-20 Preparing a configuration ____________________________________________________ 5-21 Changing the communication parameters _______________________________________ 5-24 Changing the basic configuration parameters ____________________________________ 5-28 Configuring the Functions of the EPAC __________________________________________ 5-30 Changing the line parameters _________________________________________________ 5-32 Changing the teleaction parameters ____________________________________________ 5-35 Changing the Zone Setting Parameters _________________________________________ 5-38 Changing the teleaction parameters for a tee line ________________________________ 5-42 Changing the Weak Infeed Parameters _________________________________________ 5-45 Changing the Miscellaneous Parameters ________________________________________ 5-47 Changing the fuse failure parameters __________________________________________ 5-49 Configuring the software functions _____________________________________________ 5-51 Changing the Power Swing Parameters _________________________________________ 5-53 Changing the High Resistance Earth Fault Parameters _____________________________ 5-56 Changing the Parameters of the Automatic Recloser Control _______________________ 5-59 Changing the Synchrocheck Parameters ________________________________________ 5-62 Changing the Parameters of isolated or compensated network (RNI) protection _______ 5-65 Changing the parameters of Sensitive Directional Earth Fault protection __________________________________________________________________ 5-67 Changing the MaxI, MaxU and MinU Protection Parameters _______________________ 5-70 Changing the disturbance recording parameters _________________________________ 5-73 Assigning the digital Inputs/Outputs ___________________________________________ 5-76 Checking Configuration Consistency ____________________________________________ 5-80 5.4.2. 5.4.3. 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-6 5.5. CHECKING THE RESULTS OF THE ANALOGUE VALUES ____________________________ 5-82 5.6. 5.6.1. 5.6.2. CHECKING THE PROTECTION AND AUTOMATIC CONTROL FUNCTIONS _____________ 5-84 Fault Analysis Tools __________________________________________________________ 5-84 Functional Tests _____________________________________________________________ 5-88 5-2 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE 5-3 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 This chapter describes the complete commissioning procedures for the EPAC 3100/3500. The first part describes the various checks to be carried out before the equipment is energized, in particular, the configuration corresponding to the rated characteristics and the input/output connections. The second part describes the energization procedure and the first checks to be carried out to make sure the EPAC is operational. The third part describes the configuration of the EPAC. This configuration enables the operator to adapt the EPAC functions to the electrical environment. The fourth part describes all the tests used to check that the EPAC built-in protection and automatic control functions operate correctly. 5-4 EPAC 3100/3500 5.1. MS/M 1.6882-C PRELIMINARY CHECKS The first step of the EPAC 3100/3500 commissioning procedure is to check that all the connections are correctly made and the pre-configuration of the steady state characteristics is well suited to the electrical environment. 5.1.1. Mechanical Checks Do the following to check that the boards inside the EPAC 3100/3500 are correctly connected: 1. Remove the plastic cover. 2. Unlatch the front panel by loosening the milled screw located at the right hand side of the door. 3. Rotate the front panel to the left. 4. Check: - the location of the boards, - the ribbon cable insertion. IO-1 or IO-3 board Connection AC board cable TMS board Flat-top link TMS-IO Converter board Door IRIGB board TMS-QTF QTF board Add. IO-2/IO-1/IO-3 board Figure 5.1a: Board Interconnections 5-5 MS/M 1.6882-C 5.1.2. EPAC 3100/3500 Checking the Nominal Values 5.1.2.1. Rated Current Value at the Secondary Circuit The rated current can be either 1 A or 5 A. You can select one of these two values by moving the connector button. Check that the indication corresponds to the desired rating. If not, loosen the nuts to invert the tabs. Refer to the enclosed Installer’s Guide. 5.1.2.2. Converter Power Supply Voltage The voltage level is written on the left of the EPAC 3100/3500 front panel. Check that this value complies with the power supply voltage provided. 5-6 EPAC 3100/3500 5.1.3. MS/M 1.6882-C Checking Connections 5.1.3.1. Analogue Input Connections The current and voltage analogue inputs are connected to terminal block X5 as described in the following figures. Tore P2 P1 S2 IL1 S1 P2 P1 S2 S1 P2 IL2 S2 P1 S1 IL3 UL1 P1 P2 UL2 UL3 P1 P2 P1 P2 To BCH S1 2 1 4 3 ILE1 5 ILS1 ILE2 IL1 6 ILS2 ILE3 IL2 7 8 ILS3 INS IL3 10 INE UL1 IN S2 S1 S2 S1 9 UL2 15 14 UL3 UbusbarE UL2 UL1 13 12 11 UN S2 UbusbarS ITMHE ITMHS UBAR UL3 16 TMH Figure 5.1b: Analogue Input Connections with CT core balance P2 P1 S2 IL1 S1 P2 P1 S2 IL2 S1 P2 S2 P1 S1 IL3 UL1 P1 P2 S1 2 1 ILE1 IL1 4 3 ILS1 ILE2 IL2 5 6 ILS2 ILE3 IL3 7 8 ILS3 INS IN UL1 9 11 UN UL1 UL3 P1 P2 S2 S1 S2 S1 10 INE UL2 P1 P2 UL2 UL2 S2 12 To BCH 13 14 UL3 UbusbarE UL3 15 16 UbusbarS ITMHE ITMHS UBAR TMH Figure 5.1c: Analogue Input Connections with Holgreen connection 5-7 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 EPAC 3100/3500 TMH S TMH E U BarS bar U BarE 2 4 UL2 UL3 UN UL1 6 8 10 12 16 INE INS INE INS 18 IL E3 IL S3 If IN = 5A 20 IL E3 IL S3 If IN = 1A 22 IL E2 IL S2 If IN = 5A 24 26 IL IL IL IL 28 IL E1 IL S1 14 E2 S2 E1 S1 X5 If IN = 5A If IN = 1A E: Input S: Output If IN = 1A If IN = 5A If IN = 1A QTF Board Screw-in connector Figure 5.1d: EPAC 3100/3500 Analogue Input Connections Equipment fault signals are connected on connector X6 between terminals 9 and 10 of IO-1 or IO-3 board and between terminals 15 and 16 of additional IO-1 or IO-3 or IO-2 board. 5.1.3.2. Earthing A nut located on the lower right-hand side of the EPAC 3100/3500 rear panel is used for earthing. An additional nut, located on the bottom left-handside of the rack, is used to connect grounding wires for current loop and/or K-BUS cable if these options are installed. 5.1.3.3. Logic Input/Output Connections The logic inputs/outputs are connected to the X1 to X4 sockets of the input/output boards. These sockets are designed to receive standard Midos terminal blocks. Some of the contacts on these boards are pre-allocated whereas others can be allocated to inputs/outputs with the user’s dialog (refer to the paragraph entitled "Assigning the Inputs/ 5-8 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Outputs"). Connections between these boards are indicated in the appendix. In its basic version, the EPAC 3100/3500 is only fitted with the IO-1 or IO-3 board. An additional IO-1 or IO-3 or IO-2 board can be inserted if extra inputs/outputs are to be interfaced. Use the EPAC 3100/3500 connection layout to check the assignment of the logic inputs and outputs. 5.1.3.4. Power Supply Connections The power supply is connected to terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector. 27 28 - Power Supply + Power Supply X6 Connector Figure 5.1e: Power Supply Connections 5.1.3.5. Connection to an External System and to External Time Synchronisation These connections are made via the rack front panel connectors for the RS 232 connector and the rack rear panel connectors for all other connections. The type of connectors available depends on the configuration options selected. Options selected Connector Location TPE disturbance recording TERMINAL 1 EPAC front panel VDEW D24 receiver D25 transmitter EPAC rear panel K-BUS COURIER D26 EPAC rear panel Current loop X18 EPAC rear panel MODEM link X20 EPAC rear panel IRIGB time synchronisation X30 EPAC rear panel D26 X6 X1 X3 X2 X4 NC X6 X1 X3 X2 X4 X5 X5 Current loop KBus link To UR Protection cable Protection cable Figure 5.1f: Ground Point Connections X18 5-9 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Rear view (IRIG-B, Modem and KBUS-COURIER options) X6 1 2 X1 X3 27 1 27 1 28 2 28 2 27 1 27 1 28 2 28 2 X2 X4 D26 X5 27 28 27 1 28 2 X1 X3 X6 X2 X4 X30 X5 X20 Rear view (IRIG-B, Current loop and VDEW options) X6 1 2 X1 X3 27 1 27 1 28 2 28 2 27 1 27 1 28 2 28 2 X2 X4 D24 X5 27 28 27 1 28 2 D25 X6 X1 X3 X2 X4 X30 X5 X18 Front view TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 2 Figure 5.1g: EPAC Option Connections 5-10 EPAC 3100/3500 5.2. MS/M 1.6882-C ENERGIZATION Energize the EPAC. The function management program of the EPAC which is run automatically, first performs a complete self-test. The self-test results are indicated by front panel lights. More details on the results can be accessed from the WinEPAC software or from the display. At energization, the EPAC protection function takes a few seconds to stabilize before becoming operational. 5.3. CHECKING THE STATUS OF THE EPAC 3100/3500 The front panel lights should be as follows: - the light "RELAY AVAILABLE" should flash, - the other lights should be off. EPAC 3000 Vx.x x PROTECTION OK If this is not the case, refer to Chapter 6. 5-11 MS/M 1.6882-C 5.4. EPAC 3100/3500 EPAC CONFIGURATION Some parameters of the EPAC protection and automatic control functions can be adapted to the environment in which the EPAC operates. This sub-chapter describes: - EPAC configuration management, - the configuration of the protection and automatic control functions provided by the EPAC, - the input/output assignment. Configuration procedures are described for: 5.4.1. - the WinEPAC software on a micro-computer connected to the EPAC front panel, - the EPAC front panel display software, - the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software from a central location via the K-BUSCOURIER network. Configuration Management The configuration of the EPAC can be modified, allowing the user to adapt its settings to the characteristics of the network it is monitoring. The EPAC comes with the option of four configurations stored in memory. These can all be modified, and can replace the current configuration if required. A password must be entered before the active configuration can be modified. The following pages describe how to: - enter the password, - select a configuration, - transfer a configuration to the EPAC, - switch setting groups, - save and print out a configuration, - prepare a configuration to be modified or created. 5-12 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE PASSWORD Description The password protects access to the EPAC. It is required to: - switch from one configuration to another, - change auto-recloser status, - reset auto-recloser counters, - change the password, - load a configuration into the EPAC, - acknowledge alarms after a shutdown caused by a failure detected by self-test procedures. The EPAC is delivered with the default password "USER". The password can be changed by the user. Changing the Password From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Orders button of the EPAC main management screen. The EPAC’s current status is displayed. 2. Click on the Password Setting button. The password change window is displayed. A message prompts the user to enter the current password and the new password. Figure 5.4a: Password change Window To protect the password, the characters appear as asterisks when the password is entered. 3. Click on the OK button when the passwords have been correctly entered. The user is asked to confirm the new password entry. 5-13 MS/M 1.6882-C 4. EPAC 3100/3500 The PC queries the EPAC to check that the registers of the two items of equipment are consistent with one another. If the result is positive and the current password entered by the user is correct, the new password becomes the current EPAC password. From the EPAC display in the initial contents of the display/display configuration. 1. Press 2. Select the PASS option, then the SAIS option. 3. Press 4. Enter the current password using the arrow keys: SET SET . Keys 5. Use and to scroll through the letters and select a password character. and to move the cursor to the following or preceding character. If the password entered is correct, the MODI option is activated. Select this option and enter the new password, which automatically becomes the current EPAC password. The password entered from the display remains visible until automatic exit from configuration mode (5 minute timeout). The display is no longer in configuration mode once the display screen has switched off. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the SYSTEM DATA column. 2. Select the SYS PASSWORD setting in the ACCESS CELL LIST window. 3. Enter the current password. 4. Return to the SYS PASSWORD field and enter the new password. The new password becomes effective once it has been validated. ! COURIER will not accept a new password if it is the same as the current password. There is no confirmation of the new password entry. 5-14 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C SELECTING A CONFIGURATION (SETTING GROUP) Description An existing or standard configuration should be selected before changing any settings. Configuring the EPAC is then in most cases simply a matter of changing a few settings in the selected configuration. Selecting a Configuration From the WinEPAC software The following can be selected from the PC: - the current EPAC configuration (or one of the four EPAC configurations), - a configuration saved on hard disk or diskette, - a standard configuration used as the basis for creating a new configuration. 1. 2. Access the EPAC main management screen. Click on the Settings button. The configuration module screen is displayed. Loading the EPAC configuration: 3. Click on the Download button. The active EPAC configuration is loaded into the memory. The main setting screen is displayed. The number of the configuration to be uploaded is requested. 4. Once the new configuration has been loaded, the main setting screen is displayed. Loading the standard configuration: 5. Click on the Create button. The standard configuration is loaded into the memory. 6. Once the new configuration has been loaded into memory, the main setting screen is displayed. 5-15 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Opening a configuration saved on hard disk or diskette: 7. Click on the played. icon. The screen for selecting the location of the configuration is dis- 8. Select the required configuration, then click on OK. Configurations on hard disk are put in files with a CNF extension (e.g. the name of the standard configuration is STANDARD.CNF). 9. Once the new configuration has been loaded into the memory, the main setting screen is displayed. From the EPAC display You can select one of the 4 configurations available: 1. Access the main menu. 2. Select the CONF and PARA menus. The CHXCONF menu is displayed. 3. Select the number of the configuration to be downloaded. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the SETTING COMMANDS column. 2. Assign the value Retrieve=[0] to the SET Active Setg parameter. 3. Activate the "Reset Cell Locn" command. The active EPAC configuration is retrieved. The Active Setg Retrieve=[0] command can also be used to abort modifications in progress and retrieve the current EPAC configuration. 5-16 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C TRANSFERRING A CONFIGURATION TO THE EPAC Description This function is used to transfer a modified configuration to the memory of the EPAC. Transferring a Configuration to the EPAC From the WinEPAC software 1. Select the Upload option from the configuration module screen. The transfer screen is displayed. This screen indicates the name of the substation and the outgoing feeder. 2. Enter the password in the PASSWORD field. 3. Click on the OK button to validate the transfer order. WinEPAC checks the consistency of the configuration registers. If the result is positive and the password is correct, the configuration is loaded into the EPAC. In this case, the EPAC stops and carries out a complete initialisation self-test before restarting and displaying the self-test result. If the parameter group option is installed, the loading of configuration group 0 stops the EPAC and is followed by initialisation a complete self-test. If the consistency check detects a serious error, the upload is inhibited. If it detects a minor error, the upload is permitted. From the EPAC display several times until the PARA option is displayed on the second line. 1. Press 2. Select the VALI option. 3. Enter the password. If the password is correct, the configuration in the memory of the display unit is sent to the EPAC. 5-17 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. 2. Select the SETTING COMMANDS column. Assign the value SAVE=[0] to the SET Current Setg parameter. Transmission is refused if the password has not yet been entered. It should have been entered in SYSTEM DATA/ SYS Password. ! 3. There is a 2 minute timeout for password entry. Activate the "Reset Cell Locn" command. The configuration is uploaded to the EPAC and becomes the active configuration. 5-18 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING CONFIGURATIONS Description This function is used to change from one configuration identified by a number to another configuration identified by another number. Changeover from one configuration to another can be forced from the digital inputs. The Cfg0 and Cfg1 are used to convert the number of the configuration to be activated into binary code. Changing Configurations From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Orders button of the EPAC main management screen. The Orders screen appears. 2. Click on the Change button. The configuration change screen appears. 3. Select the configuration to be activated in the second zone then click on the button. The password entry window appears. 4. Enter the password, then click on OK. 5. WinEPAC checks the consistency of the configuration registers. If the result is positive and the password is correct, the selected configuration becomes the active EPAC configuration. In this case, the EPAC stops and carries out a complete initialisation self-test before restarting and displaying the self-test result. From the EPAC display several times until the PARA option is displayed on the second line. 1. Press 2. Select the ACTI option. 3. Select the number of the configuration to be activated. 4. A message prompts the user to enter the password if this has not already been done. 5. If the password is correct, an OK message appears. The configuration selected becomes the active configuration. 5-19 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select Change Setting Group in the Control menu. The list of relays and the number of their active configuration are displayed. 2. Select the EPAC whose configuration you wish to change. The window for selecting the number of the configuration to be activated is displayed. 3. Select the number of the configuration to be activated. 4. Press Control + F10 to confirm the change of configuration. To change configuration for all relays, select the ALL RELAYS label at address 255. The password is not essential if changing configurations via COURIER. 5-20 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C SAVING AND PRINTING A CONFIGURATION Description These functions are used to: - manage the configuration files on hard disk or diskette, - print out the settings for a configuration. These functions can only be accessed via the WinEPAC software. Saving a Configuration 1. Click on the button of the configuration module screen. The configuration save window is displayed. This window is used to indicate the disk drive and root directory in which the configuration should be saved, and the name to be assigned to it. 2. Select the disk drive and directory in which the configuration should be saved. 3. Enter the configuration file name (8 characters maximum). 4. Click on OK. The current configuration is saved in the specified directory. Printing a Configuration 1. Click on the displayed. 2. To configure the printout: 3. button of the configuration module screen. The printout window is 2a. Click on the Options button. The printout configuration window is displayed. 2b. When the printout is correctly configured, click on the OK button. The configuration window disappears. Click on the Print button. The data is transmitted to the printer. 5-21 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 PREPARING A CONFIGURATION Description After commissioning, the software must be configured in accordance with the characteristics selected. Software functions cannot be changed. Hardware options for your EPAC can be selected or deselected via the WinEPAC software. Selecting the Hardware and Software Options From the WinEPAC software Identifying the protection device: 1. Click on the System Data button. The EPAC identification screen is displayed. Figure 5.4b: EPAC System Data Screen 5-22 EPAC 3100/3500 3. MS/M 1.6882-C Enter the name of the substation and the outgoing feeder, plus your licence numbers for the protection device to be configured. Displaying the software functions: 1. Click on the System Data button of main setting screen. 2. Click on the Options button. The software functions selection screen is displayed. This screen is used to view the functions installed on the EPAC. Selecting the hardware options: 1. Click on the Hardware button of the software’s main setting screen. 2. The hardware option selection screen is displayed. This screen is used to select the optional boards actually installed on your EPAC. Boards cannot be selected unless the EPAC has been configured for them. Those not available appear greyed on the screen. The EPAC's board configuration varies according to the model. From the EPAC display Displaying the hardware options: 1. Select the CONF, PARA, then DFIN menus. The parameters are displayed on the second line. 2. Set the Opt1 option according to the condition whether or not the supplementary I/O board is installed. 3. Set the Irig option according to the condition whether or not the IRIGB board is installed. 4. Enter the substation name in the Post variable. 5. Enter the name of the outgoing feeder protected by the EPAC in the Dep variable. The front panel display can only be used to view or change the first eight characters of the substation and outgoing feeder names. The software and hardware option parameters are configured by the manufacturer. 5-23 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software Displaying the software options: 1. Select the SOFTWARE OPTIONS column. The parameters for the software options installed on EPAC are displayed. The options installed are marked ON. The options not installed are marked OFF. Displaying the hardware options: 1. Select the HARDWARE SETTING column. The hardware options are displayed. They indicate whether the AC, supplementary I/O and IRIGB boards are present. The boards installed are marked ON. The boards not installed are marked OFF. The AC board is always shown as present, as the EPAC cannot be accessed via K-BUS-COURIER without it. The hardware options cannot be changed via the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software. 5-24 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS Description There are three optional communication modes available: - TPE mode: to exchange disturbance recording data by Modem or current loop, - VDEW mode: to conduct substation control operations via a fibre optic link, - COURIER mode: to conduct substation control operations via the KBUS interface. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters Setting Baud Rates The baud rates for the master control computer and the EPAC should be the same. Selecting the Time Synchronisation Mode When using the TPE option, you can deselect time synchronisation by the IRIG B board and use the UR for time synchronisation, instead. Accessing the Communication Parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Communication button of the Configuration - System Data screen. The communication parameters screen is displayed. 5-25 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Figure 5.4c: Communication Parameters Screen Setting TPE communication mode: 2. Click on the TPE button. The TPE communication parameters are displayed: - EPAC address, - Synchronisation by UR, - Telephone number, - Modem initialisation sequence, - Baud rate. The telephone number serves as a password to let the EPAC recognise the UR. Setting VDEW communication mode: 2. Click on the VDEW button. The VDEW communication parameters are displayed: - Protection address, - Baud rate. 5-26 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Setting COURIER communication mode: 2. Click on the COURIER button. The COURIER communication parameters are displayed: - Protection address, - Protocol version, - Functions selected. Only the address can be changed. The other parameters are given for information only and indicate the functions authorised in the COURIER version. From the EPAC display To access the communication parameters, select the CONF, PARA, PROT and COMM options. The communication parameters are displayed. Setting TPE communication mode: 1. The two parameters that can be changed are: - AdUA, the EPAC address, - BMod, the Modem baud rate (not used if communication is by current loop). Setting VDEW communication mode: 1. The two parameters that can be changed are: - AVde, the EPAC address, - BKBs, the baud rate. Setting COURIER communication mode: 1. The only parameter that can be changed is ACou, the EPAC address. 5-27 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software Setting COURIER communication mode: 1. Select the SYSTEM DATA column. 2. The SYS Rly Address parameter is displayed. The Units/New address command can also be used to change the EPAC address. In this case the new address is not refreshed in the MMI and the configuration must be sent to the EPAC again to save it. VDEW mode cannot be set from this software as VDEW and KBUS are mutually exclusive. Setting TPE communication mode: 1. Select the TPE PARAMETERS column. 2. The TPE communication parameters are displayed: - Synchr by UR, - EPAC Addr UR, - Baud rate, - Phone number, - Modem Init. 5-28 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE BASIC CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Description Four types of basic configuration parameter can be changed: - the language used by the EPAC, - the fault distance unit, - the line length unit, - the type of local printer installed. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters Setting the Fault Distance Unit The unit selected appears in the local fault report printouts and on the display. Fault reports displayed by the WinEPAC software give fault distances in all units. Selecting the Printer Driver If the printer to be installed is not mentioned in the list of available printer drivers, select the driver indicated as being compatible in the printer documentation. Accessing the Basic Configuration Parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the System Data button of the main setting screen. 2. Click on the Preferences button. The basic configuration parameters screen is displayed. 3. Select the language, the fault distance and line length units and local printer type. 5-29 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Figure 5.4d: Configuration - System Data Screen From the EPAC display Setting the language and the fault distance and line length units: 1. Select the CONF and PARA options, then the DFIN option. 2. The parameters that can be changed are: - LANG for the language used by the EPAC, - Decl for the fault distance unit, - Dist for the line length unit. Setting the local printer type: 1. Select the CONF, PARA and PROT options, then the IMP option. 2. Select the Type parameter. The available printer drivers are displayed. 3. Select the local printer driver. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software Setting the local printer type 1. Select the LOCAL PRINTER column. 2. The printer type parameter is displayed. 5-30 EPAC 3100/3500 5.4.2. MS/M 1.6882-C Configuring the Functions of the EPAC These are the standard functions installed on the EPAC. They consist of: - the line characteristics function, - the teleprotection function, - the zone setting function, - the tee line function, - the weak infeed function, - the miscellaneous parameters function, - fuse failure, - the input/output function. They can be accessed using the buttons of the setting screen for the standard functions. Accessing the setting screen for the standard functions From the WinEPAC-MMI software 1. Select the main setting screen. 2. Click on the Main button. The Settings - Main screen is displayed. Figure 5.4e: Settings - Main Screen 5-31 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the EPAC display 1. Activate the configuration to be modified. 2. Select the CONF, PARA and PROT options one after the other from the main menu. ./ CONF / PARA /PROT LIGN SURV TELE ----> SET Help Figure 5.4f: Menu for Selecting the Parameters on the Display From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software This software does not have a data column grouping together all the standard protection functions. The parameters for each standard function are contained in columns grouping together a particular type of data. Unauthorised functions and options do not appear on the main screen. 5-32 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE LINE PARAMETERS Description These parameters define the following characteristics of the EPAC line: - the rated value of the analogue variables as measured at the reducer secondary circuit, - the reduction coefficients for the voltage and current reducers, - the length of the line to be protected, in km or miles, - the line positive and zero sequence impedances. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters How can the rated value of the analogue variables be checked? The rated value of the analogue variables must be consistent with the configuration of the acquisition board and with the indications written on the EPAC front panel. What line impedances should be indicated? The following are the line impedances representative of the line to be protected: - the positive sequence impedance, Z1, - the zero sequence impedance of zone 1, Z01, - the zero sequence impedance of zones 2, 3, 4 and 5, Z02. How can the impedances be calculated? The impedances must be indicated in low voltage (LV) Ohms for 100% of the line. The WinEPAC-software is used to indicate the following values: - the impedances in cartesian co-ordinates, - the impedances in polar co-ordinates, - the positive sequence impedance and the earth coefficients for zone 1 and for the other zones, K01 and K02. The earth coefficients K01 and K02 are calculated as follows: K01 = ((Z01 - Zl)/(3.Zl)), K02 = ((Z02- Zl)/(3.Zl)). 5-33 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Example of impedance calculation: Z3 Z2 Z1 EA (L1) 7 km (L2) 3 km EB ZSB ZSA Line Zdl Z0l Cable Zdc Z0c length to be entered: 10 km total positive sequence impedance to be protected Zd = Zdl + Zdc for Z1 = 0.8 Zd and for Z2 = 1.2 Zd Z01 = (Z0l/L1).(L1+L2) Z02 = Z0l+Z0c If you only have the HV impedance values (calculated before the CTs), the impedances in LV Ohms are calculated as follows: ZBT = (Current transformer ratio/voltage transformer ratio).Zcalculated Accessing the Line Parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Select the Line button in the Settings - Main screen. The setting screen for line characteristics is displayed. Figure 5.4g: Setting Screen for the Line Characteristics Function 5-34 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Setting conditions - The unit used in the Line Length setting depends on the unit selected on the Preferences screen displayed via System Data. From the EPAC display 1. Select the LIGN option. 2. The first three available parameters are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. The display software only accepts impedance values expressed in cartesian co-ordinates. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the LINE CHARACTERISTICS column. 2. The line parameters are displayed. 5-35 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE TELEACTION PARAMETERS Description These parameters are used to define the type of teleaction between the EPAC and the distance protection at the other end of the line: - the possible type of tripping, - the teleprotection mode, - the teleaction channels to be used, - the blocking time delay if a blocking mode is used, - the teleaction mode, - the possible use of busbar isolation mode, - the possible use of zone reach control mode if no teleprotection is used. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters How can the teleaction mode be chosen? The acceleration or permissive overreach modes are generally associated with long lines. The blocking mode is generally associated with short lines. What type of transmission is used in acceleration or permissive overreach modes? If the teleprotection mode corresponds to an acceleration or permissive overreach: - if the line is likely to be disturbed by a fault, you can transmit the teleaction messages either in unlocking mode or in carrier loss mode. The carrier loss mode is more economical because it only requires one channel, - the transmission is generally associated with a forward zone (zone 1 or zone 1 - zone 2). What type of transmission is used in blocking mode? If the teleprotection mode corresponds to a blocking operation, the transmission is generally associated with the reverse zone (zone 5). What if no teleaction is provided? If no teleaction mode is associated with the protection, the zone reach control or busbar isolation mode can be programmed. In zone reach control mode and without considering the operation of the recloser, the zone 1 or 2 faults are associated with a step 1 time delay (which often corresponds to instantaneous tripping). 5-36 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Accessing the teleaction parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Teleprotection button of the Settings - Main screen. 2. The setting screen for the Distance protection is displayed. Figure 5.4h: Setting Screen for the Distance protection Setting conditions - The "Emission type" group can only be set if a distance protection scheme is selected. - The "HF presence/unblocking" group can only be set if the distance protection selected is acceleration or permissive. - The transmission time delay can only be set if the distance protection scheme selected is locking. - The Zone Reach Control and Busbar Isolation options are mutually exclusive. - The Zone Reach Control or Busbar Isolation option can only be selected if there is no distance protection setting for the EPAC. 5-37 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the EPAC display 1. Select the TELE option. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the LOGIC SCHEME column. 2. The teleaction parameters are displayed. 5-38 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE ZONE SETTING PARAMETERS Description These parameters define the characteristics of the convergence zones and the time delays of the associated steps: - the impedances for the 5 zones, - the limit resistance values for parallelogram-shaped characteristics, - the zone 3 directional, - the time delays associated with the 5 zones, - the time delays, thresholds and directionals associated with overcurrent start-up. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters For which zones can parameters be set and under what conditions? Parameters can always be set for zones 1, 2, 3 and 4 and for: - Extended zone 1, if zone reach control mode is active, - Zone 5, if busbar isolation mode is inhibited. Selecting the direction associated with zone 3 The position of zone 3 directional can be set to reverse to increase selectivity for reverse protection. How can the impedances for zones 1 and 2 be chosen? The impedance value for zones 1 and 2 must be consistent with the teleprotection mode: - if the EPAC operates in overreach range mode, the impedance of zone 1 must be more than the line impedance between the two protections, - if the EPAC operates in underreach range mode: . the impedance of zone 1 must be less than the line impedance between the two protections, . the impedance of zone 2 must be more than the line impedance between the two protections. 5-39 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Zone 2 Zone 2 C D C Zone 1 Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 1 D Zone 1 Zone 2 Underreach Overreach Figure 5.4i: Possible Range of the EPAC How can the step time delays be configured? Time delays must increase from one step to the other. Step 1 generally trips instantaneously and is therefore associated with a time delay value of zero. What are the limit resistance values for zone 1? One zone 1 limit resistance value can be defined for single-phase faults and another for multiphase faults although these two limit resistance values are generally equal. Setting the overcurrent protection The overcurrent protection thresholds and time delays must comply with the following conditions: - the I>> threshold must be higher than the I> threshold, - the T>> time delay must be shorter than the T> time delay. Associating a directional with a threshold is the equivalent of defining the threshold as a backup protection in the selected direction. If no directional is defined, the backup protection applies for reverse and forward protection. Accessing the zone setting parameters From the WinEPAC software Setting zone 1 to zone 5 impedances and resistances and zone 3 directional 1. Click on the Zone Setting button of the Settings - Main screen. 2. The zone setting screen is displayed. 5-40 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Figure 5.4j: Zone Setting Screen Setting conditions Extended zone 1 impendance can only be set if the "Zone reach control" option has been selected in the teleprotection screen. Setting the time delays and threshold characteristics associated with the overcurrent start-up 1. Click on the Zone Setting button of the Settings - Main screen. 2. The zone setting screen is displayed. 3. Click on the Time Delays... tab. The setting screen for time delays and thresholds is displayed. 5-41 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Figure 5.4k: Setting Screen for Time Delays and Thresholds From the EPAC display 1. Select the SURV option. 2. The first three available parameters are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the ZONE SETTINGS column. 2. The zone setting parameters are displayed. 5-42 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE TELEACTION PARAMETERS FOR A TEE LINE Description The EPAC can also handle situations where a short tee line is located near one of the ends of a line to be protected. It is thus possible to have independent teleaction parameters with the protection located on the branch line. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters In general: - both ends of the main line are connected to the network and, as a result, to sources, - users are supplied through tee lines. How many teleaction modes are there for a tee line? For this type of tee line, a first teleaction mode must be provided to protect the main line as well as a second teleaction mode between the tee line protection and the main line protection(s). What is the most appropriate teleaction mode for the tee line and the main line? As distance measurements are not very disturbed on the main line, protections on that line can operate in step acceleration. As branch line measurements lack precision, the tee line protection must operate in the overreach range and blocking mode with the main line protection. In the example of figure 5.4l, the protections must be configured as follows: - Protections A-B permissive underreach - Protections A-C blocking overreach mode - Protections B-C blocking overreach mode A B ZONE 1B ZONE 1A ZONE 1A ZONE 1B C Figure 5.4l: Tee Line Example 5-43 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Accessing the Teleaction Parameters for the Tee Line From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Tee Line button of the Settings - Main screen. 2. The setting screen for teleprotection for tee line function is displayed. Figure 5.4m: Setting Screen for the Teleprotection for Tee Line Function Setting conditions - The "Emission type" group can only be set if a distance protection scheme is selected. - The "HF presence/unblocking" group can only be set if the distance protection scheme selected is acceleration or permissive. - The transmission time delay can only be set if the distance protection scheme selected is locking. 5-44 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C From the EPAC display 1. Select the PIQU option. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the TEE LINE LOGIC SCHEME column. 2. The tee line teleaction parameters are displayed. 5-45 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE WEAK INFEED PARAMETERS Description The Weak Infeed mode is used to continue operation in remote protection mode when one of the ends is close to a source that is too weak. The weak infeed parameters are used to define the following: - the detection time delay and threshold of a weak infeed, - the measures to take if a source is considered to be too weak. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters What happens if the weak infeed mode is selected? If the weak infeed mode is selected and if a teleaction message is received when the protection device is not operating, the following occurs: - the teleaction message received is re-transmitted (Echo mode), - the associated circuit breaker is not tripped or is tripped in single-phase or three-phase. How can tripping be avoided when the corresponding CB of the protection is open? If the weak infeed mode is associated with a tripping operation, a minimum current threshold is used to determine whether one or several phases are open and therefore to prevent tripping if the circuit breaker is open. Accessing the weak infeed parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Weak Infeed button of the Settings - Main screen. 2. The setting screen for weak infeed mode is displayed. 5-46 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Figure 5.4n: Setting Screen for Weak Infeed Mode Setting conditions - "Weak Infeed" mode can be activated under the following conditions: . permissive or acceleration mode selected in the zone setting parameters, . no tee line selected in the tee line parameters. - The "Confirmation by under voltage" group can be activated if one- or three-pole tripping is selected. - If tripping mode is set as 1-pole, confirmation by under-voltage is automatically selected. From the EPAC display 1. Select the WEAK option. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software These parameters can be accessed from the data column: 1. Select the WEAK INFEED SETTING column. 2. The weak infeed parameters are displayed. 5-47 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS Description "Miscellaneous parameters" covers settings for several EPAC functions: - auto-recloser blocking by distance or overcurrent protection, with or without time delay, - reclose threshold on fault, - threshold for holding the trip when a current is present, - time delay for reversal of the directional. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters Holding tripping when a current is present (SEALIN) This holding function is used to check the tripping drop-offs by the absence of a current on the line. The tripping command sent by the protection device is maintained as long as the fault current is greater than the programmed threshold. In any case, the instruction for tripping will never be maintained for more than 10 sec. Recloser blocking The recloser blocking is taken into account: - after a step 2, 3, 4 or 5 time delay, - after an overcurrent protection time delay (T>> ou T>). The selected time delay should make it possible not to lock the auto-recloser without reason. Accessing the miscellaneous parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Others button of the Settings - Main screen. 2. The setting screen for the miscellaneous parameters is displayed. 5-48 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Figure 5.4o: Miscellaneous Parameters Screen From the EPAC display 1. Select DIVE. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS column. 2. The miscellaneous parameters are displayed. 5-49 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE FUSE FAILURE PARAMETERS Description The fuse failure parameters cover: - the zero-sequence and negative-sequence threshold values and the associated time delays, - activation of the Ifus>, Ifus>> and Ifr> thresholds, - the value of each of these thresholds, - the time delay associated with each of these thresholds, - auto-recloser blocking if one of the predefined thresholds is exceeded. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters How can the fuse failure parameters be configured? The EPAC protection function is locked as soon as it receives a fuse-failure signal. This signal can come from one of the following sources: - external, from the M.C.B., (mini-circuit breaker), - internal, defined using the zero-sequence and negative-sequence current values and the zerosequence voltage value as illustrated by the following equation: Fuse failure = (FFext + Vr). (I1. I0. Imax) where Imax = 2.5 In The following parameters can be set: - the time between detection of the fuse blow and transmission of the alarm, - the zero-sequence and negative-sequence current thresholds used for internally detecting a fuse failure. The value of the fuse failure thresholds determines how sensitive the protection device is to faults. Setting the current thresholds The thresholds and time delays associated with a confirmed fuse failure must comply with the following conditions: - the Ifus>> threshold must be higher than the Ifus> threshold, - the Tfus>> time delay must be shorter than the Tfus> time delay. 5-50 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Accessing the fuse failure parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Others button of the Settings - Main screen. The setting screen for the miscellaneous parameters is displayed. 2. Click on the Fuse Failure tab. The setting screen for the fuse failure functions is displayed. Figure 5.4p: Setting Screen for the Fuse Failure Parameters From the EPAC display 1. Select FFUS. 2. The first three parameters available are on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the FUSE FAILURE SETTING column. 2. The fuse failure parameters are displayed. 5-51 MS/M 1.6882-C 5.4.3. EPAC 3100/3500 Configuring the software functions These functions are present on some EPAC models only. The following functions are concerned: - the power swing function, - the high resistance earth fault function, - the auto-recloser function, - the synchro-check function, - the isolated or compensated network function and the zero sequence power function, - the maximum voltage, minimum voltage and overload protection function. The setting screens for these functions can be accessed using the buttons of the setting screen for the software functions. Accessing the setting screen for the software functions From the WinEPAC software 1. Select the Settings - Parameters screen. 2. Click on the Options button. The Settings - Options screen is displayed. Figure 5.4q: Settings - Options Screen 5-52 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C From the EPAC display 1. Activate the configuration to be modified. 2. Select the CONF, PARA and PROT options one after the other from the main menu. The main settings menu is displayed. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software This software does not have a data column grouping together all the optional protection functions. The parameters for each optional function are contained in columns grouping together a particular type of data. They are viewed if the options are available. 5-53 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE POWER SWING PARAMETERS Description These parameters are used to define the following: - the power swing detection time delay and threshold, - the functions to be locked when power swing is detected, - the power swing unlocking thresholds. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters How can the width of the power swing band be calculated? X Z4 R - Rlim Rlim Z5 R Power swing band Figure 5.4r: Characteristics of the Power Swing Band The power swing band parameters are calculated in the following way: ∆ƒ power swing frequency (ƒA-ƒB) Rcha Rlim ∆R Z Load Resistance Characteristic Limit Resistance the width of the power swing detection band network impedance corresponding to the sum of the reverse (Z5) and forward (Z4) impedances The width of the power swing band is calculated using the following equation: Rlim2 + Z2 ∆R = 1.3 tan ( π.∆ƒ.∆t). Z Assuming that the load corresponds to 60˚ angles between sources and if the characteristic limit is set so that Rlim = Rcha/2, the following is obtained: ∆R = 0.032 . ∆ƒ. Rcha 5-54 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C To make sure that a power swing frequency of 5 Hz is detected, the following is obtained: ∆R = 0.16 x Rcha How can the maximum time for keeping the point inside the characteristic be set? Time selectivity can be defined for the maximum time the impedance point stays in the characteristic as a result of the power swing phenomenon only. If the limit resistance width corresponds to half the load for sources that are out of phase by 60˚, the impedance point remains in the characteristic for half the duration of the cycle. For example, the point will remain in the characteristic for approximately 5 seconds if there is a power swing of 0.1 Hz. What zones are locked when power swing occurs? If no de-loopback protection is available in case power swing occurs, distance protection can be used instead. If the tripping operations are locked if power swing occurs - not including those in zone 1 -, the protection devices with an electric zero in zone 1 formulate the line opening commands. What happens if a fault occurs during a power swing? Dissymmetric effects such as the presence of a residual current or a negative sequence current (dissymmetric earth faults or two phase faults) can illustrate an isolation fault when power swing occurs. The fact that the power swing current does not generally exceed twice the maximum load current can also be taken into account. If a fault is detected during power swing, and as the distance measurement is not reliable, the remote protection directional function should be preferred, and zone 1 independence should be locked. In this case, the EPAC protection function operates in directional comparison mode. The tripping mode group allows to select 2 specific tripping modes in case of power swing: 1 pole: 1-pole tripping is carried out if a fault is detected during power swing. In this case, the network stability is favoured. 3 pole: 3-pole tripping is carried out for all faults. Accessing the power swing parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Power Swing button of the Settings - Options screen. 2. The setting screen for the power swing function is displayed. 5-55 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Figure 5.4s: Setting Screen for the Power Swing Function Setting conditions - The first threshold ratio for unblocking the protection can be set if unblocking on current Ir threshold is activated. - The second threshold ratio for unblocking can be set if unblocking on current I2 threshold is activated. - The Imax unblocking threshold can be set if unblocking on Imax is activated. From the EPAC display 1. Select the POMP option. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the POWER SWING SETTING column. 2. The power swing parameters are displayed. 5-56 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PARAMETERS Description The high resistance earth fault parameters are used to configure the following: - the directional comparison protection, - the auxiliary protection, with inverse time zero sequence current or zero sequence power. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters What is the role of the directional comparison function? The Directional Comparison provides backup protection in case a high resistance earth fault occurs that cannot be detected by the remote protection equipment. What teleaction channels should be used? A teleaction channel can be defined to co-ordinate the action of this protection function and that of a remote protection device. This channel may or may not be independent of the remote protection channel and allows operation as per the blocking or permissive overreach teleaction modes. Accessing the parameters of the high resistance earth faults From the WinEPAC software Setting the directional comparison protection 1. Click on the DEF button of the Settings - Options screen. 2. The setting screen for high resistance earth fault protection is displayed. 5-57 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Figure 5.4t: Setting Screen for High Resistance Earth Faults Setting conditions If directional comparison is activated, you can set: - the tripping type, - the tripping scheme, - the tee line tripping scheme, - the voltage thresholds and transmission time delays. Setting the backup protection 1. Click on the DEF button of the Settings - Options screen. 2. The setting screen for high resistance earth fault protection is displayed. 3. Click on the Backup Protection tab. 4. The setting screen for backup protection is displayed. 5-58 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Figure 5.4u: Setting Screen for the Backup Protection Function If backup current protection is activated, you can set: - time curve standards and types, - the Ir threshold, - multiplier factor I, - backup protection auto-recloser blocking. If backup power protection is activated, you can set: - the Ir threshold, - multiplier factor P, - backup protection auto-recloser blocking. From the EPAC display 1.a Select DEFD to change the parameters of the directional comparison protection. 1.b Select DEFI to change the parameters of the backup protection. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the DEF SETTING column. 2. The parameters for high resistance earth faults are displayed. 5-59 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE PARAMETERS OF THE AUTOMATIC RECLOSER CONTROL Description If the recloser function is integrated into the EPAC, the following can be defined: - the acceptance of the recloser option, - the cycle and reclaim time delays, - the duration of the closing order, - the shots used (single-phase/three-phase, single-phase/three-phase/three-phase, threephase/three-phase/three-phase/three-phase, etc.). The single-phase and two-phase cycle counters can also be reset. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters What high-speed shot should you choose if there is a Tee line? If the main line has a tee line and if the transformer of this tee line does not have a circuit breaker in reverse position, the high-speed cycle should always be three-phase. This is because a singlephase fault current tends to spread via the transformer on the phases unaffected by faults. When should slow shot be chosen? If no additional modules for the voltage check are available slow shots should only generally be chosen for networks that do not have stability problems or for radial networks. How can the recloser time delays be configured? Trip Tcyc Tencl Tbloc Tcyc = Cycle time delay Tbloc = Reclaim time Tencl = Reclosing time Figure 5.4v: Time-delays during one reclosing cycle 5-60 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C The time delay of the high-speed single-phase cycle must be greater than the minimum time it takes to deionize the arc on the line to be protected. The deionization time depends on the length of the line due to the charging/discharging phenomena of the conductor capacitances used. The time delay of the high-speed three-phase cycle must be short enough to assure line stability. The reclaim time delay must allow the recloser to correctly process the transient faults. The slow reclaim time delay associated with the backup protection must be at least as long as the standard reclaim time delay. Accessing the parameters of the automatic recloser control device From the WinEPAC software 1. Select the Auto-Recloser button of the Settings - Options screen. 2. The auto-recloser setting screen is displayed. Figure 5.4w: Setting Screen for the Auto-Recloser Function 5-61 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the EPAC display 1. Select the ARC option. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the AUTO RECLOSER SETTING column. 2. The auto-recloser parameters are displayed. 5-62 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE SYNCHROCHECK PARAMETERS Description If the synchrocheck function is integrated into the EPAC, you can configure the type of synchronisation to be checked between the line and bar voltages for one slow cycle reclosing operation. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters How can the voltage check criterion be chosen? This criterion is determined by the sources present that are upstream and downstream of the line where the EPAC is installed. Criterion Check Performed Live busbar Dead line Busbar voltage > threshold Line voltage < threshold Dead busbar Live line Busbar voltage < threshold Line voltage > threshold Live busbar Live line Busbar voltage > threshold Line voltage > threshold Vector difference between bar and line voltages < threshold Phase difference between bar and line voltages < threshold Frequency difference between bar and line voltages < threshold Live busbar/dead line, dead busbar/live line or live busbar/live line The criteria for live busbar/dead line, dead busbar/ live line or live busbar/live line mode must be checked. Why should the busbar voltage measurement phase be given? This information is used to correctly calculate the line-bar phase-shift. It concerns the reference phase for the line voltage. The reference line voltage should be compared with the equivalent voltage from the busbar transformer. 5-63 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Accessing the synchro-check parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Synchrocheck button of the Settings - Options screen. 2. The setting screen for the synchro-check function is displayed. Figure 5.4x: Setting Screen for the Synchro-Check Function Setting conditions - The voltage presence/absence thresholds can be set if any type of synchro-check other than "none" is activated. - The difference thresholds and the Live busbar/live line delay can be set if the selected check synchronising scheme is either "Live busbar and live line" or "All". 5-64 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C From the EPAC display 1. Select the SYNC option. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the SYNCHRO-CHECK SETTING column. 2. The synchro-check parameters are displayed. 5-65 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE PARAMETERS OF ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORK (RNI) PROTECTION Description If the RNI option is integrated into the EPAC, the following can be defined: - the acceptance of the RNI option, - the priority criterion to be used by the phase selection function if a double fault is detected, - the value of the tripping time delay associated with a simple phase-earth fault. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters How can the loop selection criterion be chosen? This criterion defines the priority between phases when a double phase-earth fault is detected. Normally, this criterion should be identical for all the protection devices on the network that have the same neutral point. Busbar Fault 2 Fault 1 Line 2 EPAC 3000 Line1 Figure 5.4y: Example of a Double Fault Loop Selection Criterion Priority Phases A(C) acyclic A before C before B C(A) acyclic C before A before B A(B) acyclic A before B before C B(A) acyclic B before A before C B(C) acyclic B before C before A A(C) cyclic A before C before B before A C(A) cyclic C before A before B before C 5-66 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C What does the tripping time delay correspond to? This time delay is used to set the tripping parameters associated with the persistent single phase to earth faults. Accessing the Isolated or Compensated Network parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Non-earthed Net. button of the Settings - Options screen. 2. The setting screen for isolated network fault protection is displayed. Figure 5.4z: Setting Screen for the Isolated or Compensated Network Function From the EPAC display 1. Select the PET option. 2. The first three parameters available (which are common to both the RNI and the ZSP options) are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORK column. 2. The RNI and ZSP parameters are displayed. 5-67 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE PARAMETERS OF SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION Description If the function is integrated into the EPAC, the following can be set: - the primary CT core angle, - the residual current threshold, the directional detection characteristic angle and the power threshold coefficient K, - the CT core ratio KIs, - the auto-start (intermittent) faults period. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters How to calculate the primary CT core angle This phase angle corresponds to the PHI curve in the following diagram. It is regarded as constant if the residual current is above the I2 threshold and as linear between thresholds I1 and I2. φ Phase angle = φ1 (φ1 - φ2). I (φ2.I1 - φ1.I2) + (I1 - I2) (I1 - I2) Phase angle = φ2 φ2 I1 I2 I Figure 5.4aa: Primary CT phase angle curve The zero sequence directional thresholds The zero sequence directional is calculated when the RNI function detects a single phase fault. The calculation is only carried out if the current, voltage and residual power levels overshoot certain thresholds. The residual active power threshold is calculated using the current and voltage thresholds and the K coefficient: Residual active power threshold = K.(Current threshold).(Voltage threshold) 5-68 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Accessing the Zero Sequence Power parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Non-Earthed Network button of the Settings - Options screen. The main setting screen for the RNI function is displayed. 2. Click on the ZSP tab. The setting screen for the zero sequence power functions is displayed. Figure 5.4ab: Setting screen for the zero sequence directional Setting conditions - The zero sequence directional can only be activated and set if the Zero Sequence Power option is checked on the system functions Software Options screen for. - The I1 current threshold must be lower than the I2 threshold. - The I1 phase angle must be higher than the I phase angle. From the EPAC display 1. Select the PET option. 2. The first three parameters available (which are common to both the RNI and the ZSP options) are displayed on the second line, just before the sign —> indicating that other parameters are available. 5-69 MS/M 1.6882-C From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORK column. 2. The RNI and ZSP parameters are displayed. EPAC 3100/3500 5-70 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHANGING THE MAXI, MAXU AND MINU PROTECTION PARAMETERS Description The MaxI, MaxU and MinU protection parameters are used to define: - the backup protection to be used, - the threshold value for each protection device selected. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters What time delays should be associated with the protection against overloads? The following can be associated with this protection: - settable time delays corresponding to settable thresholds, - time delays corresponding to ANSI (also known as US) or IEC inverse time curves. Accessing the MaxI, MaxU and MinU protection parameters: From the WinEPAC software Setting the MaxU and MinU protections 1. Click on the Under Overload button of the Settings - Options screen. 2. The setting screen for the MaxU and MinU protections is displayed. 5-71 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Figure 5.4ac: Setting Screen for the MaxU and MinU Protections Setting conditions If the relays are activated by MaxU, the following can be set: - the MaxU threshold, - the MaxU time delay, - the trip on MaxU. If the relays are activated by MinU, the following can be set: - the MinU threshold, - the MinU time delay. Setting the overload protection 1. Click on the I>> tab of the setting screen for the MaxU and MinU protections. 2. The setting screen for overload protection is displayed. 5-72 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Figure 5.4ad: Setting Screen for the Overload Protection If "Fixed thresholds" is selected for overload protection, three fixed thresholds and their associated time delays can be set. If inverse time curves are selected, the following can be set: - the time curve standard, - the time curve type, - the line current threshold, - the multiplier factor. From the EPAC display 1. To set the parameters of the MaxI protection device, select the RELI option. To set the parameters of the MaxU and MinU protection devices, select the RELU option. 2. The first three parameters available are displayed on the second line, just before the —> sign indicating that other parameters are available. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the V>>, V<<, I>> column. 2. The parameters for MaxI, MaxU and MinU protection are displayed. Changing the Disturbance Recording Parameters. 5-73 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CHANGING THE DISTURBANCE RECORDING PARAMETERS Description If the disturbance recording function is installed in the EPAC, the following can be defined: - the acceptance of the disturbance recording option, - the value of the pre-time and post-time, - whether or not the disturbance recording function starts up on analogue thresholds. Some Advice on How to Set the Parameters How can the event recording time be configured? Up to 5 seconds for one record can be stored and this should be taken into account when selecting the pre-time and post-time values. How can the disturbance recording function be synchronised on one UR 2000? The date stamping of disturbance recording events can be synchronised by a UR 2000 type restitution unit. This unit must be connected to the AC board of the EPAC by modem or by current loop. How can the parameters of the disturbance recording start-up be set? The disturbance recording function may or may not be configured for start-up when the thresholds of the analogue values are exceeded. This lets the disturbance recording data be recorded when another equipment item processes a fault (for example, a redundant protection device). The parameters for disturbance recording start-up when the logic channels change status are defined when the inputs/outputs are assigned (see sub-section Assigning the Digital Inputs/Outputs). 5-74 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Accessing the disturbance recording parameters From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Disturbance button of the EPAC - Configuration screen. 2. The setting screen for the disturbance recording function is displayed. Figure 5.4ae: Setting Screen for the Disturbance Recording Function Setting conditions The current, voltage and frequency thresholds can only be set if the Analogue thresholds box is checked. From the EPAC display The disturbance recording parameters cannot be changed from the display. 5-75 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the ANALOGUE SETTING FOR DISTURBANCE column. 2. The disturbance recording parameters for the analogue channels are displayed. Setting the parameters for disturbance recording on digital signals is described in the sub-section Assigning the Digital Inputs/Outputs. 5-76 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C ASSIGNING THE DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS Description The digital inputs/outputs specific to each function of the EPAC can be assigned to the physical contacts of the IO-1 input/output board and, to the physical contacts of a second IO-1 or IO2 board, if applicable. Allocating the inputs/outputs in this manner allows the signalling interface between the EPAC and the outside to be monitored. Each contact of the input/output boards is associated with a number (refer to Appendix "Input/ Output Connections"). The output contacts are numbered from 01 to 16 and the input contacts are numbered from 01 to 08. Several digital signals can be grouped together on the same contact. In this case the value of the contact corresponds to a logic OR between the signals that have been assigned to it. For instance, Dec A, Dec B and Dec C can be grouped together on the same contact but Dec A and Sel_Phase B cannot. The tripping and closing signals that control the circuit breaker are pre-assigned to the contacts of the IO-1 and IO–2 boards. The same applies to equipment fault contacts. If the fault recording option is integrated into the EPAC, each digital input/output can be configured in the following way: - so that its actions are recorded into the disturbance report, - to start up the fault recording function on low-to-high or high-to-low transition. A signal that is configured to start up the fault recording function is always recorded by the latter. Assigning the Inputs/Outputs From the WinEPAC software The assignable inputs and outputs are divided into several screen pages called grids. There are 2 assignment grids for the inputs and 4 assignment grids for the outputs. They can be accessed via the Inputs and Outputs buttons of the main setting screen. Accessing the input/output assignment grids 1. Click on the Inputs or Outputs button of the EPAC - Configuration screen. 5-77 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Re-assigning an output 2. There are five entry fields to the right of the label of the output to be assigned, as shown in the following figure, (if the corresponding options are present). Figure 5.4af: Assignment Fields of a Digital Output on the PC 3. The first four fields are used to assign the digital signals to the contacts of the IO-1 or IO3 board and of a supplementary IO-1 or IO-3 or IO-2 board (if the latter is installed on the EPAC ). The last field is used to assign the signal to disturbance recording. ! The IO-3 board has been developed for some very specific applications. It is not recognised as such by the EPAC software which will assume it is an IO-1 board. Therefore, when an IO-3 board is used, whether as standard and/or additional board, contacts 14, 15 and 16 are tripping contacts. They must not be assigned any outputs as these would not be taken into account and there would not be any warning from the software Re-assigning an input 4. There are between one and three entry fields to the right of the label of the input to be assigned. 5. The first field is always present and is used to assign the digital signals to the IO-1 or IO3 board. The second field is only present if the supplementary input/output board is installed on the EPAC. It is used to assign the digital signals to this second board. The third field is only present if the disturbance recording option is installed on the EPAC. It is used to activate start-up of disturbance recording on status change, as appropriate. 5-78 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C From the EPAC display The assignable inputs and outputs are divided into two or four groups identified by the options OUT1, OUT2, INP1 and INP2. Option Groups Together OUT1 the assignable outputs on the IO-1 or IO-3 board. OUT2 the assignable outputs on the additional IO-1 or IO-3 or IO2 board. INP1 the assignable inputs on the IO-1 or IO-3 board. INP2 the assignable inputs on the additional IO-1 or IO-3 board. Accessing the input/output assignment options 1. Press the key several times until the CONF option appears on the second line. 2. Select PARA and I/O in that order. The options of the input/output assignment groups are displayed on the second line. Re-assigning an output 1. Select the OUT1 or OUT2 option. The labels of the first three assignable output signals are displayed on the second line. 2. Select the signal to be configured. The current signal allocation is displayed on the second line. Two data input fields are located to the right of the signal label. . / PARA / E/S / OUT1 DecA 00/00 00/00 SET Help Figure 5.4ag: Assignment Fields of a Logic Output on the Display 3. Both fields can be used to assign the signal to two contacts on a board. Re-assigning an input 1. Select the INP1 or INP2 option. The labels of the first three assignable input signals are displayed on the second line. 2. Select the signal to be configured. The present signal assignment is displayed on the second line. A data input field is located to the right of the signal label. 5-79 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software Re-assigning an output 1. To assign outputs to the main IO-1 or IO-3 board, select the OUTPUT CONFIGURATION column. 2. The list of outputs that can be assigned to the main IO-1 or IO-3 board is displayed. Each output label is preceded by DO1 and can be assigned to a contact of the IO-1 or IO-3 board. 3. To assign outputs to the supplementary board, select the OUTPUT CONFIGURATION (2ND BOARD) column. 4. The list of outputs that can be assigned to the supplementary board is displayed. Each output label is preceded by DO2 and can be assigned to a contact of the supplementary board. 5. To assign the signals to disturbance recording, select the OUTPUT SETTING FOR DISTURBANCE column. The possible parameters are: - No: does not start up disturbance recording, - Low to high, - High to low, - No trip. Re-assigning an input 1. To assign inputs to the main IO-1 or IO-3 board, select the INPUT CONFIGURATION column. 2. The list of inputs that can be assigned to the main IO-1 or IO-3 board is displayed. Each input label is preceded by DI1 and can be assigned to a contact of the IO-1 or IO-3 board. 3. To assign inputs to the supplementary board, select the INPUT CONFIGURATION (2ND BOARD) column. 4. The list of inputs that can be assigned to the supplementary board is displayed. Each input label is preceded by DI2 and can be assigned to a contact of the supplementary board. 5. To assign the signals to disturbance recording, select the INPUT SETTING FOR DISTURBANCE column. The possible parameters are: - No: does not start up disturbance recording, - Low to high:, - High to low, - No trip. 5-80 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CHECKING CONFIGURATION CONSISTENCY Description The overall consistency of a configuration is checked if this function is activated. It can be accessed from most of the WinEPAC software screens and can therefore be activated after each setting change. Possible outcomes of a consistency test are: - a positive result, - detection of a minor error, with simple notification to the operator, - detection of a fatal error, with notification to the operator and inhibition of the configuration upload to the EPAC. Checking Consistency From the WinEPAC software 1. icon or press F2. This activates a consistency test on the configuration Click on the (it is carried out automatically when the configuration is transmitted). 2. When the check is finished, the result is displayed in a window, indicating any inconsistencies. Figure 5.4ah: Example of a Consistency Report Minor error : only the faulty function is out of service. Fatal error : the relay goes into maintenance mode and does not protect the line. 5-81 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the EPAC display Consistency is checked when the configuration is transmitted. If an inconsistency is detected, an error message is displayed but the type of error is not indicated. A serious inconsistency results in the transfer being inhibited, whereas a minor one has no repercussions. From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software The software checks input and output consistency automatically. 5-82 EPAC 3100/3500 5.5. MS/M 1.6882-C CHECKING THE RESULTS OF THE ANALOGUE VALUES Changes in the characteristics of the permanent operating electrical network can be viewed in real time approximately every 5 seconds. From the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Measurements button of the EPAC main management screen. The screen displaying the characteristics of the permanent operating electrical network appears. 2. Click on the Start button to restart dynamic display of the measurements. 3. Click on this button to stop dynamic readings every 5 seconds. Figure 5.5a: Example of EPAC Measurements From the EPAC display 1. Press the 2. Select the MES function. 3. The instantaneous characteristics of the network are grouped together in a list and the first two elements displayed. 4. Press the 5. Press the SET key if the display shows the self-test result. or SET key to view other characteristics. key to return to the main menu. 5-83 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 From the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the MEASUREMENTS column. 2. The significant analogue measurements for the network are displayed. 5-84 EPAC 3100/3500 5.6. MS/M 1.6882-C CHECKING THE PROTECTION AND AUTOMATIC CONTROL FUNCTIONS This is the last step of the checking procedure to make sure that the EPAC correctly carries out its functions. In most cases, the following operations are carried out: 5.6.1. - creating electric faults by injecting currents and voltages, - checking that the functions tested react correctly. This is done from one of the user interfaces or from the injection box. Fault Analysis Tools 5.6.1.1. Operation Light Tripping Indication TRIP ALARM RELAY AVAILABLE Figure 5.6a: "Operating Box" Lights The "TRIP" light illuminates when the EPAC trips. Extinguishing the "TRIP" light via the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Events button of the main management screen of the EPAC software. The fault report screen is displayed. 2. Click on the Reset LEDs button. The trip light is extinguished. Extinguishing the "TRIP" light via the EPAC display 1. Select the LEDS option. The trip light is extinguished. Extinguishing the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the FAULT RECORDS column. 2. Assign the value Clear Led=[0] to the FLT Trip Ind parameter. 5-85 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 5.6.1.2. Fault Reports Each time a fault occurs, the EPAC stores the following analogue and logic values characterising the fault: - the value of the phase and voltage currents measured by the EPAC when a fault occurs, - the value of the frequency before the fault, - the tripped phase(s), - the results of the following (if applicable): . phase selection, . convergence of phase with fault in zone characteristic, . fault resistance and distance measurements, - the function that tripped the circuit breaker. These values are grouped together in a report. 10 reports can be kept in the EPAC. When 10 reports are already stored in the EPAC, a new fault report takes the first place, the other reports move down a place in the memory. This new fault report therefore deletes the oldest report. If the EPAC has a local printer connected to its front panel, the fault reports are printed out automatically. 5-86 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Accessing fault reports from the WinEPAC software The WinEPAC software can be used to access the reports stored by the EPAC and those stored on hard disk or diskette. It can also be used to save the reports on hard disk or diskette or to print them. Figure 5.6b: Example of a Fault Report on the PC Accessing fault reports stored by the EPAC 1. Click on the Events button of the main management menu of the EPAC software. The events screen is displayed. 2. Click on the Protection button. The last event that has occurred is displayed. The buttons let you view the other nine events stored. Accessing reports stored on hard disk or diskette 1. Click on the Events button of the main management menu of the EPAC software. The fault report screen is displayed. 2. Click on the Disk button. The window for selecting the saved report is displayed. 3. Select the disk drive and directory in which the required report is stored. 4. Select the name of the required report. The and events. icons can be used to save or to print out 5-87 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Accessing fault reports from the display Only the reports stored by the EPAC are available on the display because no saving unit is associated with this option. 1. If the result of the self-test appears on the display, press the 2. Select the EVEN function. 3. The 10 most recent fault reports can be accessed from the second line of the display. A report is identified by EV followed by its record number. 4. Select the report to be displayed. The fault distance unit displayed is the one selected in the basic configuration parameters. SET key. Accessing fault reports from the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the FAULT RECORD column. 2. Select the FLT Record Sel parameter. 3. Select the number of the fault report required. The characteristics of the fault selected are displayed. Deleting the fault reports via the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Events button of the main management screen of the EPAC software. The fault report screen is displayed. 2. Click on the Efface Events button. The fault reports recorded by the protection device are deleted when the password is entered. Deleting the fault reports via the WinEPAC display 1. Select the EVEN option, then the EFF option. 2. The fault reports recorded by the protection device are deleted when the password is entered. Deleting the fault reports via the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software 1. Select the FAULT RECORDS column. 2. Assign the value Clear Rec = [0] to the FLT FAULTS parameter. The fault reports recorded by the protection device are deleted when the password is entered. 5-88 EPAC 3100/3500 5.6.2. MS/M 1.6882-C Functional Tests 5.6.2.1. Fault Simulation Principles Simulating a single-phase fault: The remote protection detects a single-phase fault in E if the impedance and phase of this point place it inside the characteristic. The relation of the impedance and phase compared with the injected voltage and current is the following: - Fault Impedance = Vphase/Iphase, - Fault Phase = phase-shift (Vphase,Iphase), - the Vphase voltage must remain lower than the rated voltage. To simulate a fault in a zone, the current must be made to vary gradually so that the point moves inside the desired zone. Simulating a two-phase fault: The principle of the two-phase fault simulation is the same as the principle for simulating a singlephase fault, with the following differences: - the reference voltage is the line to line voltage between phases, for example Uab, - the reference current is the difference between phase currents, for example Ia - Ib, - fault impedance = (Uphase-phase/(Iphase1 - Iphase2)). Distance X Xlim Z E -Rlim ϕ Resistance R Rlim -Xlim Figure 5.6c: Determining a Characteristic Point 5-89 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 5.6.2.2. Plotting the Start-Up Characteristics Checking the Characteristic for a Single-Phase Fault 1. Energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults. 2. Vary the current so that the ratio between V and I of Rlim, the phase-shift between V and I should be 0°. 3. Check that the tripping order is sent after the T1 time delay has expired. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other limit points of the characteristic by referring to table 5.6e and figure 5.6f. Any other characteristic point can be tested once the impedance and phase-shift between U and I has been calculated. Point I, V Phase-Shift Tripping Time R1B 0° R1M 0° T1 R2 0° T2 R3 0° T3 Rlim 0° T4 X1 +90° T1 X2 +90° T2 X3 +90° T3 X4 +90° T4 X5 -90° T4 T1 Table 5.6d: Parameters of the Zone to be Tested If a tester generating transient current values of over 0.2 In is used when a fault condition is generated, an error can occur in the directional calculation with the high-speed algorithms. This is because the test boxes never reflect the real fault appearance conditions during the fault condition. To prevent this from interfering with verification of the startup zones, you are advised to inhibit the high-speed algorithms by setting T1 to 50 ms when setting zones (highspeed algorithms cannot be used over 40 ms). This situation arises with the digital injection boxes. For further details, see the documentation for these injection boxes. 5-90 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C X4 Zone 4 (T4) X3 Zone 3 (T3) X2 X1 Zone 2 (T2) K01 Zone 1 (T1) R1B R1M -Rlim R2 R3 Rlim Zone 5 (T5) X5 Figure 5.6e: Limit Points of the Characteristic to be Tested Checking the characteristic for a two-phase fault Repeat the same tests as before, but with the following differences: - the reference voltage is the line to line voltage between phases, for example Uab, - the reference current is the difference between the phase currents, for example Ia - Ib, - the fault impedance = (Uphase-phase/(Iphase1 - Iphase2)), - the R1M point is replaced by the R1B point. 5.6.2.3. Testing the Operation of the Protection in Teleaction Mode Testing teleaction modes 1. Select the first mode in table 5.6g from the WinEPAC. 2. Create the fault indicated in the second column of the table, the teleaction input is activated. 3. Check that the tripping contact is activated after the time delay given in column 3 has expired. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 but de-activate the teleaction input and check the time delay given in the 4th column of the table. 5-91 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for faults in other zones and check that the time delays associated with each zone are not changed whatever the status of the teleaction input. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 for all the teleaction modes indicated in the table. Teleaction Mode Fault to be Created Time-Delay to be with Teleaction Time-Delay to be without Teleaction Accelerated underreach mode in zone 2 T1 < t < T1 + 40 ms. T2 < t < T2 + 40 ms. Permissive Overreach mode in zone 1 T1 < t < T1 + 40 ms. T2 < t < T2 + 40 ms. Blocking underreach mode in zone 2 T2 < t < T2 + 40 ms. TT < t < TT + 40 ms. Blocking overreach mode in zone 1 T2 < t < T2 + 40 ms. TT < t < TT + 40 ms. Permissive underreach mode all zones T1 < t < T1 + 40 ms. Step time delay associated with the zone Table 5.6f: Teleaction Test T1: time delay of step 1 T2: time delay of step 2 TT: time delay of transmission Testing the weak infeed mode 1. Do the following using WinEPAC: - put the weak-infeed mode into service, - inhibit the voltage drop acceptance and the tripping authorization. 2. Activate the teleaction input. 3. Check the following: - the teleaction transmission signal is activated, - the tripping contact is not activated. 4. Confirm three-phase tripping authorization using WinEPAC. 5. Activate the teleaction input. 6. Check the following: - the teleaction transmission signal is activated, - the closing of tripping contacts. 5-92 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 7. Confirm the voltage drop acceptance using WinEPAC, regulate the threshold to 0.4 VN and VB = -VC = VN, validate the authorisation of monophase tripping. 8. Activate the teleaction input. 9. Check the following: - the teleaction transmission signal is activated, - the protection trips monophase phase A. 5.6.2.4. Testing the Operation of the Protection when a Fuse failure 1. Energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults: - Vn phase voltages, - In phase currents 2. Cut the power supply from phase A. 3. Check the following: - the fuse failure signal is activated after the time delay signals, - the tripping and protection start-up signals are not activated. 4. Re-energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults. 5. Cut the power supply from phase A and create a fault that has a fault current higher than the programmed threshold. 6. Check that the tripping contact is activated. 5.6.2.5. Test of the Overload Protection EDF-type overload protection, with 3 constant current thresholds. 1. Energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults: - Vn phase voltages, - In phase currents. 2. Set S1, S2 and S3 time delays to 20 mn, 10 mn and 20 s. 3. Increase one of the phase current inputs until it is between I1 and I2. 4. Check that the MaxI alarm signal is activated. 5. Check that the three-phase tripping contact is activated after 20 mn. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 but increase the current until it is between I2 and I3 and check that the tripping occurs after 10 mn. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 5 but increase the current until it is higher than I3 and check that the tripping occurs after 20 secs. 8. Repeat steps 1 to 3. When the MaxI alarm signal is activated, reduce the current to 0.9I1 and check that the MaxI alarm signal is no longer activated. 5-93 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Inverse time overload protection 1. Energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults: - Vn phase voltages, - In phase currents. 2. Increase one of the phase current inputs until Ir/Ithreshold is equal to 1.5. 3. Check that the tripping contact is activated after a given time delay that is determined from the IEC and ANSI curves given in the appendix. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for the Ir/Ithreshold values 5 and 10. 5.6.2.6. Undervoltage Protection Test 1. Activate the circuit-breaker Position Input. 2. Energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults: - Vn phase voltages, - In phase currents. 3. Reduce one of the phase voltages until it is equal to 90% of the configured MinU threshold. 4. Check that the MinU alarm signal is activated. 5. Check that the tripping contact is activated after the configured time delay has expired. 6. Repeat steps 1 and 2 then increase the phase voltage until it reaches Vn. 7. Check that the MinU alarm signal is no longer activated. 8. Position the Circuit Breaker Position input to 0. 9. Repeat steps 2 to 4 then check that the tripping contact is not activated. 5.6.2.7. Overvoltage Protection Test 1. Energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults: - Vn phase voltages, - In phase currents. 2. Increase one of the phase voltages until it is equal to 110% of the configured MaxU threshold. 3. Check that the MinU alarm signal is activated when the configured time delay expires. 4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 then reduce the phase voltage until it reaches Vn. 5. Check that the MaxU alarm signal is not activated. 5-94 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 5.6.2.8. DEF Protection Test Directional Comparison Protection 1. 2. Energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults: - Vn phase voltages, - In phase currents. Increase the phase A current and decrease the phase A voltage input so that a residual current and a residual voltage are created that are greater than the configurable Ir and Vr thresholds. The variations in current and voltage must not start-up the distance protection device. Check that the distance protection start-up signal is not activated. 3. Activate the teleaction input(s) required, depending on the teleaction configuration of the directional comparison protection device. 4. Check that the following signals are activated when the time delay associated with the directional comparison protection device has expired: - Tripping by additional protection, - Tripping A, - Teleaction Transmission. 5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 but simulate a B single-phase fault then a C single-phase fault. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 but simulate a resistive three-phase fault and check that the tripping contact is activated. 7. Simulate a reverse resistive fault and check that the protection does not trip. The current threshold for a reverse resistive fault is 0.6 Ir. Inverse time, zero sequence current protection 1. 2. Carry out the following operations using the WinEPAC software: - deactivate the directional comparison protection, - activate the current backup protection, - select either the IEC or ANSI curve. Energize the EPAC from a network that is unaffected by faults: - Vn phase voltages, - In phase currents. 5-95 MS/M 1.6882-C 3. EPAC 3100/3500 Increase the phase A current input. The variations in current must not start-up the distance protection device. Make sure that the remote protection start-up signal is not activated. 4. Check that the tripping contact is activated after a time delay expires for different values of Ir/Ithreshold. This time delay is determined from the selected IEC or ANSI curve with the configured operating time added. Test of the inverse time, zero sequence power protection 1. Repeat the inverse time, negative sequence current protection test but select the zero sequence power protection and check the time delays in accordance with the following equation: Tripping time = 0.2 x P(So/Sr) + Tfon where: So = 10 x Ua; Sr = Ur x Ir P = Configured multiplier factor Tfon = Configured operating time delay 5.6.2.9. Automatic Recloser Control Test and Check synchronising General recloser operation 1. Carry out the following operations using the WinEPAC software: - put the recloser automatic control device into service, - select single-phase reclosing mode on single-phase tripping, - select three-phase reclosing mode on three-phase tripping. 2. Simulate an A single-phase fault in zone 1 (refer to the distance protection test). 3. Check that the "1 pole reclosing cycle in progress" signal is activated. 4. Check that the associated dead time comply with the configured time delays. These time delays are checked by observing the status of the following signals: - cycle in progress (three-phase or mono-phase), - circuit-breaker closing, - blocking. ! The duration of a tripping signal must be lower than 300 ms. Otherwise, the reclosing cycles are locked. 5-96 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Disabling the recloser 1. Activate the "Auto-recloser disabled" input. 2. Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the previous test and check that the recloser is inhibited. Fault on manual closing 1. Activate the "Manual reclosing" input for 1 sec. (time delay for blocking > 1 sec.). 2. Simulate a single-phase fault during the blocking time delay. 3. Check the following: - the circuit breaker is definitively tripped in three phase mode, - the recloser locking signal is activated. Fault during a single-phase cycle 1. Simulate a single-phase fault. 2. During the single-phase high-speed cycle, simulate a fault on the two phases that are unaffected by faults. 3. Check the following: - the ARL single-phase cycle signal is not activated, - the ARL three-phase cycle signal is activated. Poles discrepancy 1. Simulate a single-phase fault. 2. Deactivate the "poles discrepancy" input during the single-phase high-speed cycle. 3. Check the following: - the ARL single-phase cycle signal is no longer activated, - the ARL three-phase cycle signal is activated. Recloser Blocking 1. Simulate a single-phase fault. 2. Activate the "Auto-recloser low pressure" input during the high-speed single-phase cycle. 3. Check the following: 4. - the 1-pole reclosing cycle in progress signal is no longer activated, - the auto-recloser blocking signal is activated. Repeat steps 1 to 3 but check that the recloser is blocked when the "Reclosing impossible" input is activated. 5-97 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Zone reach control 1. Enable the "carrier receive" input. 2. Simulate a zone 2 single-phase fault. 3. Check that the protection trips when T1 expires. Auto-recloser blocked at T2 1. Simulate a single-phase fault in zone 2 for tripping at T2. 2. Check the following: - the tripping contact is activated, - no reclosing cycle is activated, - the autorecloser blocking contact is activated. Live busbar, dead line mode test 1. Carry out the following operations using WinEPAC: - disable the auto-recloser, - put the check synchronising in service with this mode. 2. Inject a busbar voltage that is greater than the configured voltage presence threshold, and a line voltage less than the voltage absence threshold. 3. Check that the "Auto-recloser enabled by synchro-check" signal is activated after 100 ms. Dead busbar, live line mode test 1. 2. Repeat the same operations as for the previous test, but with the following differences: - put the check synchronising into service, - inject a line voltage that is greater than the configured voltage presence threshold and a bar voltage that is less than the voltage absence threshold. Verify that at the end of 100 ms, the signal "Auto-recloser enabled by synchro-check" is activated. Live busbar, live line mode test 1. Carry out the following operations using WinEPAC: - disable the auto-recloser, - enable the check synchronising. 2. Inject a busbar voltage and a line voltage that are greater than the configured thresholds. The difference in amplitude, phase and frequency between the two voltages must be less than the configured thresholds. 3. Check that after the settable time delay has expired, the "Auto-recloser enabled by synchro-check"signal is activated. 5-98 EPAC 3100/3500 4. MS/M 1.6882-C Repeat steps 2 and 3 but check that if there is a difference in amplitude, phase or frequency between the line and busbar voltages, the check synchronising conditions are not verified and the "Auto-recloser enabled by synchro-check" signal is inhibited. Test of live busbar/dead line, dead busbar/live line, live busbar/live line mode 1. Select live busbar/dead line, dead busbar/live line, live busbar/live line mode. 2. Repeat the three previous tests. Test of auto reclose - voltage check synchronising co-ordinated operation 1. Repeat the tests carried out for the auto recloser but by injecting the busbar and line voltages so as to obtain the "Auto-recloser enabled by synchro-check" signal in compliance with the selected voltage synchronising check mode. 2. Check that the "Auto-recloser enabled by synchro-check" signal during a slow cycle is accepted. 5.6.2.10. Fault Locator Test 1. If the Locator option is integrated into the EPAC, put it into service. 2. If an EPAC is located on a double line, energize the UTMH analogue input from a BCH case. 3. Simulate the solid single-phase and resistive single-phase faults as well as the solid twophase and solid resistive two-phase and solid three-phase faults for fault positions at 20%, 50%, 80% and 100% of the line. 4. Using WinEPAC, check the accuracy of the values recorded by the fault locator. If the locator option is in service, the accuracy of the remote measurement should be better than 3% with a minimum error of 400 meters. The relay indicates by (L) if the result is provided by the fault locator. MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 6-1 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 CONTENTS PAGE 6.1. 6.1.1. 6.1.2. ANALYSING THE RESULTS OF THE SELF-TESTS _____________________________________ 6-4 Maintenance Lights __________________________________________________________ 6-4 Maintenance Dialogue ________________________________________________________ 6-6 6.2. 6.2.1. 6.2.2. 6.2.3. 6.2.4. 6.2.5. COMPLEMENTARY TESTS TO THE SELF-TEST ______________________________________ 6-14 Fast Check _________________________________________________________________ 6-14 Checking the Connections _____________________________________________________ 6-14 Tests for Checking the Active Operation of the Inputs and Outputs __________________ 6-15 Checking the Contacts of the Logic Inputs _______________________________________ 6-15 Checking the Tripping Contacts and the Signalling Contacts ________________________ 6-16 6.3. 6.3.1. 6.3.2. 6.3.3. 6.3.4. 6.3.5. 6.3.6. 6.3.7. 6.3.8. REPAIRING THE BOARDS _____________________________________________________ 6-18 Repairing the Converter Board ________________________________________________ 6-19 Repairing the TMS Board _____________________________________________________ 6-21 Repairing the QTF Board _____________________________________________________ 6-22 Repairing the main IO-1 or IO-3 Board _________________________________________ 6-24 Repairing the additional IO-1, IO-3, or IO-2 board _______________________________ 6-25 Repairing the AC Board ______________________________________________________ 6-26 Repairing one of the daughter boards of the AC Board ____________________________ 6-27 Repairing the IRIG-B board ___________________________________________________ 6-28 6-2 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE 6-3 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 This chapter describes the maintenance tools and procedures used with the EPAC. In particular, it describes the corrective maintenance required by the equipment because: - the self-tests that are carried out regularly and on start-up automatically check that the equipment is operating correctly, - there is no need to implement preventive corrective action or replacements because the EPAC does not contain any components that age rapidly. The first part describes the analysis of the fault reports for faults that were detected by the selftest, and in particular how the hexadecimal codes characterising these faults are interpreted. The way these reports are accessed from the user interfaces is also described. The second part describes the additional tests used to check the functions that were not tested by the EPAC self-test. The third part describes the procedures for repairing the different boards of the EPAC. Obviously, these procedures should only be implemented if a failure is detected by the self-test and if the analysis of the corresponding report has allowed the faulty board to be accurately identified. 6-4 EPAC 3100/3500 6.1. MS/M 1.6882-B ANALYSING THE RESULTS OF THE SELF-TESTS The EPAC self-tests check the operation of 90% of the active components. They detect the majority of faults that can affect the EPAC. If the equipment fault, non-urgent alarm and urgent alarm signalling contacts are connected to a monitoring system, any failure detected by the EPAC is indicated to the user. If the signalling contacts are not connected to a monitoring system, it is wise to regularly check the condition of the EPAC. A fault detected by the self-test must be acknowledged from one of the user interfaces, in order to stop the alarm. If a fault shuts down the functions of the EPAC, the following happens: - the equipment fault alarm is activated, - the major fault alarm is activated if the product is in maintenance mode (the micro-processor is still in service). Some anomalies can block the operation of the program and may only cause the equipment fault alarm to be activated. 6.1.1. Maintenance Lights The maintenance lights on the front panel of the EPAC 3100/3500 indicate the following information: - urgent and non urgent failure, a major fault that causes the EPAC to shut down, - the status of the EPAC. In normal operating mode, the "RELAY AVAILABLE" light must flash and the "ALARM" light must be off. Minor and major alarm indication Correct operation indication TRIP ALARM RELAY AVAILABLE Figure 6.1a: "Maintenance Box" Lights 6-5 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 If the "RELAY AVAILABLE" light is not on: 1. Check the power supply voltage. 2. If the power supply voltage is faulty, energize the converter correctly. 3. If the power supply voltage is correct, the voltages at the converter output are not correct. Open the EPAC front panel. 4. Check the status of the converter lights located on the top right-hand side. If the EPAC is equipped with a Melcher(1): In normal operation, the green light is on. The red lights indicate power supply or voltage faults. OUTPUT OK i Ut I oL 1 2 MELCHER Figure 6.1b: The Melcher Module Lights Red light is on if i the power supply is insufficient. 1 the load is too high on the 5 V. 2 the load is too high on the 12 V. If the EPAC is equipped with an SEB(1): In normal operation, the green light is on. 5. (1) If the converter lights cannot be used to identify the fault, the voltages of the following equipment items should be checked: - the ribbon cable connectors of the TMS board, - the Converter board output connector. 6. If one of the voltages is absent, remove the boards one after another and test the voltages each time you remove a board. 7. If you remove a board and the power supply fault signal is cleared, replace the board with another one. Melcher and Seb are the names of converter manufacturers. 6-6 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B 8. If no board has a power supply fault, check that there is no short circuit between the power supply tracks on the back panel bus. 9. If the isolation is faulty, change the rack. 10. If the isolation is correct, replace the converter board with another one. TMS Board Ribbon Ribbon Cable Connector Pin Voltage to be Checked Pins of the Output Connector of the Converter Board Voltage to be Checked 1 +12V A3, B3, C3 +12V 2 +12V A4, B4, C4 +12V 3 +12V A5, B5, C5 +12V 4 +12V A6, B6, C6 +12V 5 0V A8, B8, C8 0V 6 0V A9, B9, C9 0V 7 +5V A10, B10, C10 0V 8 +5V A11, B11, C11 0V 9 +5V A13, B13, C13 +5V 10 +5V A14, B14, C14 A15, B15, C15 A16, B16, C16 +5V +5V +5V The following operations should be carried out if the "ALARM" light is on: The failure type and its severity must be accurately identified before carrying out any work on the board. This information is recorded in a fault report that can be accessed from the maintenance dialogue. This dialogue is described in the following sub-division. 6.1.2. Maintenance Dialogue The EPAC maintenance dialogue is used for the following operations: - to acknowledge a failure detected by the self-test so that the EPAC stops operating in downgraded (maintenance) mode, - to display a fault report. When a failure is detected by the self-test, the EPAC automatically records the characteristic values of the fault in a report. This report accurately identifies a failure. It can be displayed using the WinEPAC software or using the front panel display. 6-7 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 The fault report contains the following information: - the board(s) detected as faulty by the self-test, - the severity of the failure, - the type of failure, - the error word associated with the fault (this error word is reserved for the expert assessment). This data is in hexadecimal code. The encoding system minimises the memory space taken up by a report and thus lets the EPAC keep up to 10 control reports of the product. 6.1.2.1. Encoding the Maintenance Data Encoding the Faulty Boards Hexadecimal Code Faulty Board COURIER Message 0 None 1 UC-TMS EP 2 IO-1or IO-3 IO-1 4 IO-2 or IO-1 or IO-3 IO-2 10 AFF LDU 20 COM (not used on the EPAC ) COM 40 AC or one of its daughter boards AC 80 IRIG-B IRIGB If several boards are detected as being faulty, their codes are added together. For example, if the AFF and the UC-TMS boards are faulty, the resulting code is 11. If an input/output board is faulty, EPAC will indicate that the fault might result from the I0 board or the TMS board. Encoding the Severity of the Failure By adding together corresponding codes, the severity code of the failure gives the following information: - when the fault was detected, - the severity of the fault, - the cyclical repetition of the fault - if any. 6-8 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Hexadecimal Code Failure COURIER Message 1 detected when the EPAC is initialised INIT Detection 2 detected during operation BGND 4 major causing the EPAC to shut down Major (ERROR) 8 minor causing operation in downgraded mode Minor (Warning) 10 repetitive dt<cons Encoding the Fault Type 5 hexadecimal codes accurately define the type of fault detected by the self-test. The maintenance action that should be carried out on the EPAC is limited to level 1 maintenance (replacing the board, fuse, etc). This type of fault code is used by the technicians of GEC ALSTHOM T&D P&C in particular, who will repair any faulty boards. Only some codes indicate the problems that can be solved with level 1 maintenance without having to replace a board. The list of fault type codes is given in the appendix. An asterisk indicates those codes that are used for level 1 maintenance. If a faulty board needs to be returned to the product support department of GEC ALSTHOM T&D P&C for repairs, enclose all the codes identifying the failure with the returned equipment. 6.1.2.2. Using the Maintenance Dialogue with the WinEPAC Software Activating the maintenance dialogue 1. If WinEPAC is not activated: 1a. Click on the icon. The software is loaded into memory. After a few mo- ments, the main menu is displayed. 1b. 2. Click on the EPAC button. Click on the Maintenance button. The current status of the EPAC is displayed in a dialogue box. 6-9 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 Figure 6.1c: Protection Status Window Acknowledging faults detected by the protection device 1. Click on the Acknowledge button. The PC tries to communicate with the EPAC. If the communication between the equipments is correct, the current fault can be acknowledged. The protection device runs a complete self-test. If the fault is acknowledged, the EPAC replies "Protection OK". If not, the error code indicates the nature of the fault. Alarms must be systematically acknowledged when any fault is detected by the product or after any repair. Displaying fault reports stored in memory in the EPAC 1. Select the Reports option. The last report stored in the EPAC memory is displayed. The report reference is given by a record number indicated in the zone at the top right of the window. 6-10 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Figure 6.1d: Example of a Fault Report 2. To acknowledge the last fault, click on the Acknowledge button. The password is then requested. 3. Accessing other reports: Click on button to access the next report. the previous report. the last report. the first report. If the EPAC does not have the AC board option, the date will not be saved if there is a break in the auxiliary power supply. In this case, you may find record numbers with the wrong dates. When the EPAC carries out a complete initialisation self-test without detecting any anomalies, the test result is saved as a fault report. This report indicates: - faulty board: code 0, - seriousness of fault: code 1, - fault type 1: code 40, - other fault types: code 0. 6-11 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 Deleting the fault reports via the WinEPAC software 1. Click on the Maintenance button of the main management screen. The main maintenance screen is displayed. 2. Click on the Reset Self-tests button. The fault reports recorded by the protection device are deleted when the password is entered. Changing the date and time of the EPAC 1. From the main management screen, click on the Commands button. The main order screen appears. 2. Click on the Date button. The setting screen for the date and time appears. 6.1.2.3. Using the Maintenance Dialogue from the Display The protection status is displayed by default on the second line of the display several minutes after the keyboard keys below the display were last used. EPAC 3000 "Version" PROTECTION OK SET Help Figure 6.1e: Display of the Protection Status on the Front Panel Activating the maintenance dialogue 1. If the protection status is displayed, press the 2. Select MAINT. SET key. The DATE, ACQ, LIST and EFF options are displayed on the second line. Displaying the fault reports 1. Select LIST. The labels of the last ten reports are available on the second line. Each label contains Df followed by its number between 1 and 10. 2. Select the label of the report to be displayed. 3. The fault characteristics are grouped together in a list, the first two elements of which are displayed. 6-12 EPAC 3100/3500 4. Press the 5. Press the MS/M 1.6882-B and SET keys to display the other fault characteristics. key to return to the main menu. Acknowledging a failure 1. Select the ACQU option. If the password has not already been typed in with the PASS INPUT option, a message prompts the user to type in the password. If the password is correct the current fault can be acknowledged. The protection device runs a complete self-test. If the fault is acknowledged, the EPAC replies "Protection OK". If not, the error code must be analysed. Alarms must be systematically acknowledged after the detection of any fault or after any repair. Deleting the fault reports via the EPAC display 1. Select the MAIN option, then the EFF option. 2. The fault reports recorded by the protection device are deleted when the password is entered. Changing the time reference of the EPAC 1. Select the DATE option. The Date and Time options are displayed on the second line. 2. Select the Time option. 3. Enter the new time. 4. Once the option has been changed, press the 5. Press the SET key. key. The new time is automatically transmitted to the EPAC. Changing the date reference of the EPAC 1. Select the DATE option. The Date and Time options are displayed on the second line. 2. Select the Date option. 3. Enter the new date. 4. Once the option has been changed, press the 5. Press the SET key. key. The new date is automatically transmitted to the EPAC. 6-13 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 6.1.2.4. Using the Maintenance Dialogue from the Protection Access Software & Toolkit software Acknowledging a fault 1. Select the MAINTENANCE DATA column. 2. Assign the value Reset = [0] to the Alarms Ind parameter. Deleting the fault reports via the Protection Access & Toolkit software 1. Select the MAINTENANCE DATA column. 2. Assign the value Clear Rec = [0] to the Maint. parameter. The fault reports recorded by the protection device are deleted when the password is entered. Changing the date and time of the EPAC 1. Select the USER CONTROLS column. 2. Set the RLY RealTime parameter to the date and time. Alarms must be systematically acknowledged when any fault is detected by the product or after any repair. 6-14 EPAC 3100/3500 6.2. MS/M 1.6882-B COMPLEMENTARY TESTS TO THE SELF-TEST The aim of these tests is to check the elements that are not covered by the self-test because they are located on the periphery of the EPAC. The following elements are mainly concerned: 6.2.1. 6.2.2. - the primary windings of the input transformers, - the contacts of the IO board relays, - the connections for the analog and logic signals, - the connected inputs-outputs. Fast Check 1. Connect the EPAC to a three-phase injection box. 2. Energise the EPAC with 3 voltages unaffected by faults, with VN amplitudes, and 3 currents in phase with In amplitudes. 3. Check in the WinEPAC Measurements window that: - the phase voltages are between 0.90 Vn and 1.10 Vn; - the phase currents are between 0.9 In and 1.1 In; - the active power values are between 0.9 Pn and 1.1 Pn. 4. Energise the EPAC with 3 voltages unaffected by faults, with VN amplitudes, and 3 currents in antiphase with In amplitudes. 5. Check in the WinEPAC Measurements window that: - the phase voltages are between 0.9 Vn and 1.1 Vn; - the phase currents are between 0.9 In and 1.1 In; - the active power values are between -0.9 Pn and -1.1 Pn. 6. Polarise the 8 digital inputs of the IO-1 or IO-3 board and check in the Measurements window that the DI’s of the IO-1 or IO-3 board are set to 1. 7. Polarise the 8 digital inputs of the (optional) supplementary IO-1 or IO-3 board and check in the Measurements window that the DI’s of the supplementary IO-1 or IO-3 board are set to 1. 8. Assign the Unlock Transmission output to DO no. 1 of the main (IO-1 or IO-3) board (associated with reduced range mode and acceleration) and check in the Measurements window that bit no. 1 of the main board in the contacts representation field is set to 1. 9. Repeat this operation for the other contacts of the main board and, if appropriate, for those of the additional board contacts. Checking the Connections 1. Cut the power supply from the EPAC. 2. Check the electrical continuity of the EPAC primary windings. 3. Remove the connectors from the EPAC. 4. Check that the 9/10 (for the main IO-1 or IO-3 board) and/or 15/16 (for the additional IO board) equipment fault contacts of the X6 connector are closed. 6-15 MS/M 1.6882-B 5. 6.2.3. EPAC 3100/3500 Check the status of the connector pins. Tests for Checking the Active Operation of the Inputs and Outputs These tests complete the results of the self-test. The protection device operates in real values when injection devices are used. The procedure depends on the way in which the protection device has been configured. This configuration should not be changed. The following operations are necessary to make sure that the step 1 or 2 trippings are singlephase: 6.2.4. - a voltage before the fault should be simulated, - the module (magnitude) and/or argument (angle) of this voltage should vary when the fault occurs. Checking the Contacts of the Logic Inputs The following procedures are used to check that the EPAC behaves correctly when it receives logic orders. The following operations are necessary to check these contacts: - program all the inputs with a function whose effects can be easily checked and repeat the procedure for all the inputs then re-load the former assignments, or, - check all the programmed inputs without modifying the configuration. Protection Locking Reception Input Test 1. Set the Protection Locking input to the high level. 2. Simulate a fault in zone 1. 3. Make sure that the EPAC does not trip. Ordinary three-phase tripping input test This test should only be carried out if the tripping in zone 1 is configured as single-phase tripping. 1. Activate the ordinary three-phase tripping input. 2. Simulate a single-phase fault in zone 1. 3. Check that the EPAC transmits a tripping order in three-phase mode. Teleaction Reception Input Test Do not perform this test if the EPAC is programmed in "No Teleaction" mode. 1. Simulate a fault in zone 2 if the EPAC is in reduced range (underreach) mode. 6-16 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B 2. Simulate a fault in zone 1 if the EPAC is programmed in extended range (overreach) mode. 3. Put the Teleaction Reception input to the high level less than 10 ms after the fault occurs. 4. Tripping must occur in step 2 if the EPAC is programmed in locking mode. 5. Tripping must occur in step 1 if the EPAC is programmed in permissive overreach or acceleration mode. Carrier Presence Input Test This test should only be performed if the EPAC is programmed in "Unlocking" or "HF acceptance" mode. 6.2.5. 1. Put the Teleaction Reception input to the low level and the Carrier Presence input to the high level. 2. Simulate a fault in zone 2. 3. Put the carrier presence input to the low level less than 100 ms after the fault occurs. 4. Check that the EPAC trips in step 1. Checking the Tripping Contacts and the Signalling Contacts The following procedures are used to check that the tripping contacts and signalling contacts behave correctly. The following operations should be performed in order to check the contacts: - program the signalling contacts with a meaning that is easy to generate and repeat the procedure for all the contacts, then re-load the former assignments, or, - check the contacts without modifying the parameters. Testing the contacts associated with a phase A (B, C) single-phase fault in zone 1 1. Simulate a phase A (B, C) single-phase fault in zone 1. 2. Check that the following contacts are activated: - Phase A (B,C) tripping, - Phase A (B, C) tripping signal, - Tripping signal, - A (B,C) selection, - Start-Up, - Zone 1, - Forward directional, - Single-phase fault, - Teleaction transmission (if programmed), - Additional transmission (if programmed), 6-17 MS/M 1.6882-B - EPAC 3100/3500 Tee line teleaction transmission (if programmed). Testing the contacts associated with a two-phase fault in zone 2 with teleaction reception 1. Simulate a two-phase fault in zone 2. 2. Position the Teleaction Reception input to the high level. 3. Check that the following contacts are activated: - Multiphase Fault, - Zone 2. Testing the contacts associated with a two-phase fault in zone 3 1. Simulate a two-phase fault in zone 2. 2. Check that the following contacts are activated: - Multiphase Fault, - ARL Locking. Testing the contacts associated with a two-phase fault in zone 5 1. Simulate a two-phase fault in zone 5. 2. Check that the following contacts are activated: - Zone 5, - Reverse Directional. Testing the contacts associated with a fuse blow 1. Energize the protection device with a balanced load current and with two voltages only. 2. Check that the Fuse Blow contact is activated. 6-18 EPAC 3100/3500 6.3. MS/M 1.6882-B REPAIRING THE BOARDS This sub-division describes the first-degree maintenance operations that can be carried out on the EPAC. These maintenance operations are limited to checking the type of contacts and replacing the faulty modules. These maintenance operations should only be implemented after the faulty board has been accurately isolated using the fault report, as described in the previous sub-section. Before repairing the module 1. Check the condition of the connector contacts and the components mounted on the base. 2. Check that the boards are correctly inserted into the corresponding guides. 3. Re-energize the EPAC after completing these checks. 4. Check the operation of the dubious module. After repairing the module 1. Install an operational module. 2. Check all the module connections. 3. Re-energize the EPAC. 4. Check the operation of the dubious module by carrying out the start-up tests relevant to the module. These tests are described in the chapter entitled "Commissioning". ! To open the front panel: - Locate screw on right side of panel. - Turn carefully a quarter anti-clockwise (left). The panel will open. 6-19 MS/M 1.6882-B 6.3.1. EPAC 3100/3500 Repairing the Converter Board The converter is located on the top right-hand side of the rack. Repairing the Melcher converter 1. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. 2. Open the front panel. 3. Use an extractor to remove the converter board from its support by sliding it forwards on the guides. 4. Check the fuse protecting the power supply located on the board. 5. If the fuse is "blown", replace it and check that the power supply corresponds to the converter power supply (5A slo-blo). 6. A second 3.15 A "slo-blo" fuse is located in the converter. Perform the following operations to get access to this fuse: 7. - unscrew the four screws located on the other side of the board, - carefully remove the converter, - remove the fuse by unscrewing the knob on the opposite side to the lights. If the problem is not caused by the fuses, replace the converter board. Fuse Converter + + + Figure 6.3a: Side Face of the Melcher Converter Board 6-20 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B Repairing the SEB converter 1. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. 2. Open the front panel. 3. Use an extractor to remove the converter board from its support by sliding it forwards on the guides. 4. Check that the power supply level on the JP2-JP3 plate corresponds to the actual power supply of the EPAC. 5. Check the fuse protecting the power supply on the board. 6. If the fuse has "blown", replace it and check that the power supply value corresponds to the converter power supply (5A "slo-blo"). 7. If the problem is not caused by the fuse or by a faulty power supply to the EPAC, replace the converter board. JP3 JP2 Fuse 48/60 V 220/250 V 110/125 V Figure 6.3b: Side Face of the SEB Converter Board 6-21 MS/M 1.6882-B 6.3.2. EPAC 3100/3500 Repairing the TMS Board The TMS board is the first board from the top. Procedure: 1. 2. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. Open the front panel. 3. Detach the TMS board from the analog board by disconnecting the ribbon cable connectors connecting it to the IO-1 (or IO-3) and QTF boards. The plugs are held in place by two hooks that should be released before they are removed. 4. Use an extractor to remove the TMS board by sliding it on its guides. 5. Check the position of the jumpers. These jumpers determine the memory plane of the central processing unit. 6. Check that the components mounted on the base are correctly inserted. 7. If the problem persists after all these checks have been carried out, replace the board and check the position of the address jumpers on the new board. ST12 ST6 ST11 S100 D3 D25 D26 D29 D30 D27 D28 Jumpers D4 S400 S101 ST1 ST13 S402 S102 ST2 ST5 S104 tp1 D15 D35 D11 D14 D16 D34 tp2 D12 S103 D17 Figure 6.3c: Side Face of the TMS Board 6-22 EPAC 3100/3500 Repairing the QTF Board The QTF board is the first board from the bottom. Procedure: 1. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. 2. Disconnect the I and U analog inputs, making sure that the necessary precautions have been taken. 3. Open the front panel. 4. Detach the QTF board from the TMS board by disconnecting the cable connector located to the left. The plug is held in place by two hooks. 5. Unscrew the three screws located on the rear panel. 6. Use an extractor to remove the QTF board by sliding it forward on its guides. 7. Verify that all the pin straps are closed. 8. If the problem is not caused by the straps, replace the QTF board and check the position of the pin straps on the new board. S7 S5 S8 S6 S2 S1 Pin strap S9 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A U 5A U U S3 U U S4 U U 6.3.3. MS/M 1.6882-B U Figure 6.3d: QTF Board Rear Panel and Side Face without zero sequence current transformer 6-23 MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 S7 S8 S6 S2 S1 S5 Pin strap S9 S4 S3 5A 5A 5A 5A U U U U 5A 5A 5A 5A U U U U Figure 6.3e: QTF Board Rear Panel and Side Face with zero sequence current transformer 6-24 EPAC 3100/3500 6.3.4. MS/M 1.6882-B Repairing the main IO-1 or IO-3 Board The IO-1 or IO-3 board is the second board from the top. Procedure: 1. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. 2. Open the front panel. 3. Detach the IO-1 or IO-3 board from the TMS board by disconnecting the cable connectors located to the right and left of the board. The plug is held in place by two hooks that should be released before the main IO-1 or IO-3 board can be removed. 4. Use an extractor to remove the main IO-1 board by sliding it on its guides. 5. Check the position of the address jumpers. 6. Check that the components mounted on the base are correctly inserted. 7. If the problem persists after all these checks have been carried out, replace the board and check the position of the address jumpers on the new board. Main board jumpers' position d2 d3 Figure 6.3f: Side Face of the main I0-1 or IO-3 Board 6-25 MS/M 1.6882-B 6.3.5. EPAC 3100/3500 Repairing the additional IO-1 or IO-3 or IO-2 Board The additional board is located below the main (IO-1 or IO-3) board. It is optional. Procedure: 1. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. 2. Open the front panel. 3. Detach the additional board from the TMS board by disconnecting the cable connectors located to the right and left of the board. The plug is held in place by two hooks that should be released before the additional board can be removed. 4. Use an extractor to remove the additional board by sliding it on its guides. 5. Check the position of both address jumpers. These jumpers must be positioned on IO-2. 6. Check that the components mounted on the base are correctly inserted. 7. If the problem persists after all these checks have been carried out, replace the board and check the position of the address jumpers on the new board. Additional board jumpers' position d2 d3 Figure 6.3g: Side Face of the additional I0-1 or IO-3 or I0-2 Board 6-26 EPAC 3100/3500 6.3.6. MS/M 1.6882-B Repairing the AC Board The AC board is the second board from the left. Procedure: 1. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. 2. Disconnect the AC board connections on the EPAC rear panel. 3. Open the front panel. 4. If a display is installed on the EPAC front panel, detach the board from the display module by disconnecting the ribbon cable between them. The plugs are held in place by two hooks that should be released before they can be removed. 5. Use extractors to remove the AC board and the network board by sliding them on their guides. 6. Check that the components mounted on the AC board, the daughter boards of the AC board and the network board are correctly inserted. 7. If the problem is not caused by the position of the components on these boards, replace the AC board. U23 U24 X5 U25 U26 U52 Copyright label X1 DS1 Figure 6.3h: Side Face of the AC Board 6-27 MS/M 1.6882-B 6.3.7. EPAC 3100/3500 Repairing one of the daughter boards of the AC Board The daughter boards of the AC board can be: - a Modem board or a Current loop board, - a KBUS board or a VDEW board. These boards are fixed on the AC board as indicated on the AC board diagram. Procedure: 1. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. 2. Disconnect the AC board connections on the EPAC rear panel. 3. Open the front panel. 4. Remove the AC board as indicated in the previous section. 5. Unscrew the four screws holding the daughter board to the AC board. 6. Replace the daughter board. 7. Tighten the screws in the new daughter board. 8. Replace the AC board in its support and plug in the X6 connector. Daughter boards according to table A Support Screw Current loop 2058837 Modem 2058970 A 2058680A01 B B X X VDEW 2058672 X KBUS 2058861 X (X6) 9069605 (X6) 9071110 2058680A02 Grounding spring Figure 6.3i: Location of the daughter boards on the AC board 6-28 EPAC 3100/3500 6.3.8. MS/M 1.6882-B Repairing the IRIG-B board The IRIG-B board is the first board from the left. Procedure: 1. Disconnect the power supply from terminals 27 and 28 of the X6 connector on the rear panel. 2. Open the front panel. 3. Detach the board from the display module by disconnecting the ribbon cable between them. The plugs are held in place by two hooks that should be released before they can be removed. 4. Use the extractor to remove the IRIG-B board by sliding it on its guides. 5. Check the position of jumpers S2 to S5. These jumpers indicate the board gain. 6. Check that the components mounted on the base are correctly inserted. 7. If the problem persists after all these checks have been carried out, replace the board and check the position of the jumpers on the new board. d10 d6 d5 d3 d7 d9 d8 d2 d1 t1 d4 S5 Gain = 0,1 IRIGB Signal between1,9 V and19 V S4 Gain = 1 IRIGB Signal between192 mV and1,9 V Figure 6.3j: Side Face of the IRIG-B board S2 Gain = 10 IRIGB Signal between 40 mV and 200 mV MS/M 1.6882-B EPAC 3100/3500 APPENDIX A EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-B BLANK PAGE A-1 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CONTENTS PAGE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS _________________________________________________________ A-3 MONITORING PARAMETERS OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTION ______________________________ A-4 COMMISSIONING REPORT ___________________________________________________________ A-10 TYPES OF BOARD FAULT _____________________________________________________________ A-28 ANALOGUE INPUT CONNECTIONS ____________________________________________________ A-31 INPUT/OUTPUT CONTACT CONNECTIONS ______________________________________________ A-33 CURVES ___________________________________________________________________________ A-40 OUT LINE __________________________________________________________________________ A-47 DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS____________________________________________________________ A-49 EPAC COURIER MESSAGES ___________________________________________________________ A-52 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS ________________________________________________________________ A-65 CONNECTIONS TO A PC OR A PRINTER ________________________________________________ A-73 EPAC FUNCTIONS / MODELS _________________________________________________________ A-76 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ALLOCATION _______________________________________________________ A-77 A-2 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE A-3 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Technical Data Ratings Inputs AC current (In) AC voltage (Vn) DC auxiliary voltage DC opto-isolated input voltage supply Frequency Permitted ripple 1 A and 5 A 100 V to 120 V in steps of 1V Nominal (V) Operative range (V) 48 38.4 - 57.6 60 48 - 72 110 88 - 132 125 100 - 150 220 176 - 264 250 200 - 275 48 V, 60 V, 110 V, 125 V, 220 V, 250 V 50/60 Hz 12% superimposed on nominal frequency Burdens AC current AC voltage DC auxiliary voltage Optically isolated inputs 0.1 VA at In = 1 A; 0.5 VA at In = 5 A 0.1 VA 25 W under healthy live line conditions, 35 W max. 10 mA per input Thermal withstand AC current inputs AC voltage inputs 4 In continuous 100 In for 1 s; 30 In for 5 s 2.2 Vn continuous 2.6 Vn for 10 s Reference conditions Temperature Auxiliary voltage Frequency 20 °C Nominal DC voltage range 50 or 60 Hz Transformers turns ratios CT ratios (Ki = CTR) VT ratios (Ku = VTR) 1 to 20,000 in steps of 1 1 to 20,000 in steps of 1 Contact ratings Tripping and Closing Contacts Maximum operating voltage Make Permitted overload Carry Breaking capacity (L/R < 40 ms) Signalling Contacts Maximum operating voltage Permitted overload Carry Breaking capacity (L/R < 40 ms) 250 Vdc 30 A and carry for 500 ms 250 A and carry for 30 ms 250 A, 30 ms 5 A continuous 0.75 A with 48 Vdc 0.3 A with 125 Vdc 0.25 A with 220-250 Vdc 250 Vdc 100 A, 30 ms 5 A continuous 0.75 with 48 Vdc 0.3 A with 125 Vdc 0.25 with 220-250 Vdc A-4 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Contact durability Loaded contact Unloaded contact 10,000 operations minimum 100,000 operations minimum IRIG.B All versions 3X3X have a BNC type connector to carry IRIG-B format data for automatic setting and synchronising the relay's calendar clock. Settings Line parameters Neutral earthing direct isolated or Petersen coil earthed network 0.3 to 999.99 km or 0.18 to 621.49 miles in steps of 0.01 Length of line in km or miles Range of settings in secondary values. Parameters can be entered in Cartesian co-ordinates, Polar Co-ordinates or Positive sequence impedance/earth ratios. Positive sequence Z1, Zero sequence Z01 and Z02 Impedance in Cartesian Coordinates - R1 positive sequence resistance X1 positive sequence reactance R01 zero sequence resistance X01 zero sequence resistance R02 zero sequence resistance X02 zero sequence resistance in in in in in in Polar Co-ordinates Positive sequence impedance module, Z1 Positive sequence impedance argument Zero sequence impedance modules Z01 et Z02 Zero sequence impedance argument LV LV LV LV LV LV ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms from from from from from from 0.001 to 999 in steps of 0.001 0.001 to 999 in steps of 0.001 0.001 to 999 in steps of 0.001 - 999 to 999 in steps of 0.001 0.001 to 999 in steps of 0.001 - 999 to 999 in steps of 0.001 0.001 to 999 Ω in steps of 0.001 Ω 0° to 90° in steps of 1° 0.001 to +999 Ω in steps of 0.001 Ω –90° to +90° in steps of 1° Positive Sequence Impedance, Z1 and Earth Coefficient K01 and K02 - X1 positive sequence reactance R1 positive sequence resistance imaginary parts of K01 and K02 real parts of K01 and K02 (1) (1) Ko = Zo − Zd 3Zd ; −1≤ (1) Xo − Xd 3Xd in in in in LV LV LV LV ohms ohms ohms ohms from from from from 0.001 to 999 in steps of 0.001 0.001 to 999 in steps of 0.001 -1 to 7 in steps of 0.01 -1 to 7 in steps of 0.01 ≤+ 7 Monitoring Parameters of the Protection Function 1A rating Impedance Zone 1, Zone 1X, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4, Zone 5 Phase-phase resistance reach (zone 1) Phase-earth resistance reach (zone 1) Resistance reach zone 2 Resistance reach zone 3 Start resistance zones 4 and 5 Zone 3 direction Step 1 timer, T1 Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 timers: T2, T3, T4, T5 Overcurrent thresholds I> and I>> Directionality of I> and I>> Step timers T> and T>> 5A rating 0.1 to 200 Ω in steps of 0.01 0,02 to 40 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 200 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 40 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 200 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 40 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 200 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 40 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 200 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 40 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 200 Ω in steps of 0.01 0 to 40 Ω in steps of 0.01 forward/reverse 0 to 10 s in steps of 5 ms 0 to 10 s in steps of 10 ms 0.2 In to 9.99 In in steps of 0.01 In without/forward/reverse 0 to 10 s in steps of 10 ms A-5 MS/M 1.6882-C Scheme functions Tripping type Scheme logic HF acceptance or unblocking (line carrier) Carrier send transmission EPAC 3100/3500 single-phase for zones 1 and 2 single-phase for zone 1 ordinary three-phase tripping all zones basic scheme logic for stand-alone operation accelerated underreach scheme (AUP or PUR) permissive overreach transfer tripping scheme (POR1 or POTT) blocking overreach scheme (BOR2) blocking underreach scheme (BOR1) permissive underreach transfer tripping scheme (PUP forward or PUTT) zone reach control busbar isolation none, unblocking, HF acceptance carrier send transmission in zone 1 carrier send transmission in zone 2 carrier send transmission in reverse zone 5 Tee Line The teleaction possibilities for the second teleprotection channel of the Tee line are the same as those for the first channel. Tee-line applications may use two-different schemes. Weak-infeed and echo Weak-Infeed and echo configuration Function locking on power swing Tripping authorisation Confirmation by insufficient voltage If yes, under voltage threshold Open pole detection threshold Time-delay for tripping Blocking time if start-up drop off Power-swing Power swing detection boundary Unblocking timer First zone independent on power swing Carrier send blocking on power swing Carrier receive blocking on power swing Unblocking on residual current Ir Unblocking percentage threshold kr Unblocking on overcurrent Imax Unblocking threshold Imax Unblocking on negative sequence current Unblocking percentage threshold Tripping mode Blocking type yes/no yes/no none/1 pole/3 poles yes/no 0.2 Vn to Vn in steps of 0.1 Vn 0/0.05 In 0 to 1 s in steps of 1 ms 0 to 500 ms in steps of 1 ms 0 to 25 Ω in steps of 0.01 W 0 to 30 s in steps of 100 ms yes/no yes/no yes/no yes/no 10 to 100% in steps of 1 % of Ir yes/no In to 20 In in steps of 0.01 In yes/no 10 to 100% in steps of 1% of I2 1 pole/3 poles none blocking all zones zone 1 blocking zones 1 and 2 blocking zones 1, 2 and 3 blocking zone 1 unblocking zones 1 and 2 unblocking zones 1, 2 and 3 unblocking A-6 EPAC 3100/3500 Fuse failure and emergency overcurrent protection I0 and I2 threshold detection Timer for fuse failure indication Ifus> threshold unblocking Ifus> threshold Tfus> timer Ifus>> threshold unblocking Ifus>> threshold Tfus>> timer Ifr> threshold unblocking Ifr> threshold Tfr> timer Auto-recloser blocking by fuse failure tripping MS/M 1.6882-C 0 to In in steps of 0.01 In 1 to 20 s in steps of 1 s yes/no 0.2 In to 9.99 In in steps of 0.01 In 0 to 10 s in steps of 10 ms yes/no 0.2 In to 9.99 In in steps of 0.01 In 0 to 10 s in steps of 10 ms yes/no 0.2 In to 9.99 In in steps of 0.01 In 0 to 10 s in steps of 10 ms yes/no Timer for auto-recloser blocking by the distance protection Timer for auto-recloser blocking no/to T2/to T3/to T4/to T5/to T>/to T>> Seal-in Enabled/disabled Holding threshold Auto-recloser Reclosing mode on 1 pole trip Reclosing mode on 3 pole trip Reclosing mode on trip by backup protection High-speed 1 pole dead time High-speed 3 pole dead time Low-speed dead time Reclaim time Backup protection reclaim time Duration of closing command Check synchronising function The following types of synchro-check are possible: none live line/dead bus dead line/live bus live line / live bus Check synchronism on high-speed three-phase cycle Confirmation time for the live-line and live bus mode Voltage difference Frequency difference Angle difference UL> (line voltage presence threshold) UB> (bus voltage presence threshold) UL< (line voltage absence threshold) UB< (bus voltage absence threshold) yes/no 0.1 In to In in steps of 0.1 In None, 1, 1/3, 1/3/3, 1/3/3/3 None, 3, 3/3, 3/3/3, 3/3/3/3 None, 3, 3/3, 3/3/3, 3/3/3/3 0.1 to 5 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.1·k to 500 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.1·k to 500 s in steps of 0.01 s where k=1 if no synchro-check where k=2 if voltage check where k=4 if synchro-check 0.1 to 500 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.1 to 500 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.1 to 10 s in steps of 10 ms UL> / UB< UL< / UB> UL> / UB> yes/no 0.2 to 2.0 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.1 Vn to Vn in steps of 0.05 Vn 0.05 to 5 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz 10° to 70° in steps of 5° 0.5 Vn to Vn in steps of 0.05 Vn 0.5 Vn to Vn in steps of 0.05 Vn 0.1 Vn to 0.4 Vn in steps of 0.05 Vn 0.1 Vn to 0.4 Vn in steps of 0.05 Vn A-7 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Switch on-to-fault Switch on to fault threshold In to 9.9 In in steps of 0.1 In Reversal guard extension Reverse locking extension time-delay 0 to 150 ms in steps of 10 ms Fault locator Fault locating unit Accuracy in km or in miles, ± 3% of the line length Disturbance recording Disturbance recording enabled Disturbance recording triggered when analogue thresholds are exceeded Min and max voltage thresholds Min and max current thresholds Min frequency threshold If freq. = 50 Hz If freq. = 60 Hz Pre-time Post-time Overload protection Type of protection yes/no yes/no (IA, IB, IC, Ir, UA, UB, UC, UR, F) 0 to 250% Vn in steps of 1% Vn 0 to 7,000% In in steps of 1% Vn 45 £ Fmin 55 £ Fmin 0.1 to 0.5 0.1 to 4.5 £ 50; 50 £ Fmax £ 55 £ 60; 60 £ Fmax £ 65 s in steps of 100 ms s in steps of 100 ms Fixed threshold I1 Fixed threshold I2 Fixed threshold I3 Threshold I1 tripping timer Threshold I2 tripping timer Threshold I3 tripping timer Type of inverse curve Choice of IEC curve Choice of ANSI curve Threshold line current Multiplier factor none fixed thresholds inverse curves 0.5 In to 2 In in steps of 0.01 In In to 3 In steps of 0.01 In 1.3 In to 3 In in steps of 0.01 In 1 to 100 min in steps of 1 min 1 to 100 min in steps of 1 min 1 to 100 s in steps of 1 s IEC, ANSI (US) inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse moderately inverse/inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse 0.5 In to 2 In in steps of 0.05 In 0 to 3.2 In in steps of 0.01 In Over and under voltage protection Minimum voltage threshold Timer for minimum voltage tripping Maximum voltage threshold Timer for maximum voltage alarm Tripping on maximum voltage 0.1 Vn to 0.6 Vn in steps of 0.1 In 0 to 20 s in steps of 0.1 s 1.1 to 1.4 Vn in steps of 0.1 Vn 0 to 20 s in steps of 0.1 s yes/no Resistant earth fault protection Directional comparison protection Residual voltage threshold Residual forward current threshold Tripping type Independent teleaction channel Type of tripping scheme Transmission time-delay for teleaction Tee line present yes/no 0.01 Vn to 0.2 Vn in steps of 0.01 Vn 0.1 In to 4 In in steps of 0.01 In 1 pole/3 poles yes/no permissive/blocking 0 to 1 s in steps of 5 ms yes/no A-8 EPAC 3100/3500 Type of scheme for tee line Transmission time-delay for tee line application Operation timer Activation of back-up protection Residual current threshold Multiplier factor Type of curve IEC curve type ANSI curve type Coefficient of multiplication P (power) Auto-recloser of backup protection locked Isolated neutral protection (Peterson coil) Network with isolated neutral or impedance Selection criteria for loop Residual current threshold Residual voltage threshold Tripping on maximum residual voltage Time-delay for tripping on maximum residual voltage Zero sequence active power protection Zero sequence active power Secondary current for max. angle error of current transformer Angle error of current transformer at I1 Secondary current above which the angle error is practically constant Angle error of current transformer at I2 Residual current threshold for the start-up Angle of the start-up characteristic K power factor CT core balance ratio (Kir) Duration of transient earth fault Sensitivity of the distance protection function Current threshold Directional sensitivity Accuracy of the distance protection function For an SIR < 30 and a current of 0.2 to 30 In (zone 1) Other zones Operating Time Fastest tripping time Typical operating time Electro-magnetic compatibility High frequency disturbance (255-22-1) Electrostatic discharge (255-22-1) MS/M 1.6882-C permissive/blocking 0 to 1 s in steps of 5 ms 0 to 10 s in steps 100 ms no, power, current 0.1 In to 4 In in steps of 0.01 In 0 to 3.2 in steps of 0.01 IEC, ANSI (US) inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse moderately inverse/inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse 1 to 9 in steps of 1 yes/no yes/no Acyclic C(A), A(C), B(A), A(B), C(B), B(C)/Cyclic C(A), A(C) 0.2 In to 5 In steps of 0.1 In 0.1 Vn to Vn in steps of 0.05 Vn yes/no 1 to 360 s in steps of 1 s yes/no 1 mA to 4 A in steps of 1 mA –30° à +30° in steps of 1° 1 mA to 4 A in steps of 1 mA –30° to +30° in steps of 1° 1 mA to 4 A in steps of 1 mA –180° to +180° in steps of 1° 1 to 10 in steps of 1 1 to 20000 in steps of 1 100 to 500 ms in steps of 10 ms 0.2 In unlimited for all types of faults unlimited for 10 s for close faults (memory voltage) 5% of adjusted value 10 % of adjusted value 18 ms 60 Hz: 22 ms 50 Hz: 25 ms ≤ 30 ms for SIR =1 ≤ 40 ms fpr SIR = 30 IEC 255-22 2.5 kV peak between independent circuits and case 1.0 kV peak across terminals of the same circuit 8.0 kV point contact discharge with cover removed 15 kV discharge in air with cover in place A-9 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Electromagnetic interference (immunity) Fast transient disturbance Electromagnetic interference on logic channel (transmission) 27 MHz - 1000 MHz 10 V/M, 80% modulation at 1 kHz 4.0 kV, 5.0 kHz 1 min. applied to all inputs Electrical environment Impulse voltage withstand Insulation resistance Dielectric withstand Protection index IEC 255-5 5 kV 1.2 / 50 microseconds; 0.5 J > 100 MW at 500 VDC 2 kV 50 Hz 1 min. IP52 Atmospheric environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity with no condensation IEC 68-2 –10° to +55°C –40° to +70°C 93 % Mechanical environment Vibration Shock and bump Free fall with packing IEC 255-21 category 1 category 1 2 falls of 0.5 m NF for 55011 and 55022 Group 1, Class A Dimensions EPAC 3100: - Width - Height - Depth 412.50 mm 177 mm 304.30 mm EPAC 3500: - Width - Height - Depth 483 mm 177 mm 304.30 mm EPAC 3100/3500: - Weight of apparatus fitted with all its modules 12 kg A-10 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Commissioning report COMMISSIONING REPORT EPAC Characteristics EPAC code : Serial number : First Licence Word : Second Licence Word: Up-Grade Index : : EPAC Power Supply In Rated Current : Vn Rated Voltage : Frequency : Hz A V Auxiliary Supplies Converter : VDC Inputs/logic : VDC Teleprotection Reception : VDC A-11 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 LINE HV CHARACTERISTICS Line rated voltage : kV Line load current : A Power carried along line : in normal load carrying mode : Pcn = maximum load current : Prc = MVA MVA short circuit Maximum load current A Icm = Ratio of the voltage measuring reducers : where Unp = reducer primary rated voltage Uns = reducer secondary rated voltage Ratio of the current measuring reducers : where Iap = reducer primary rated current Ias = reducer secondary rated current Maximum load current with low voltage : VTR = Unp / Uns = CTR = Iap / Ias = V/ A/ IcLV = Icm / Ki = Line length Positive sequence and zero sequence impedance in cartesian coordinates Ohms Line zero sequence resistance Ohms Line positive sequence reactance Ohms Line zero sequence reactance Ohms Positive sequence and zero sequence impedance in polar coordinates: Line positive sequence impedance Ohms Line zero sequence impedance Ohms Imaginary part of Kox Ohms Real part of Kox Ohms Actual value of Kor Degrees Zero sequence angle Degrees Impedance reducer coefficient Kz = VTR / CTR = Low voltage impedance Zbt = Zd / Kz = LV Ohms Minimum operating impedance Zs = 0.8.Uns / √3.IcLV = A A km or miles Line positive sequence resistance V LV Ohms A-12 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS A-13 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 LINE PARAMETERS Label on PC Nominal Frequency Line Length Unit Adjustment range Freq Hz 50 or 60 Length km 0,3 to 300 display Value Nominal Voltage Un Vrms 100 to 120 Nominal Current In A 1 or 5 Voltage Ratio Ku 1 to 20 000 Current Ratio Ki 1 to 20 000 Cartesian Z0 and Zd R1 positive sequence resistance X1 positive sequence reactance R01 zero sequence resistance X01 zero sequence reactance R02 zero sequence resistance X02 zero sequence resistance Rd Xd R01 X01 R02 X02 LV ohms LV ohms LV ohms LV ohms LV ohms LV ohms 0.001 to 999 0.001 to 999 0.001 to 999 -999 to 999 0.001 to 999 -999 to 999 Polar Z0 and Zd Z1 positive sequence impedance Z01 zero sequence impedance Z02 zero sequence impedance Argument of Z1 Argument of Z01 Argument of Z02 LV ohms LV ohms LV ohms degrees degrees degrees 0.001 to 999 0.001 to 999 0.001 to 999 0 to +90 -90 to +90 -90 to +90 LV ohms LV ohms 0.001 to 999 0.001 to 999 -7 to 7 -7 to 7 -7 to 7 -7 to 7 X0d, Rd, K0x and K0r R1 positive sequence resistance X1 positive sequence reactance K01r real of K01 K01x imaginary of K01 K02r real of K02 K02x imaginary of K02 Only cartesian values can be modified from the front panel display. A-14 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C MONITORING PARAMETERS Label on PC display Value Unit Adjustement range Zone 1 impedance Z1 LV ohms Extend zone 1 impedance Z1e LV ohms Zone 2 impedance Z2 LV ohms If In = 1A: 0.1 to 200 Zone 3 impedance Z3 LV ohms If In = 5A: 0.02 to 40 Zone 4 impedance Z4 LV ohms Zone 5 impedance Z5 LV ohms Zone 3 Direction DiZ3 Forwards / Backwards Step 1 time-delay T1 ms 0 to 10 000 Step 2 time-delay T2 ms 0 to 10 000 Step 3 time-delay T3 ms 0 to 10 000 Step 4 time-delay T4 ms 0 to 10 000 Step 5 time-delay T5 I>> time delay (T>>) T7 ms 0 to 10 000 I> time delay (T>) T6 ms 0 to 10 000 Phase-earth resist. zone 1 R1m LV ohms Phase-phase resist. zone 1 R1b LV ohms Limit resistance for zone 2 R2 LV ohms If In = 1A: 0 to 200 Limit resistance for zone 3 R3 LV ohms If In = 5A: 0 to 40 Limit resist. for other zone Rmr LV ohms I>> threshold activated AI>> yes/no I>> threshold value I>> In I>> threshold direction DI>> I> threshold activated AI> I> threshold value I> I> threshold direction DI> ms 0 to 10 000 0.2 to 9.99 None / Forwards / Backwards yes/no In 0.2 to 9.99 None / Forwards / Backwards A-15 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 TELEPROTECTION PARAMETERS Label on PC display Value Adjustment range Tripping type Dec Three pole trip for all zones Single pole trip for zone 1 Single pole trip for zones 1 & 2 Distance protection scheme Type No signal scheme Permissive underreach mode Permissive overreach mode Accelerated underreach mode Blocking overreach mode Blocking underreach mode Zone reach control Redu YES or NO Busbar isolation DebB YES or NO If no teleaction : If teleaction = permissive overreach or accelerated HF acceptance or unlocking Ph None/Unblocking/HF presence If teleaction = blocking Emission type Emis Zone 1, 2 or 5 Transmission time delay Temi 0 to 1000 ms A-16 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C TEE LINE PARAMETERS Label on PC display Tee line application Acti Distance protection scheme Type Value Adjustment range YES/NO No signal scheme Permissive underreach mode Permissive overreach mode Accelerated underreach mode Blocking overreach mode Blocking underreach mode If teleaction = permissive overreach or accelerated HF acceptance or unlocking HFPh None/Unblocking/HF presence Emission type Emia Zone 1, 2 or 5 Transmission time delay Tema 0 to 1000 ms If teleaction = blocking A-17 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 WEAK INFEED PARAMETERS Label on PC display Value Unit Weak infeed activation Acti Adjustment range YES / NO Blocking on Power swing Verp YES / NO Trip mode Dec none 1 pole 3 pole Open pole detection threshold Smcw A 0 to 0,05 In Tripping time delay Tdec ms 0 to 1 000 Blocking timeif start up drop off Tver ms 0 to 500 If single phase tripping authorized : Confirmation by under voltage ConU Under voltage threshold Smtw YES / NO V 0.2 Vn to Vn A-18 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS Label on PC I Trip Seal-in on presence of line current display Value Unit Adjustment range Seal s YES / NO Seal-in threshold Isea In 0.1 to 1 Delayed auto-recloser blocking mode Venc Reclose threshold on fault Ienc In 1 to 9.9 Reverse guard timer Rvg ms 0 to 150 If YES : No at T>> at T> at T5 at T4 at T3 at T2 A-19 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 FUSE FAILURE PARAMETERS Label on PC Display Value Unit Adjustment Range I0 and Ii threshold detection Sffi In 0,1 to 1 Fuse failure alarm time delay Tffs s 1 to 20 Ifus> threshold activation Ifus>threshold value AI> If> In YES/NO 0,2 to 9,99 Tfus> time delay Tf> ms 0 to 10 000 Ifus>> threshold activation AI>> Ifus>> threshold value Tfus>> time delay If>> Tf>> Ir threshold activation Ifr threshold value Tfr time delay Auto recloser blocking thresholds Ifus> or Ifus>> or Ifr> YES/NO In ms 0,2 to 9,99 0 to 10 000 AIr Ir In YES/NO 0,2 to 9,99 TIr ms 0 to 10 000 Verf YES/NO A-20 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C POWER SWING PARAMETERS Label on PC display Value Unit Power swing detection boundary Bdpm Blocking type Tver Z1/Z2/Z3 unlock Z1/Z2 unlock Z1 unlock Z1/Z2/Z3 lock Z1/Z2 lock Z1 lock lock all zones no lock Independent 1st zone on Power swing Z1in Yes / No Carrier send blocking Vrem Yes / No Carrier receive blocking vert Yes / No Unlocking time-delay on Power swing (x 0.1 sec.) tdor Unblocking on current Ir threshold Scir Ir threshold ratio Ir % Unblocking on Imax Scim Imax Unblocking threshold Imax Unblocking on current Ii threshold Sci Unblocking Ii threshold ratio ki Tripping mode Ii% Dec LV ohms Adjustment range secs. 0 to 25 0 to 300 Yes / No % 10 to 100 Yes / No In In to 20 In Yes / No Ye % 10 to 100 1 pole / 3 poles A-21 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 RESISTIVE EARTH FAULT PARAMETERS Label on PC display Value Unit Adjustment range Directional comparison Acti YES / NO Residual voltage threshold Vrd Vn 0,01 to 0,2 Residual forward current threshold Ied In 0.1 to 4 Tripping type Dec Operation time Tfon Single-/Three-phase ms 0 to 10 000 Independent teleprotection channel Cane YES / NO Tripping scheme Type blocking permissive Tee line application Typi YES / NO If blocking : Teleprotection time delay Tee line teleprotection time delay Back-up relay activation Trande ms 0 to 1000 Traide ms 0 to 1000 Acti No/Current/ Power 0.1 to 4 0 to 3.2 ANSI/IEC Residual current threshold Multiplier coefficient Standard If ANSI Curve type Ie TyCb If IEC Curve type inverse moderately inverse extremely inverse very inverse TyCb If back-up = power : Residual current threshold Multiplier factor I Multiplier factor P inverse very inverse extremely inverse Ie CoeI CoeP In 0.1 to 4 1 to 9 1 to 9 A-22 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C AUTO RECLOSER PARAMETERS Label on PC display Value Unit Adjustment range Single pole recl. 1st dead time Term s 0.1 to 5 Three pole recl. 1st dead time Tcrt s 0.1 x k(*) to 500 Other dead time Tclt s 0.1 x k(*) to 500 Reclosing signal time Tenc s 0.1 to 10 Reclaim time Tbloc s 0.1 to 500 Delayed reclaim time Tbps s 0.1 to 500 Reclosing mode on single pole tripping Mono None 1 1/3 1/3/3 1/3/3/3 Reclosing mode on three pole tripping Tri None 3 3/3 3/3/3 3/3/3/3 Reclosing mode on backup tripping Mrps None 3 3/3 3/3/3 3/3/3/3 (*) k depends on synchro-check type: k=1 if synchro-check is not used k=2 for live busbar/dead line or dead busbar/live line k=4 for live busbar/live line or live busbar/dead line or dead busbar/live line A-23 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 SYNCHRO-CHECK PARAMETERS Label on PC Synchro-check scheme display Value Unit Type Adjustment range None Live busbar dead line Dead busbar live line Live busbar live line All Phase selected for voltage Tlin Phase A, B or C Synchrocheck on quick three phase Cutr Yes / No Dead Busbar threshold Vab % Vn 10 to 40 Live line threshold Vpl % Vn 50 to 100 Dead Line threshold Val % Vn 10 to 40 Dead Busbar threshold Vpb % Vn 50 to 100 (Uline-U busbar) threshold Evec % Vn 10 to 100 (Fline-F busbar) threshold Efre Hz 0.1 to 5 (PHline-PH busbar) threshold Epha Degrees 10 to 70 Live busbar/live line delay Tbou s 0.2 to 2 A-24 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C ISOLATED NETWORK PARAMETERS Label on PC Isolated or compensated network Phase selection criterion display Value Unit Acti Adjustment range YES / NO Type Acyclic B (C) Acyclic C (B) Acyclic B (A) Acyclic A (B) Acyclic C (A) Acyclic A (C) Cyclic C (A) Cyclic A (C) Residual current threshold Slr2 In 0.2 to 5 Residual voltage threshold Str Vn 0.1 to 1 Tripping on maximum of residual voltage Dec Tripping time-delay Temp s 1 to 360 Permanent fault signal Tdsp s 0.1 to 360 YES / NO A-25 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PARAMETERS PC Label on Sensitive Directional Earth Fault detection I1threshold Display Value Unit APWH Adjustment Range YES/NO I1 mA 1 to 4000 DI1 degree -30 to + 30 I2 mA 1 to 4000 Phase angle at I2 DI2 degree -30 to + 30 Residual current threshold SIr mA 1 to 4000 Power characterics angle DpIr degree -180 to +180 Power ratio K KpIr Ir 1 to 10 CT Core ratio KIr Ir 1 to 20 000 Pdfr ms 100 to 200 Phase angle at I1 I2 threshold Auto-start fault period A-26 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C MaxI - MinU - MaxU PARAMETERS Label on PC Relays activation display Value Unit Acti None Min U & Max U Min U Max U If Min U Min U threshold Min U Tripping time-delay Adjustment range Vbas TmnU Un s 0.1 Un to 0,6 0 to 20 Vhau DmxU TmxU Un 1.1 to 1,4 Yes / No 0 to 20 If Max U Max U threshold Max U tripping Max U time delay s If MAX I Overload relay Acti None Fixed thresholds Inverses curves If fixed thresholds I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 fixed threshold fixed threshold fixed threshold treshold trip. time delay treshold trip. time delay treshold trip. time delay I1 I2 I3 Tpl1 Tpl2 Tpl3 In In In mn mn s 0.5 to 2 1 to 3 1.3 to 3 1 to 100 1 to 100 1 to 100 If inverses curves Standard Tyno ANSI/IEC ANSI curve selection TypU Multiplier coefficient Current threshold line threshold Tm Is In Inverse Moderately inverse Extremely inverse Very inverse 0 to 3.2 0.5 to 2 Tm In Inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse 0 to 3.2 0.5In to 2 If ANSI If IEC IEC curve selection Multiplier coefficient Current threshold TypC Is A-27 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 DISTURBANCE RECORDING PARAMETRES Label on PC display Adjustments range fault Value Commissioning TPE Disturbance recorder YES/NO Pre-time (x 0,1 s) ms 100 to 500 Post-time (x 0,1 s) ms 100 to 4500 Tripping by analog thresholds UA UB UC UR IA IB IC IR YES/NO Min. thresholds (% Vn) UA UB UC UR Max. thresholds (% Vn) IA IB IC IR } } } } %V 0 to 250 %In 0 to 7000 %Vn 0 to 250 %In 0 to 7000 Frequency - min. threshold Hz 45 to 60 Frequency - max. threshold Hz 50 to 75 A threshold set to its minimum or maximum value is not taken into account. A-28 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Fault Codes Types of Board Fault Hexadecimal Code Faulty Board 0 None 1 CPU-TMS 2 IO-1 4 IO-2 or IO-1supp or IO-3supp 8 additional IO-1 10 AFF 20 COMM 40 AC 80 IRIG-B Fault Level Hexadecimal Code Failure 1 detected when the EPAC is initialized 2 detected during operation 4 major; causing the EPAC to shut down 8 minor; causing operation in a down-graded mode 10 repetitive Type 1 Fault Bit Value Meaning 0 1h PROM self-test error 1 2h RAM self-test error 2 4h RAM addressing self-test error 3 8h EEPROM self-test error 4 10h DEC relay self-test error 5 20h DO relay self-test error 6 40h End of init. self-tests 7 80h Error of acq. control word 8 100h Write EEPROM error 9 200h Offset computation error 10 400h PFIN error 11 800h 12 V absence or eqpt. fault on trip (*) 12 1000h INTERNAL TIMER expires 13 2000h Read code overflow 14 4000h IO-1 board IT 15 8000h IT not found in IT table A-29 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Type 2 Fault Bit Value Meaning 0 1h Context save overflow 1 2h Time-delay overflow 2 4h WDOG IT occurs 3 8h +/- 10 V fault 4 10h Frequency slaving fault 5 20h Reference voltage fault 6 40h 16 IA channel failure (*) 7 80h 16 IB channel failure (*) 8 100h 16 IC channel failure (*) 9 200h WATCHDOG self-test error 10 400h TIMER 1 self-test error 11 800h No configuration in EEPROM 12 1000h Configuration in EEPROM not valid 13 2000h TIMER2 self-test error 14 4000h IT1 self-test error 15 8000h IT2 self-test error Type 3 Fault (EPAC with option AC board) Bit Value Meaning 0 1h RAM read/write error board AC (1=main, 2=backup, 3=double access) 1 2h CHECKSUM error board AC (1=PROM, 2=EEPROM) 2 4h UART error board AC (1=UART1 channel 0, 2=UART1 channel 1, 3 =UART2 channel 0, 4=UART2 channel 1) 3 8h TIMER error board AC 4 10h DATER error board AC (1=DATER, 2=DATER RAM) 5 20h WATCHDOG error board AC 6 40h SOFTWARE error board AC 7 80h 8 100h CONF1 AC/EP not coherent 9 200h CONF2 AC/EP not coherent 10 400h CONF3 AC/EP not coherent A-30 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 11 800h CONF4 AC/EP not coherent 12 1000h 13 2000h 14 4000h AC board not connected 15 8000h AC and TMS dialog problem Type 4 Fault (EPAC with AC board option) Bit Value Meaning 0 1h PROM page 2 error 1 2h Wrong version between code and EEPROM 2 4h Self test problem in the IR input 3 8h IRIG-B board out of service 4 10h IRIG-B frame reception error 5 20h 6 40h 7 80h 8 100h 9 200h 10 400h 11 800h 12 1000h 13 2000h 14 4000h 15 8000h Type 5 Fault Not used. A-31 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Analogue input connections Tore P2 S2 P1 IL1 S1 P2 S2 P1 IL2 S1 P2 S2 IL3 P1 S1 UL1 P1 P2 UL2 P1 P2 UL3 P1 P2 To BCH S1 ILE1 ILS1 ILE2 ILS2 ILE3 ILS3 INS INE UL1 S2 S1 UN S2 S1 UL2 S2 UL3 UbarreE UbarreS ITMHE ITMHS X5 Connector IL1 P2 S2 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UBAR UL3 TMH P1 IL1 S1 P2 S2 P1 IL2 S1 P2 S2 IL3 P1 S1 UL1 P1 P2 S1 ILE1 ILS1 ILE2 ILS2 ILE3 ILS3 INS INE UL1 S2 S1 UN UL2 P1 P2 S2 S1 UL2 UL3 P1 P2 S2 UL3 To BCH UbarreE UbarreS ITMHE ITMHS X5 Connector IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UBAR TMH A-32 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Rear view (IRIG-B, Modem and KBUS-COURIER options) X6 1 2 X1 X3 27 1 27 1 28 2 28 2 27 1 27 1 28 2 28 2 X2 X4 D26 X5 27 28 27 1 28 2 X6 X1 X3 X2 X4 X30 X5 X20 EPAC 3100/3500 TMH S TMH E U BarS bar U BarE 2 4 UL2 UL3 UN UL1 6 8 10 12 16 INE INS INE INS 18 IL E3 IL S3 If IN = 5A 20 IL E3 IL S3 If IN = 1A 22 IL E2 IL S2 If IN = 5A 24 26 IL IL IL IL 28 IL E1 IL S1 14 If IN = 5A If IN = 1A E2 S2 E1 S1 E: Input S: Output If IN = 1A If IN = 5A If IN = 1A X5 QTF Board Screw-in connector The equipment fault signal wires are connected to pins 9 and 10 of the X6 terminal block on the main IO Board (IO1 or IO-3) and to pins 15 and 16 of the X6 terminal block on the additional IO Board (IO-1 or IO-3or IO-2). 27 28 - Power Supply + Power Supply X6 Connector A-33 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Input/Output Contact Connections CONFIGURABLE SIGNALLING CONFIGURABLE EPAC 3100/3500 CONTACTS (TC) SIGNALLING CONTACTS (TC) 2 TC 15 TC 01 2 4 TC 16 TC 02 4 6 Phase A tripping TC 03 6 8 Phase B tripping TC 04 8 10 Phase C tripping TC 05 10 12 Closing by recloser TC 06 12 14 TS 01 TC 07 14 16 TS 02 TC 08 16 18 TS 03 TC 09 18 20 TS 04 TC 10 20 22 TS 05 TC 11 22 24 TS 06 TC 12 24 26 TS 07 TC 13 26 28 TS 08 TC 14 28 CONFIGURABLE LOGIC INPUTS (TS) X1 Screw-in Connector IO-1 BOARD X2 Screw-in Connector A-34 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CONFIGURABLE SIGNALLING CONFIGURABLE EPAC 3100/3500 CONTACTS (TC) SIGNALLING CONTACTS (TC) 2 Phase B tripping TC 01 2 4 Phase C tripping TC 02 4 6 Phase A tripping TC 03 6 8 Phase B tripping TC 04 8 10 Phase C tripping TC 05 10 12 Closing by recloser TC 06 12 14 TS 01 TC 07 14 16 TS 02 TC 08 16 18 TS 03 TC 09 18 20 TS 04 TC 10 20 22 TS 05 TC 11 22 24 TS 06 TC 12 24 26 TS 07 TC 13 26 28 TS 08 Phase A tripping 28 CONFIGURABLE LOGIC INPUTS (TS) X1 Screw-in Connector IO-3 BOARD X2 Screw-in Connector A-35 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CONFIGURABLE SIGNALLING EPAC 3100/3500 CONFIGURABLE SIGNALLING CONTACTS (TC) CONTACTS (TC) 2 TC 15 TC 01 2 4 TC 16 TC 02 4 6 Phase A tripping TC 03 6 8 Phase B tripping TC 04 8 10 Phase C tripping TC 05 10 12 Closing by recloser TC 06 12 14 TS 01 TC 07 14 16 TS 02 TC 08 16 18 TS 03 TC 09 18 20 TS 04 TC 10 20 22 TS 05 TC 11 22 24 TS 06 TC 12 24 26 TS 07 TC 13 26 28 TS 08 TC 14 28 CONFIGURABLE LOGIC INPUTS (TS) X3 Screw-in Connector Additional IO-1 BOARD X4 Screw-in Connector A-36 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C CONFIGURABLE CONFIGURABLE EPAC 3100/3500 SIGNALLING CONTACTS (TC) SIGNALLING CONTACTS (TC) 2 Phase B tripping TC 01 2 4 Phase C tripping TC 02 4 6 Phase A tripping TC 03 6 8 Phase B tripping TC 04 8 10 Phase C tripping TC 05 10 12 Closing by recloser TC 06 12 14 TS 01 TC 07 14 16 TS 02 TC 08 16 18 TS 03 TC 09 18 20 TS 04 TC 10 20 22 TS 05 TC 11 22 24 TS 06 TC 12 24 26 TS 07 TC 13 26 28 TS 08 Phase A tripping 28 CONFIGURABLE LOGIC INPUTS (TS) X3 Screw-in Connector Additional IO-3 BOARD X4 Screw-in Connector A-37 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 CONFIGURABLE EPAC 3100/3500 SIGNALLING CONFIGURABLE SIGNALLING CONTACTS (TC) CONTACTS (TC) 2 TC 15 TC 01 2 4 TC 16 TC 02 4 6 Phase A tripping TC 03 6 8 Phase B tripping TC 04 8 10 Phase C tripping TC 05 10 12 Closing by Recloser TC 06 12 14 TC 07 14 16 TC 08 16 18 TC 09 18 20 TC 10 20 22 TC 11 22 24 TC 12 24 26 TC 13 26 28 TC 14 28 X3 Screw-in Connector IO-2 BOARD X4 Screw-in Connector A-38 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Zone 1 50 Hz operating curves for HV and EHV networks Phase to neutral faults HV network with VT EHV network with CVT 40 Operating Time (ms) 35 Operating Time (ms) 40 35 30 SIR=30 (typ) SIR=30 (max) 30 25 SIR=1 (typ) SIR=1 (min) 25 20 20 15 15 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 0 10 20 Reach (%) 30 40 50 60 70 80 Reach (%) Phase to phase faults HV network with VT EHV network with CVT 40 Operating Time (ms) Operating Time (ms) 35 40 35 30 SIR=30 (typ) SIR=30 (max) 30 25 SIR=1 (typ) SIR=1 (min) 25 20 20 15 15 0 10 20 30 40 Reach (%) 50 60 70 80 0 10 20 30 40 Reach (%) 50 60 70 80 A-39 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Zone 1 50 Hz operating curves for HV and EHV networks Phase-phase-neutral faults HV network with VT EHV network with CVT Operating 40 Time (ms) 35 Operating Time (ms) 45 40 35 30 SIR=30 (typ) SIR=30 (max) 30 25 SIR=1 (typ) SIR=1 (min) 25 20 20 15 15 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 10 20 30 Reach (%) 40 50 60 70 80 Reach (%) 3-phase faults HV network with VT EHV network with CVT 40 Operating Time (ms) Operating Time (ms) 35 SIR=30 (typ) SIR=30 (max) 30 SIR=1 (typ) SIR=1 (min) 25 45 40 35 30 25 20 20 15 0 10 20 30 40 Reach (%) 50 60 70 80 15 10 20 30 40 Reach (%) 50 60 70 80 A-40 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Curves Standard Inverse IEC Curves 1000,00 Curve equation: 0.14 ⋅ TM I / I 0.02 − 1 E ( ) Operating time (s) 100,00 I= earth fault current IE=set earth fault pick-up TM=1 TM=2 10,00 TM=3,2 1,00 0,10 1 10 Ir/threshold 100 A-41 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Very inverse IEC Curves 1000 Curve equation: 13.5 ⋅ TM I / IE − 1 ( ) 100 Operating time (s) I= earth fault current IE=set earth fault pick-up TM=1 10 TM=2 TM=3,2 1 0,1 1 10 Ir/threshold 100 A-42 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Extremely Inverse IEC Curves 1000 Curve equation: 80 ⋅ TM I / I 2 − 1 E ( ) 100 Operating time (s) I= earth fault current IE=set earth fault pick-up TM=1 TM=2 10 TM=3,2 1 0,1 1 10 Ir/threshold 100 A-43 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Standard Inverse ANSI Curves 1000,00 Curve equation: 5.95 0.18 + ⋅ TM 2 / 1 − I I E ( ) 100,00 Operating time (s) I= earth fault current IE=set earth fault pick-up TM=1 10,00 TM=2 TM=3.2 1,00 0,10 1,00 10,00 Ir/threshold 100,00 A-44 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Very Inverse ANSI Curves 1000,00 Curve equation: 19.61 0.491+ ⋅ TM 2 I / IE − 1 ( ) 100,00 Operating time (s) I= earth fault current IE=set earth fault pick-up TM=1 10,00 TM=2 TM=3.2 1,00 0,10 1,00 10,00 Ir/threshold 100,00 A-45 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Extremely Inverse ANSI Curves 1000,00 Curve equation: 28.2 0.1217 + ⋅ TM 2 I / IE − 1 ( ) 100,00 Operating time (s) I= earth fault current IE=set earth fault pick-up TM=1 10,00 TM=2 TM=3.2 1,00 0,10 1,00 10,00 Ir/threshold 100,00 A-46 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C Moderately Inverse ANSI Curves 1000,00 Curve equation: 0.0515 0.1114 + ⋅ TM 0.02 / 1 − I I E ( ) 100,00 Operating time (s) I= earth fault current IE=set earth fault pick-up TM=1 10,00 TM=2 TM=3.2 1,00 0,10 1,00 10,00 Ir/threshold 100,00 A-47 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Out line EPAC 3100 304,3 412,50 177,0 A-48 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3500 304,3 483,0 88,9 177,0 57,1 15,5 A-49 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Digital Inputs/Outputs Digital Inputs assignable to contacts of IO-1 or additional IO-1 board(s) Label on display Label on WinEPAC MMI WinEPAC screen Disturbance recording N° (*) TPE label Ffus LINE FUSE FAILURE TS1 53 IN.FUSE.FAILURE End MANUAL RECLOSING TS1 54 CLOSING SIGNAL Rece CARRIER RECEIVE TS1 55 CARRIER RECEIVED Recp CARRIER RECEIVE FOR TEE LINE TS1 60 TEE.LN.CAR.REC Vprt BLOCKING PROTECTION TS1 56 PROTECT.LOCK Bant THREE PHASE TRIP TS1 57 IN.GENE.3P.TRIP phde HF PRESENT/UNBLOCK TS1 58 HF/UNLOCK.REC. phdp HF PRESENT TEE/UNBLOCK TS1 59 TEE.HF/UNLO.REC Redu ZONE REDUCTION TS1 77 ZONE REACH cfg0 SETTING SWITCHOVER BIT 0 TS1 61 SWITCH BIT0 REC. cfg1 SETTING SWITCHOVER BIT 1 TS1 62 SWITCH BIT1 REC. Rede SIGNAL RECEIVE D.E.F. TS1 63 DEF.CARRIER.REC. Redp SIGNAL RECEIVE D.E.F. TEE LINE TS1 64 TEE.DEF.CAR.REC Pert DISTURBANCE RECORDER STARTING TS1 72 DISTURB.RECORD deca PHASE A TRIPPING TS2 73 A TRIPPING ARC decb PHASE B TRIPPING TS2 74 B TRIPPING ARC decc PHASE C TRIPPING TS2 75 C TRIPPING ARC DePS BACKUP PROTECTION TRIPPING TS2 76 TRIPPING BR barc AUTO-RECLOSER LOW PRESSURE TS2 65 ARC INSUF.PRESSU iarc RECLOSING IMPOSSIBLE TS2 66 ARC IMPOSSIBLE arcn AUTO-RECLOSER ENABLED TS2 67 ARC.ON.REC. arcf AUTO-RECLOSER DISABLED TS2 68 ARC.OFF.REC. cymn 1 PHASE CYCLE AUTO-RECLOSE TS2 69 ARC SINGLE CYCLE fusb BUSBAR FUSE FAILURE TS2 70 BAR.VT.FUS.FAIL. disc POLES DISCREPENCY TS2 71 POLE DISCREP. disj CB CLOSED TS2 78 CB CLOSED (*) WinTPE and COURIER MMI's assign a number to each disturbance digital signal sent by the EPAC. A-50 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C For instance, if digital inputs "carrier receive" (N° 55), "1 phase cycle auto-reclose" (N° 69) and digital outputs "carrier send" (N° 23), "Power swing detection" (N° 17) are set to start the disturbance recorder, they are sorted according to their number and, thus, have the following labels : Input/output WinTPE label COURIER label CARRIER RECEIVE LOGN03: RECEP. TELEACT. DIGITAL_GRP1_03 1 PHASE CYCLE AUTO-RECLOSE LOGN04: TS CYCLE MONO DIGITAL_GRP1_04 CARRIER SEND LOGN02: EMIS. TELEACT DIGITAL_GRP1_02 POWER SWING DETECTION LOGN01: DETECT. POMPAGE DIGITAL_GRP1_01 Digital Outputs assignable to contacts of IO-1 or IO-3, IO-2 or additional IO-1 or IO-3 board(s) Label Label on WinEPAC MMI on display WinEPAC screen Disturbance recording N° (*) TPE label DecA PHASE A TRIPPING TC1 4 A TRIPPING DecB PHASE B TRIPPING TC1 5 B TRIPPING DecC PHASE C TRIPPING TC1 6 C TRIPPING DecM SINGLE POLE TRIP TC1 7 SINGLE POLE TRIP Dec3 THREE-PHASE TRIP TC4 52 THREE POLES TRIP SelA PHASE A SELECTION TC1 8 A SELECTION SelB PHASE B SELECTION TC1 9 B SELECTION SelC PHASE C SELECTION TC1 10 C SELECTION Aval FORWARD DIRECTIONAL TC1 18 FORWARD FAULT Amo REVERSE DIRECTIONAL TC1 19 REVERSE FAULT Z1 ZONE 1 FAULT TC1 11 ZONE 1 Z2 ZONE 2 FAULT TC1 12 ZONE 2 Z3 ZONE 3 FAULT TC1 13 ZONE 3 Z4 ZONE 4 FAULT TC1 14 ZONE 4 Z5 ZONE 5 FAULT TC1 15 ZONE 5 Mro STARTING TC1 16 START-UP Poly MULTI PHASE FAULT TC2 26 MULTI-PHA FAULT Mono SINGLE PHASE FAULT TC2 27 SINGL-PHA FAULT Tele CARRIER SEND TC2 23 CARRIER SENT Telp CARRIER SEND FOR TEE LINE TC2 24 TEE.LN.CAR.SENT Auto SELF TEST IN PROGRESS TC2 1 SELF-TEST Alur URGENT ALARM TC2 2 URGENT ALARM Alnu NON URGENT ALARM TC2 3 NON-URG. ALARM Ffus FUSE FAILURE TC2 20 FUSE FAILURE A-51 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 DecF FUSE FAILURE TRIP TC4 50 FUSE FAIL.TRIP Varc AUTO-RECLOSER BLOCKING TC2 21 RECLOS. LOCKING Dver UNBLOCKING SIGNAL TRANSMISSION TC2 22 UNLOCK SENT Dvep UNBLOCKING SIGNAL TRANSMISSION FOR TEE LINE TC2 25 TEE.LN.UNLOC.SE cfg0 SWITCHOVER BIT 0 TC2 28 RE.SWITCH BIT 0 cfg1 SWITCHOVER BIT 1 TC2 29 RE.SWITCH BIT 1 Dpom POWER SWING DETECTION TC2 17 PWR.SWING DET. Tede DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON SIGNAL TC2 30 DEF.CARRIER.SE Tedp DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON SIGNAL FOR TEE LINE TC3 31 TEE.DEF.CAR.SE ddef D.E.F. TRIP TC3 32 PH.TO GR.FAULT Dwea WEAK-INFEED TRIP TC3 33 WEAK-INFEE TRIP auts AUTO-RECLOSE ENABLE BY SYNCHROCHECK TC3 36 AUTHOR.FROM.SC blar RECLAIM TIME IN PROGRESS TC3 34 ARC BLOCKING BArS BACKUP AUTO-RECLOSER BLOCKING TC3 35 ARC BLOCKING BR cmon 1 POLE RECLOSING CYCLE IN PROGRESS TC3 37 ARC SINGLE CYCLE ctri 3 POLE RECLOSING CYCLE IN PROGRESS TC3 38 ARC THREE CYCLE bant ALWAYS TRIP 3-PHASE TC3 39 GENERAL.3P.TRIP enc RECLOSING SIGNAL TC3 40 RECLOSING ORDER defs VOLTAGE FAULT BY SYNCHROCHECK TC3 41 FAULT.VOLT.SC amnu MIN U ALARM TC3 42 MIN U ALARM amxu MAX U ALARM TC3 43 MAX U ALARM amxi MAX I ALARM TC3 44 MAX I ALARM DefT EARTH FAULT TC3 45 DEF.TRIP Vpro PROTECTION BLOCKING TC4 51 PROT. BLOCKING Avtp DELAYED FORWARDS EARTH FAULT TC4 48 DELAY.FORW.FAULT Amtp DELAYED BACKWARDS EARTH FAULT TC4 49 DELAY.BACK.FAULT ArOn AUTO-RECLOSER ON TC4 46 AR ENABLED ArOf AUTO-RECLOSER OFF TC4 47 AR DISABLED A-52 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC COURIER messages Cell 0000 SYSTEM DATA: 0001 SYS Language 0002 SYS Password EPAC password 0003 SYS Fn. Links Enables/disables the setting of certain EPAC functions in normal user mode. 0004 SYS Description Description of protection type (16 characters maximum) 0005 SYS Plant Ref. Description of the EPAC’s location in the system (16 characters maximum) 0006 *SYS Model No. Description of protection model (16 characters maximum) 0007 *SYS Firmware Ref Description of EPAC version (16 characters maximum). Non-modifiable. 0008 *SYS Serial No. EPAC serial number. Non-modifiable. 0009 *SYS Frequency Nominal line frequency in Hz. 000A *SYS Comms Level COURIER protocol version used 000B *SYS Rly Address EPAC address on KBUS network 000C *SYS Plant Status Not available 000D *SYS Ctrl Status Not available 000E *SYS Setting Grp Active EPAC configuration number 000F *SYS LS Stage Not available 0010 *SYS CB Control Not available 0011 *SYS EPAC SoftRef EPAC board software version 0012 *SYS Interf. Ref User interface version 0014 *SYS IRIGB Ref IRIG-B board version 0020 *SYS Log1 Stat Digital input status on first input board 0021 *SYS Rel1 Stat Digital output status on second input board 0022 *SYS Alarms System alarms 0023 *SYS Log2 Stat Digital input status on first output board 0024 *SYS Rel2 Stat Digital output status on second output board 0100 USER CONTROLS: 0101 *USR Rly RealTime Absolute EPAC time 0102 *USR AR Ctrl Current status of auto-recloser 0103 *USR 1P Recl Cyc Number of high-speed single-phase cycles activated 0104 *USR 3P Recl Cyc Number of three-phase cycles activated 0105 *USR 1P-3P Cyc: Reinitialisation command for single-/three-phase cycle Clear Cnt = [0] counters 0106 USR Logic Ctrl Protection trip on/off 0107 USR Prot Ctrl Teleaction inhibited A-53 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 0200 FAULT RECORDS: 0201 FLT Record Sel Fault report to be consulted 0202 *FLT Record No Number of fault consulted 0203 *FLT Date Time and date of fault consulted 0204 → 0206 *FLT IA, FLT IB, FLT IC Current value on each phase during fault 0207 → 0209 *FLT VA, FLT VB, FLT VC Voltage value on each phase during fault 020A *FLT Freq Line frequency during fault 020B *FLT R Fault resistance 020C *FLT Ph Trip Phase(s) tripped on fault 020D *FLT Ph Sel Phase(s) selected on fault 020E *FLT Zone Fault zone 020F *FLT Location Fault distance 0210 FLT Trip Ind: Reset = [0] Command to turn off the EPAC’s front panel trip LED’s 0211 FTL Leds 0212 *FLT Faults : Clear Rec = [0] 0300 MEASUREMENTS: 0301/0302/ *MSR IA, MSR IB, 0303 MSR IC 0304 → 0306 *MSR VA, MSR VB, MSR VC 0307 → 0309 *MSR PA, MSR PB, MSR PC 030A → 030C *MSR QA, MSR QB, MSR QC Command to delete fault records Current value on each phase, as percentage of In Voltage value on each phase, as percentage of Vn Active power value on each phase, as percentage of Pn Reactive power value on each phase, as percentage of Qn 030D *MSR Freq Line frequency value 0400 SETTING COMMANDS: 0401 SET Active Setg: Retrieve = [0] Retrieves active EPAC configuration to consult/modify settings 0403 SET Current Setg: Save = [0] Saves current configuration on EPAC hard disk. 0500 SOFTWARE OPTIONS: 0501 *SFT License 1 First license number 0502 *SFT License 2 Second license number 0503 *SFT Iso Network Isolated or compensated network option 0504 *SFT Power Swing Power swing option A-54 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 0505 *SFT Def Function DEF protection option 0506 *SFT SynchroCheck Synchro-check option 0507 *SFT LDU Brd Display board option 0508 *SFT Flt Locator Fault locator option 0509 *SFT TPE Dist TPE disturbance recording option 050A *SFT AutoRecloser Auto-recloser option 050B *SFT VDEW Board VDEW communication board option 050C *SFT 4 SetGroups Setting groups option 050D *SFT 16DO Brd Additional IO-2 board 050E *SFT V>>,V<<,I>> Overvoltage, undervoltage and overload protection option 050F *SFT DO/DI Fixed Fixed DO/DI option 0510 *SFT 16DO/8DI Brd Additional IO-1 or IO-3 board 0511 *SFT VDEW Dist VDEW disturbance recording option 0512 *SFT AC Brd AC board option 0513 *SFT COURIER Comm COURIER communication option 0514 *SFT COURIER Dist COURIER disturbance recording option 0515 *SFT IRIG.B Synch IRIG-B time synchronisation option 0516 *SFT TPE Modem TPE modem option 0517 *SFT PWH Zero Sequence Power option 0518 *SFT Local Print Local printer option 0600 HARDWARE SETTING: 0601 *HRD AC Brd AC board 0602 *HRD 2nd I/O Brd Additional I/O board 0603 *HRD IRIG.B Brd IRIGB board 1000 LINE CHARACTERISTICS: 1001 LIN UN Nominal voltage 1002 LIN IN Nominal current 1003 LIN Line Length Length of line in km 1004 LIN Line Length Length of line in miles 1005 LIN Ku Voltage transformer 1006 LIN Ki Current transformer 1007 LIN Known Char Known line characteristics 1008 LIN Zd Positive sequence impedance Zd 1009 LIN Phid Zd argument A-55 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 100A LIN Z01 Zero sequence impedance Z01 100B LIN Phi01 Z01 argument 100C LIN Z02 Zero sequence impedance Z02 100D LIN Phi02 Z02 argument 100E LIN Rd Positive sequence resistance 100F LIN Xd Positive sequence reactance 1010 LIN R01 Zero sequence resistance 1011 LIN X01 Zero sequence reactance 1012 LIN R02 Zero sequence resistance 1013 LIN X02 Zero sequence reactance 1014 LIN K01r Real part of K01 1015 LIN K01x Imaginary part of K01 1016 LIN K02r Real part of K02 1017 LIN K02x Imaginary part of K02 1100 ZONE SETTING: 1101 ZON Z1 Zone 1 impedance 1102 ZON Z1Overreach Extended zone 1 impedance 1103 ZON T1 Zone 1 time delay 1104 ZON Z2 Zone 2 impedance 1105 ZON T2 Zone 2 time delay 1106 ZON Z3 Zone 3 impedance 1107 ZON T3 Zone 3 time delay 1108 ZON Dir. Z3 Zone 3 direction 1109 ZON Z4 Zone 4 impedance 110A ZON T4 Zone 4 time delay 110B ZON Z5 Zone 5 impedance 110C ZON T5 Zone 5 time delay 110D ZON T>> I> time delay 110E ZON T> I>> time delay 110F ZON Ph/Gnd RZ1 Single-phase loop resistance for zone 1 1110 ZON Ph/Ph RZ1 Two-phase loop resistance for zone 1 1111 ZON RLim Z2 Zone 2 loop resistance 1112 ZON RLim Z3 Zone 3 loop resistance 1113 ZON RLim Starter Start-up loop resistance 1114 ZON I>> Acti. I>> threshold activated 1115 ZON I>> I>> threshold value A-56 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 1116 ZON Dir. I>> I>> threshold direction 1117 ZON I> Acti. I> threshold activated 1118 ZON I> I> threshold value 1119 ZON Dir. I> I> threshold direction 1200 LOGIC SCHEME: 1201 LOG Trip Type Tripping type 1202 LOG Logic Schm Teleaction type 1203 LOG Zone Reduct Zone reduction 1204 LOG Bus Coupler Busbar isolation 1205 LOG HF/Unblk HF acceptance or unblocking 1206 LOG Car Sd Command type 1207 LOG tCARSD Transmission time delay 1300 TEE LINE LOGIC SCHEME: 1301 TEE Tee Line Tee line presence 1302 TEE Logic Schm Teleaction type 1303 TEE HF/Unblk Line carrier acceptance or unblocking 1304 TEE Car Sd Transmission type 1305 TEE tCARSD Transmission time delay 1400 WEAK-INFEED SETTING: 1401 WEA Weak-infeed Activation of Weak Infeed mode 1402 WEA Blk on PWS Blocking on power swing 1403 WEA Trip Mode Tripping authorisation 1404 WEA Conf by V< Confirmation by insufficient voltage 1405 WEA V< Insufficient voltage threshold 1406 WEA I> Open phase detection threshold 1407 WEA tTRIP Tripping time delay 1408 WEA tBLKDROPOFF Blocking time on drop-off of start-up element 1500 POWER SWING SETTING: 1501 PWS Detect Zone Power swing band impedance 1502 PWS Blk Type Blocking type 1503 PWS Trip Mode Tripping type 1504 PWS Indep Z1 First zone independent 1505 PWS Blk Car Sd Teleaction transmission blocking A-57 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 1506 PWS Blk Car Rec Teleaction reception blocking 1507 PWS tUNBLK Unlocking time delay on power swing 1508 PWS IR Unblk Unlocking on current threshold 1509 PWS Unblk IR> Unlocking threshold percentage 150A PWS IM Unblk Unlocking authorisation on Imax 150B PWS Unblk IM> Unlocking threshold on Imax 150C PWS I2 Unblk Unlocking on current threshold 150D PWS Unblk I2> Unlocking threshold percentage 1600 DEF SETTING: 1601 DEF Def Activation of DEF mode 1602 DEF VR> Residual voltage threshold 1603 DEF Forward IR> Threshold of residual current for forward fault 1604 DEF Trip Schm Tripping type 1605 DEF Indep Chan Independent teleaction channel 1606 DEF Logic Schm Type of tripping scheme 1607 DEF tCARSD Time delay for teleaction transmission 1608 DEF Tee Log Schm Type of tee line tripping scheme 1609 DEF Tee tCARSD Time delay for tee line teleaction transmission 160A DEF tOPERATE Operation time delay 160B DEF BackUp Rly Activation of backup protection 160C DEF BackUp ARBlk Auto-recloser blocking by backup protection 160D DEF IR>> Residual current threshold 160E DEF I Factor Multiplier factor I 160F DEF P Factor Multiplier factor V 1610 DEF Curves Curve standard 1611 DEF IEC Curves Type of IEC curve 1612 DEF ANSI Curves Type of ANSI curve 1700 AUTO-RECLOSER SETTINGS: 1701 ARC t1PFASTDEAD Time delay for high-speed single-phase cycle 1702 ARC t3PFASTDEAD Time delay for high-speed three-phase cycle 1703 ARC tSLOWDEAD Time delay for low-speed cycle 1704 ARC Recl Time Duration of reclosing order 1705 ARC tRECLAIM Reclaim time 1706 ARC tRECLAIMBKUP Backup protection reclaim time 1707 ARC 1P Recl Mode Single-phase reclosing/tripping mode A-58 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 1708 ARC 3P Recl Mode Three-phase reclosing/tripping mode 1709 ARC 3P Recl BkUp Backup protection reclosing/tripping mode 1800 ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORK: 1801 ISO Iso Network RNI presence 1802 ISO tPermanent Permanent fault signal time delay 1803 ISO Loop Sel Loop selection criterion 1804 ISO IR> Residual current threshold 1805 ISO VR> Residual voltage threshold 1806 ISO Ph/Gnd Trip Tripping on maximum residual voltage 1807 ISO tTRIP Tripping time delay 1808 ISO PWH Zero-sequence power activated 1809 ISO Kir Current reductor 180A ISO IR> Residual current threshold 180B ISO KpIr Power multiplier K 180C ISO TRIP Arg. Tripping phase angle 180D ISO I> I1 threshold for a max. primary torus phase angle 180E ISO I> Arg. Primary torus phase angle at I1 180F ISO I>> I2 threshold for a max. primary torus phase angle 1810 ISO I>> Arg. Primary torus phase angle at I2 1811 ISO tRestart Auto-start faults period 1900 SYNCHRO-CHECK SETTINGS: 1901 SYN Sync Schm Type of synchro-check 1902 SYN Sync 3P 1Dd Synchro-check on high-speed three-phase cycle 1903 SYN Busbar V< Threshold for absence of busbar voltage 1904 SYN Line V< Threshold for absence of line voltage 1905 SYN Line V> Threshold for presence of line voltage 1906 SYN Busbar V> Threshold for presence of busbar voltage 1907 SYN (VLn-VBb)< Threshold for Uline-Ubusbar difference 1908 SYN (FLn-FBb)< Threshold for Fline-Fbusbar difference 1909 SYN (PhLn-PhBb)< Threshold for PHIline-PHIbusbar difference 190A SYN tLLLB Loopback time delay 190B SYN Phase Sel Phase selected 1A00 V>>, V<<, I>>: 1A01 OVL V<< & V>> Relay activated 1A02 OVL V<< Min U threshold A-59 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 1A03 OVL V<< tTRIP Min U tripping time 1A04 OVL V>> Max U threshold 1A05 OVL V>> tALARM Max U time delay 1A06 OVL Trip on V>> Tripping on Max U 1A07 OVL I>> Overload protection 1A08 OVL I1> Fixed threshold I1 1A09 OVL tTRIP I1> Threshold I1 tripping time delay 1A0A OVL I2> Fixed threshold I2 1A0B OVL tTRIP I2> Threshold I2 tripping time delay 1A0C OVL I3> Fixed threshold I3 1A0D OVL tTRIP I3> Threshold I3 tripping time delay 1A0E OVL Curves Curve type 1A0F OVL IEC Curves Choice of IEC curve 1A10 OVL ANSI Curves Choice of ANSI curve 1A11 OVL I Factor Line current threshold 1A12 OVL I> Multiplier factor 1B00 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS: 1B01 MIS Trip Seal-in Seal-in if current present 1B02 MIS Seal-in I> Current threshold for seal-in 1B03 MIS AR Blk Time delay for auto-recloser locking 1B04 MIS AR on Flt I> Threshold for reclosing on fault 1B05 MIS tREVGUARD Additional time for reverse directional 1C00 FUSE FAILURE: 1C01 FUS I0,I1 Thr. I0,I1 current threshold 1C02 FUS tAlarm Alarm time delay 1C03 FUS IFus>Acti. Ifus> threshold activated 1C04 FUS IFus> Ifus> threshold value 1C05 FUS tFus> Ifus> threshold time delay 1C06 FUS IFus>>Acti. Ifus>> threshold activated 1C07 FUS IFus>> Ifus>> threshold value 1C08 FUS tFus>> Ifus> threshold time delay 1C09 FUS IR>Acti. Ir> threshold activated 1C0A FUS IRs> Ir> threshold value 1C0B FUS tIR> fr> threshold time delay 1C0C FUS AR Blk Autorecloser blocking A-60 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 2000 TPE PARAMETERS: 2001 TPE Synchr by UR Synchronisation by UR 2002 TPE EPAC Addr UR EPAC UR address 2003 TPE Baud Rate Modem baud rate 2004 TPE Phone Number Phone number 2005 TPE Modem Init Modem configuration message 2100 LOCAL PRINTER CONFIGURATION: 2101 PRN DRIVER 3000 OUTPUT CONFIGURATION: 3001 DO1 A Trip A phase tripping 3002 DO1 B Trip B phase tripping 3003 DO1 C Trip C phase tripping 3004 DO1 1P Trip Single pole tripping 3005 DO1 FusFail Trip Fuse failure tripping 3006 DO1 A Sel A phase selection 3007 DO1 B Sel B phase selection 3008 DO1 C Sel C phase selection 3009 DO1 Fwd Dir Forward directional 300A DO1 Rev Di Reverse directional 300B DO1 Z1 Dec Zone 1 fault 300C DO1 Z2 Dec Zone 2 fault 300D DO1 Z3 Dec Zone 3 fault 300E DO1 Z4 Dec Zone 4 fault 300F DO1 Z5 Dec Zone 5 fault 3010 DO1 Prot Start Distance protection start-up 3011 DO1 Ph/Ph Flt Multi-phase fault 3012 DO1 Ph/Gnd Flt Single-phase fault 3013 DO1 Car Sd Teleaction transmission 3014 DO1 Tee Car Sd Teleaction transmission for tee line 3015 DO1 Self-tests Self-test in progress 3016 DO1 Urg Alarm Urgent alarm 3017 DO1 NonUrg Alarm Non-urgent alarm 3018 DO1 Fus Fail Fuse failure 3019 DO1 AR Blk Cmd Auto-recloser blocking 301A DO1 Unblk Sd Unblocking transmission 301B DO1 Tee Unblk Sd Tee line unblocking transmission Local printer driver A-61 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 301C DO1 SwOver Bit 0 Bit 0 switchover 301D DO1 SwOver Bit 1 Bit 1 switchover 301E DO1 Pws Detect Detection of power swing 301F DO1 Def Sd Directional comparison transmission 3020 DO1 Tee Def Sd Tee line directional comparison transmission 3021 DO1 Def Trip Tripping by DEF protection 3022 DO1 Weak Trip Tripping by Weak Infeed 3023 DO1 AR Enabled Tripping authorisation by synchro-check 3024 DO1 AR Blk Auto-recloser blocking 3025 DO1 BkUp AR Blk Low-speed auto-recloser blocking 3026 DO1 1P AR Cyc Single-phase cycle in progress 3027 DO1 3P AR Cyc Three-phase cycle in progress 3028 DO1 3P Trip Ordinary three-phase trip 3029 DO1 CB Close Reclosing signal 302A DO1 Sync V Flt Voltage fault by synchro-check 302B DO1 V<< Alarm MinU alarm 302C DO1 V>> Alarm Max U alarm 302D DO1 I>> Alarm Overload alarm 302E DO1 Earth Flt Ground fault 302F DO1 Del. Fwd Flt Delayed forward earth fault 3030 DO1 Del. Rev Flt Delayed backward earth fault 3031 DO1 AR ON Auto-recloser enabled 3032 DO1 AR OFF Auto-recloser disabled 3033 DO1 Prot. Blk Protection blocked 3034 DO1 3P Tripping Three-phase tripping 3100 OUTPUT CONFIGURATION (2ND BOARD): 3101 → 3134 3200 3201 → 3234 The same outputs are configured as on the first board. Their name has a DO2 prefix. OUTPUT SETTING FOR DISTURBANCE: The same outputs are configured for disturbance recording as on the digital output board(s). Their name has a DOD prefix. Setting possible: - No: Cannot start up disturbance recording. - Low to High: Start-up from low to high. - High to Low: Start-up from high to low. - No trip: Without tripping. A-62 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 4000 INPUT CONFIGURATION: 4001 DI1 Fus Fai Fuse failure 4002 DI1 Manual Recl Manual tripping 4003 DI1 Car Rec Teleaction reception 4004 DI1 Tee Car Rec Teleaction reception for tee line 4005 DI1 Prot Blk Protection blocking 4006 DI1 3P Trip Ordinary three-phase tripping 4007 DI1 HF/Unblk HF acceptance or unblocking 4008 DI1 Tee HF/Unblk HF acceptance or unblocking with teeline 4009 DI1 Zone Reduct Zone reduction 400A DI1 SwOver Bit 0 Bit 0 switchover 400B DI1 SwOver Bit 1 Bit 1 switchover 400C DI1 Def Rec Reception of directional teleaction for DEF protection 400D DI1 Tee Def Rec Reception of directional teleaction for tee line for DEF protection 400E DI1 Start Dist Disturbance recording start-up 400F DI1 A Trip A phase tripping 4010 DI1 B Trip B phase tripping 4011 DI1 C Trip C phase tripping 4012 DI1 BkUp Trip Tripping by backup protection 4013 DI1 Low Pression Low auto-recloser pressure 4014 DI1 No Recl Reclosing impossible 4015 DI1 AR ON Auto-recloser enabled 4016 DI1 AR OFF Auto-recloser disabled 4017 DI1 1P AR Cyc Single-phase cycle in progress 4018 DI1 Bb Fus Fail Busbar fuse failure 4019 DI1 P Discrep Poles discrepancy 401A DI1 CB Closed Three-phase circuit breaker position 4100 INPUT CONFIGURATION (2ND BOARD) 4101→ 411A 4200 4201→ 421A The same inputs are configured as on the digital input board(s). Their name has a DI2 prefix. INPUT SETTING FOR DISTURBANCE: The same inputs are configured for disturbance recording as on the first board. Their name has a DID prefix. Setting possible: - No: Cannot start up disturbance recording. - Low to High: Start-up from low to high. - High to Low: Start-up from high to low. - No trip: Without tripping. A-63 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 5000 ANALOGUE SETTING FOR DISTURBANCE: 5001 ASD Analog Trig Analogue thresholds 5002 ASD IA> Maximum A phase current start-up threshold 5003 ASD IA< Minimum A phase current start-up threshold 5004 ASD IB> Maximum B phase current start-up threshold 5005 ASD IB< Minimum B phase current start-up threshold 5006 ASD IC> Maximum C phase current start-up threshold 5007 ASD IC< Minimum C phase current start-up threshold 5008 ASD IR> Maximum residual current start-up threshold 5009 ASD IR< Minimum residual current start-up threshold 500A ASD VA> Maximum A phase voltage start-up threshold 500B ASD VA< Minimum A phase voltage start-up threshold 500C ASD VB> Maximum B phase voltage start-up threshold 500D ASD VB< Minimum B phase voltage start-up threshold 500E ASD VC> Maximum C phase voltage start-up threshold 500F ASD VC< Minimum C phase voltage start-up threshold 5010 ASD VR> Maximum residual voltage start-up threshold 5011 ASD VR< Minimum residual voltage start-up threshold 5012 ASD F> Maximum frequency threshold 5013 ASD F< Minimum frequency threshold 8000 RECORDER: 8001 *REC Control Recorder status 8002 *REC Capture Type of samples recorded 8003 REC Pre Trigger Duration of pre-time for next record 8004 REC Post Trigger Duration of post-time for next record 9000 DISTURBANCE REC.: 9001 DIS Record No Event number 9002 *DIS Trigger Time Trigger time 9003 *DIS Ch Available List of channels available for recording 9004 *DIS Ch Types Type of channels available for recording 9005 *DIS Upload channel offsets Offset values 9006 *DIS Upload Scaling Factors Factors applied to all samples on the channel 9007 *DIS Upload Skew Values At 0 9008 *DIS Upload Minimum Values Minimum Values 9009 *DIS Upload Maximum Values Maximum Values 9010 *DIS Rec Length Number of samples recorded A-64 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C 9011 *DIS Trigger Posn Number of first sample 9012 *DIS Time Base Interval coefficient 9013 *DIS Delta T Difference between two successive samples *DIS Upload channel 0 to 7 Uploads samples from channels 0 to 7 9020→ 9027 *DIS Upload digital group 9028/9029 1 to 2 Uploads digital groups 1 to 2 A000 MAINTENANCE DATA: A001 MNT Record Sel Maintenance record selector A002 *MNT Record No Maintenance record number A003 *MNT Date Maintenance record date A003 *MNT Boards Faulty boards A005 *MNT Gravity Gravity of fault A006 *MNT Fail Typ1 Nature of fault A007 *MNT Fail Typ2 Nature of fault A008 *MNT Fail Typ3 Nature of fault A009 *MNT Fail Typ4 Nature of fault A00A *MNT Fail Typ5 Nature of fault A00B *MNT Error Code Error code A00C *MNT Alarms Ind Alarm acknowledgement A00D *MNT Maint. : Clear Rec = [0] Command to delete maintenance records BF00 COMM SYSTEM DATA: BF01 *COM Rec Ctrl Area of the EPAC database containing the elements required to control the recording of disturbance events BF02 *COM Rec Load Area of the EPAC database containing the elements required to retrieve and manage a disturbance event that has been recorded. (*) Data non settable A-65 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Display Functions Level 1 LEDS CONF__ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 PARA(1) | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | PROT__ | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | LIGN |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ SURV |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ TELE |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ PIQU |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ Level 5 Comments (Help) Reset Leds UN IN FREQ LONG KU KI R01 R02 X01 X02 Xd Rd Nominal voltage in Volts Nominal current in Amps Nominal frequency in Hz Line length in Km or miles Voltage transformer ratio Current transformer ratio Zone 1 zero sequence resistance Start-up zero sequence resistance Zone 1 zero sequence reactance Start-up zero sequence reactance Positive sequence reactance in Ohms Positive sequence resistance in Ohms Z1 Z1e T1 Z2 T2 Z3 T3 DiZ3 Z4 T4 Z5 T5 T6 T7 R1m R1b R2 R3 Rmr AI>> I>> DI>> AI> I> DI> Zone 1 impedance in Ohms Overreach zone 1 impedance in Ohms First step time delay in ms Zone 2 impedance in Ohms Second step time delay in ms Zone 3 impedance in Ohms Third step time delay in ms Zone 3 direction Zone 4 impedance in Ohms Fourth step time delay in ms Zone 5 impedance in Ohms Fifth step time delay in ms I> threshold time delay in ms I>> threshold time delay in ms Phase-earth resist. zone 1 Phase-phase resist. zone 1 Limit resistance for zone 2 Limit resistance for zone 3 Start-up limit resistance I>> current threshold enabled I>> current threshold in IN I>> current threshold direction I> current threshold enabled I> current threshold in IN I> current threshold direction Dec Type Redu Phde Emis Temi DebB Tripping type (Mono/Ban1/Ban2) Distance protection type Zone reach control (Yes/No) Dist. prot. control (Pas/Dev/Prmf) Emission type (Ez1/Ez2/Ez5) Transmission time delay Busbar isolation (Yes/No) Acti Type Phde Emis Temi Tee line enabled (Yes/No) Distance protection scheme Dist. prot. control (Pas/Dev/Prmf) Emission type Transmission time delay A-66 EPAC 3100/3500 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | MS/M 1.6882-C |_______ | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | WEAK |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ POMP |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ FFUS |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ SEAL |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ DEFD |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ DEFI |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ Acti Verp Dec Conu Smtw Smcw Tdec Tver Weak-infeed enabled (Yes/No) Blocking on power swing (Yes/No) Tripping type Confirmation by under voltage Under voltage threshold in % of Vn Current detection threshold Tripping time delay in ms Blocking time delay in ms Bdpm tDec tver Z1in Vrem Vert Tdvr Scir Ir% Scii Ii% Scim Imax Power swing boundary in Ohms Tripping type (1-phase/3-phase) Blocking type 1st zone independent Carrier send blocking Carrier receive blocking Time delay for unblocking on power swing Unblocking on Ir Ir threshold in % of Imax Unblocking on Ii Ii threshold in % of Imax Unblocking on Imax Imax threshold in % of IN Sffi Tffs AI> If> Tf> AI>> If>> Tf>> AIr> Ir> TIr> Verf I0 and I1 threshold detection Fuse failure alarm time delay in s If> threshold enabled If> threshold If> tripping time delay If>> threshold enabled If>> threshold If>> tripping time delay Ir> threshold enabled Ir> threshold Ir> tripping time delay Auto-recloser blocking on Ifus tripping Seal Isea Venc Ienc Rvg Seal-In enabled (Yes/No) Seal-in current threshold in % of IN Auto-recloser blocking Threshold for CB closed on fault. Reverse Guard time delay (Norm or Def) Acti Vrd Ied Dec. Cane Type Tran Typi Trai Tfon DEF enabled (Yes/No) Vr start-up threshold IR forward start-up threshold Tripping type (1-phase, 3-phase) Independent teleprot. channel (Yes/No) Teleprotection scheme (auto/bloc) Teleprotection time delay Tee-line teleprotection scheme Tee-line teleprotection time delay Operation time Acti Tfon Ie Coei Inverse time enabled (No/Current/Power) Operation time Ir start-up threshold Multiplier ratio (current) A-67 MS/M 1.6882-C | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | EPAC 3100/3500 | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | |_______ |______ |_______ |_______ |_______ ARC |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ SYNC |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ PET |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ RELU |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ RELI |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ Coep Tyno TyCb TypU VArS Multiplier ratio (power) Standard type (IEC or ANSI) Curve type (current) ANSI curve type AR blocked on backup prot. trip Tcrm Tcrt Tclt Tenc Tbloc Tbps Mono Tri Mrps Single pole recl (1st dead time) Three pole recl. (1st dead time) Three pole recl. (other dead time) Reclosing time delay Reclaim time Delayed reclaim time Recl. mode on single pole tripping. Recl. mode on three pole tripping.. Recl. mode on backup tripping. Type Vpl Vpb Val Vab Evec Efre Epha Tbou vlin Cutr Synchro-check scheme Live line threshold Live busbar threshold Dead line threshold Dead busbar threshold Uligne - Ubarre threshold Fligne - Fbarre threshold PHligne - PHbarre threshold Live busbar / live line delay Phase selected for voltage Synchrocheck on high speed cycle Acti Tdsp Type SIr2 Scr Str Dec Temp APWH Kir SIr KpIr DpIr I1 DI1 I2 DI2 Pdfr PET enabled (Yes/No) Permanent fault time delay Phase selection criteria Ir current threshold for double faults Residual current threshold Residual voltage threshold Tripping authorised (Yes/No) Tripping time delay Zero-seq. power function enabled Ir current reductor Residual current threshold. Power factor K Characteristics angle I1 threshold on primary torus I1 phase angle on primary torus I2 threshold on primary torus I2 phase angle on primary torus Auto-start fault period Acti Vbas Tmnu Vhau Tmxu DmxU Max U/Min U relays enabled (Yes/No) Min U voltage threshold Min U tripping time delay Max U voltage threshold Min U tripping or alarm time delay Max U tripping (Yes/No) Acti I1 TpI1 I2 TpI2 MaxI relay enabled (Yes/No) I1 fixed threshold I1 threshold tripping time delay I2 fixed threshold I2 threshold tripping time delay A-68 EPAC 3100/3500 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | MS/M 1.6882-C | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | |_______ | I-O____ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |______ |_______ |______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ COMM |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ IMP |_______ OUT1 |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ I3 TpI3 Tyno TypC TypU Tm Is I3 fixed threshold I3 threshold tripping time delay Standard type (IEC or ANSI) IEC curve type ANSI curve type IEC multiplier coefficient Current threshold AdUA BMod SyUR AVde BKBs ACou TPE address Modem rate Synchronisation by UR VDEW address VDEW communication time delay Courier address Type Local printer type DecA DecB DecC DecM Decf SelA SelB SelC Aval Amo Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Mro Poly Mono Tele Telp Auto Alur Alnu Ffus Varc Dver Dvep cfg0 cfg1 Dpom Tede Tedp ddef Dwea auts blar BArS cmon ctri bant enc defs amnu Phase A tripping Phase B tripping Phase C tripping One phase tripping Fuse failure tripping Phase A selection Phase B selection Phase C selection Forward directional Reverse directional Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Start-up Multi-phase fault One-phase fault Carrier send Carrier send for tee line Self-test in progress Urgent alarm Non-urgent alarm Fuse failure alarm Auto-recloser blocking Unblocking signal transmission Unblocking signal transmission for tee line bit0 switchover bit1 switchover Power swing detection Directional comparison signal Directional comparison signal for tee line Tripping by DEF protection Tripping by Weak-infeed protection Recl. enabled by synchro-check Auto-recloser blocking Back-up auto-recloser blocking Single pole cycle in progress Three pole cycle in progress Analyse trip 3-phase Reclosing signal AC Voltage fault MinU alarm A-69 MS/M 1.6882-C | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | EPAC 3100/3500 | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ OUT2 |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ amxu amxi DefT Avtp Amtp ArOn ArOf Vpro Dec3 MaxU alarm MaxI alarm Ground fault Delayed forward ground fault Delayed reverse ground fault Auto-recloser enabled Auto-recloser disabled Protection blocking Three-pole tripping DecA DecB DecC DecM Decf SelA SelB SelC Aval Amo Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Mro Poly Mono Tele Telp Auto Alur Alnu Ffus Varc Dver Dvep cfg0 cfg1 Dpom Tede Tedp ddef Dwea auts blar BArS cmon ctri bant enc defs amnu amxu amxi DefT Avtp Amtp ArOn Phase A tripping Phase B tripping Phase C tripping One phase tripping Fuse failure tripping Phase A selection Phase B selection Phase C selection Forward directional Reverse directional Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Start-up Multi-phase fault One-phase fault Carrier send Carrier send for tee line Self-test in progress Urgent alarm Non-urgent alarm Fuse failure alarm Auto-recloser blocking Unblocking signal transmission Unblocking signal transmission for tee line bit0 switchover bit1 switchover Power swing detection Directional comparison signal Directional comparison signal for tee line Tripping by DEF protection Tripping by Weak-infeed protection recl. enabled by synchro-check Auto-recloser blocking Back-up auto-recloser blocking Single pole cycle in progress Three pole cycle in progress Ordinary 3-phase trip Reclosing signal AC Voltage fault MinU alarm MaxU alarm MaxI alarm Ground fault Delayed forward ground fault Delayed reverse ground fault Auto-recloser enabled A-70 EPAC 3100/3500 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ MS/M 1.6882-C | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |_______ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | VALI |_______ |_______ |_______ INP1 |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ INP2 |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ ArOf Vpro Dec3 Auto-recloser disabled Protection blocking Three-pole tripping Ffus Encl Rece Recp Vprt Bant phde phdp Redu cfg0 cfg1 Rede Redp Pert deca decb decc DePS barc iarc arcn arcf cymn fusb disc disj Fuse failure signal CB closed Carrier reception Carrier reception for tee line Protection blocking Ordinary 3-phase trip HF acceptance or unblocking HF acceptance or unblocking for tee line Zone reach control signal reception bit0 switchover bit1 switchover Directional comparison signal Directional comparison signal for tee line Disturbance recording starting Phase A tripping Phase B tripping Phase C tripping External backup prot. trip. signal Low pressure Reclosing impossible Auto-recloser enabled Auto-recloser disabled One-pole cycle in progress Busbar fuse failure Pole discrepancy CB closed Ffus Encl Rece Recp Vprt Bant phde phdp Redu cfg0 cfg1 Rede Redp Pert deca decb decc DePS barc iarc arcn arcf cymn fusb disc disj Fuse failure signal CB closed Carrier reception Carrier reception for tee line Protection blocking Ordinary 3-phase trip HF acceptance or unblocking HF acceptance or unblocking for tee line Zone reach control signal reception bit0 switchover bit1 switchover Directional comparison signal Directional comparison signal for tee line Disturbance recording starting Phase A tripping Phase B tripping Phase C tripping External backup prot. trip. signal Low pressure Reclosing impossible Auto-recloser enabled Auto-recloser disabled One-pole cycle in progress Busbar fuse failure Pole discrepancy CB closed Current configuration transmission A-71 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 | |_______ DFIN | |_______ Num | |_______ Post | |_______ Dep | |_______ Opt1 | |_______ LIC1 | |_______ LIC2 | |_______ LANG | |_______ Dist | |_______ Decl | |_______ ACTI |EVEN____ LIST______ | | |_______ EV1 | | |_______ EV2 | | |_______ EV3 | | |_______ EV4 | | |_______ EV5 | | |_______ EV6 | | |_______ EV7 | | |_______ EV8 | | |_______ EV9 | | |_______ EV10 | EFF________________________________________ MES__________________________________________________ Configuration number (1-4) Substation name Feeder name Additional I/O card (Yes/No) 1st license word 2nd license word Language (Fr/Ang/All/Esp) Length unit (Km/Ml) Length unit in fault records (Km/Ml/ %L/ΩB/ΩH) Active configuration switchover Event record 1 Event record 2 Event record 3 Event record 4 Event record 5 Event record 6 Event record 7 Event record 8 Event record 9 Event record 10 Reset Event records Network measurements (PA,B,C/QA,B,C/UA,B,C/ZA,B,C/FREQ/ OUT1/INP1/DATE/TIME/TRAN) ARC______ ETAT | CMD |_______ |_______ MAIN |_______ | | |_______ |_______ | | | | | | | | | | PASS |_______ |_______ DATE |_______ |_______ ACQU(2) LIST_______ | | | | | | | | | | EFF Auto-recloser and counter status (Mono/Tri/Etat) ARC cpts Change auto-recloser status (ON/OFF) Reset counters Date Heur View and change date View and change time Ack. alarms and type in password |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ DF1 DF2 DF3 DF4 DF5 DF6 DF7 DF8 DF9 DF10 SAIS MODI Type in current password Change password Select configuration number CHXCONF PERT |_______ | | | llis | | | Fault report 1 Fault report 2 Fault report 3 Fault report 4 Fault report 5 Fault report 6 Fault report 7 Fault report 8 Fault report 9 Fault report 10 Reset fault reports |_______ |_______ |_______ Per1 Per2 Per3 Disturbance Disturbance Disturbance Disturbance record record record record list 1 2 3 A-72 EPAC 3100/3500 | | | | | | | | LANG | | | | | | | EFF MS/M 1.6882-C |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ |_______ Per4 Per5 Per6 Per7 Per8 Per9 Pe10 Disturbance record 4 Disturbance record 5 Disturbance record 6 Disturbance record 7 Disturbance record 8 Disturbance record 9 Disturbance record 10 Reset disturbance records Temporary display language A-73 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Connections to a PC or a printer WinEPAC Front view of the EPAC TRIP GEC ALSTHOM ALARM DCL 382 cable RELAY AVAILABLE DB 25 SET TERMINAL 1 Help TERMINAL 2 WinEPAC PC DB 25 WinV24 Front view of the EPAC TRIP GEC ALSTHOM ALARM RELAY AVAILABLE DCL 382 cable SET TERMINAL 1 Help TERMINAL 2 DB 25 WinV24 PC DB 25 Printer Front view of the EPAC TRIP GEC ALSTHOM ALARM RELAY AVAILABLE DCL 399 cable SET TERMINAL 1 Help TERMINAL 2 DB25 DB 25 The printer settings must be the following: 9600 bps, 7 bits, 1 stop bit, even parity. Local printer A-74 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C WinMODEM DB9 (Serial port) DCL 396 cable Remote PC for disturbance records (WinModem and WinAnalyse) DCL 396 cable Rear view of the EPAC DB 25 DB 25 Modem Modem K-Bus-COURIER Rear view of the EPAC DB9 (Serial port) RS 485 (K-Bus) RS 232 (CEI 870-5) COURIER Master Station KITZ A-75 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Current loop (to UR) Rear view of the EPAC UR 2000-2 Restitution unit (TPE 2000-2) VDEW Rear view of the EPAC DB9 (Serial port) Optical fibre VDEW Master Station Transmitter Receiver A-76 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC functions / models EPAC 31xx : Flush panel mounting EPAC 35xx : Rack panel mounting Specifications Distance protection Five zones of protection Directional overcurrent start-up Full range of teleaction schemes 3111 3112 3113 3116 3121 3122 3123 3126 3131 3132 3133 3136 3511 3512 3513 3526 3521 3522 3523 3526 3531 3532 3533 3536 X X X X X X X X X X X X Power-swing tripping X X X X X X X X X X X X Single or three pole tripping X X X X X X X X X X X X Directional earth fault (DEF) or IDMT element for high resistance earth faults X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Additional overload, overvoltage and undervoltage protection Voltage and check synchronism functions Automatic single and/or three-pole autoreclose function X X X X X X X X X X X X Four independent user selectable setting groups X X X X X X X X X X X X Fault location X X X X X X X X X X X X Ten fault reports stored in non-volatile mass memory X X X X X X X X X X X X Automatic down-loading of fault reports to a printer X X X X X X X X X Oscillography stored in non-volatile memory X X X X X X X X X X X X X IRIG-B input for real-time clock synchronisation Substation communications via X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X K-Bus, VDEW or TPE Front panel LCD display X One IO-1board: 8 programmable inputs 16 programmable output contacts 3 tripping contacts 1 fault device contact X Two IO-1boards: 16 programmable inputs 32 programmable output contacts 6 tripping contacts 2 circuit breaker reclosing contacts 2 fault device contact One IO-3board: 8 programmable inputs 13 programmable output contacts 6 tripping contacts 1 fault device contact Two IO-3 boards: 16 programmable inputs 26 programmable output contacts 6 tripping contacts 2 fault device contact X X X X X X X X X X X X X A-77 MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 Digital outputs allocation It is not possible to allocate serveral outputs on one contact except for the following : - Phase A tripping Phase B tripping Phase C tripping Single pole trip Three-phase trip D.E.F. trip Weak infeed trip Fuse failure trip OR - Phase A selection - Phase B selection - Phase C selection OR - OR - Unblocking signal transmission - Unblocking signal transmission for tee line OR - Single phase fault - Multi phase fault OR - Carrier send - Carrier send for tee line OR - OR - Directional comparison signal - Directional comparison signal for tee line OR - 1 pole reclosing cycle in progress - 3 pole reclosing cycle in progress OR - Min U alarm - Max U alarm - Max I alarm Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone 1 2 3 4 5 fault fault fault fault fault Self test in progress Urgent alarm Non urgent alarm Fuse failure Power swing detection A-78 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE MS/M 1.6882-C EPAC 3100/3500 APPENDIX B Sofware Version V6 EPAC 3100/3500 MS/M 1.6882-C BLANK PAGE % 060& (3$& &217(17 3$*( ,1752'8&7,21 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % % 1(:)81&7,216 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % % &XUUHQW7UDQVIRUPHU6XSHUYLVLRQ &76 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % % %URNHQ&RQGXFWRU %& BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % % (92/87,2162)(;,67,1*)81&7,216 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % % B2.1.1. B2.1.2. B2.1.3. 'LVWDQFH3URWHFWLRQBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB Overcurrent Starting Supervision ___________________________________________ Zone Reach Control_____________________________________________________ Weak-infeed mode______________________________________________________ % B-7 B-8 B-9 % B2.2.1. B2.2.2. B2.2.3. $XWRUHFORVHUBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % Discrimination Timer_____________________________________________________ B-9 Recloser Exclusion Logic _________________________________________________ B-10 Prolonged A/R Block control input __________________________________________ B-11 % 27+(502',),&$7,216 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % % 8VHULQWHUIDFH BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % B3.1.1. Front panel display______________________________________________________ B-12 B3.1.2. PAS&T _______________________________________________________________ B-12 % $GGLWLRQDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB % B3.2.1. Control inputs __________________________________________________________ B-12 B3.2.2. Output messages (may be programmed to assert output relays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ØØ PROT Ú LIGN ØØØØØØØ CTS Ú Acts ØVr< ØIr> ØTcts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ØØ PROT Ú LIGN ØØØØØØØØ BRK Ú Abrk $FWLYDWLRQGHDFWLYDWLRQRI%&IXQFWLRQ ØDec (QDEOHGLVDEOHWULSSLQJRQEURNHQFRQGXFWRU GHWHFWLRQ ØI21> 6HWWLQJRI,,WKUHVKROG Øtbrk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ØØ PROT Ú LIGN Ø SURV ÚØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØØ × AImr $FWLYDWLRQGHDFWLYDWLRQRIRYHUFXUUHQWVXSHUYLVLRQ ØImr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ØØ PROT Ú LIGN ØØØØØØØØØØØ ARC Ú Tcrm ØØØØØØØØØ tdrc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